e2e200 en 40 change control management 2007
TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
© SAP AG 2006
E2E200 Change Control Management
THE BEST-RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP
© SAP AG 2007
E2E200Change Control Management
SAP Solution Manager 4.0 2007/Q2 Materialnummer: 50084558
![Page 2: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
© SAP AG 2006
Copyright
Copyright 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x, System z, System z9, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, Informix, i5/OS, POWER, POWER5, POWER5+, OpenPower and PowerPC are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group. Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
![Page 3: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden. SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.
The information in this document is proprietary to SAP. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express prior written permission of SAP AG.
This document is a preliminary version and not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement with SAP. This document contains only intended strategies, developments, and functionalities of the SAP® product and is not intended to be binding upon SAP to any particular course of business, product strategy, and/or development. Please note that this document is subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time without notice.
SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. SAP does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, links, or other items contained within this material. This document is provided without a warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement.
SAP shall have no liability for damages of any kind including without limitation direct, special, indirect, or consequential damages that may result from the use of these materials. This limitation shall not apply in cases of intent or gross negligence.
The statutory liability for personal injury and defective products is not affected. SAP has no control over the information that you may access through the use of hot links contained in these materials and does not endorse your use of third-party Web pages nor provide any warranty whatsoever relating to third-party Web pages.
![Page 4: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Required Knowledge:
Fundamentals of SAP Software Change Management
Basics of SAP Solution Manager
Recommended Knowledge:
End to End Solution Support (E2E050)
Course Prerequisites
![Page 5: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
This course will enable you to:
Course Goals
Understand the value of E2E Change Control Management.
Describe the concept and methods of E2E Change Control Management.
Leverage the SAP Solution Manager as an application platform for E2E Change Control Management.
![Page 6: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
This course is intended for the following audiences:
Application Management Experts
Change Control Engineers
Test Managers
Support Managers and members of the Customer’s SAP Competence Center (CCC)
Partners and System Integrators for the Run phase
Technical Quality Managers
SAP Service and Support Engineers
Duration: 5 days
Target Audience
Notes to the user: The training materials are not teach-yourself programs. They complement the course
instructor's explanations. On each page, there is space for you to write down additional information.
![Page 7: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Unit 6 Transport Strategies
Unit 7 Change Request Management
Unit 8 Maintenance Management
Unit 9 Test Management
Unit 10 IT Reporting for Change Control
Unit 1 Introduction to E2E Change Control
Unit 2 Solution Landscape Documentation
Unit 3 E2E Change Diagnostics
Unit 4 NetWeaver Development Environments
Unit 5 Enhanced Change and Transport System
Preface
Appendixes
Course Content
![Page 8: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
End-to-End Curriculum
E2E050E2E Solution Support
E2E100E2E Root Cause Analysis
5 days
E2E200E2E Change Control Management
5 days
E2E300E2E Integration & Automation
5 days
E2E400Technical Upgrade Management
2 days
C_E2E100Application Management Expert – Root Cause Analysis
C_E2E200Application Management Expert – Change Control Management
C_E2E300Business Process Expert
C_E2E400Technical Quality Manager for Upgrade Projects
![Page 9: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-9
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
Netweaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
![Page 10: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-10
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
ContentObjectives of SAP E2E Change Control Management
Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Change Diagnostics
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Maintenance Management
Test Management
![Page 11: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-11
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management: Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to explain:Objectives of SAP E2E Change Control Management
Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Change Diagnostics
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Maintenance Management
Test Management
![Page 12: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-12
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management: Unit Overview Diagram
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 2: Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Lesson 3: Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 1: Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
![Page 13: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-13
© SAP AG 2007
Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
ObjectivesTransparency of current software configuration and recent changesFast realization of business demandsDefined approval procedure for change requestsHigh quality and stability of the production environment
![Page 14: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-14
© SAP AG 2007
Defined Approval Procedures
Change Request Management
Transparency of current software configuration and recent changes
Change Diagnostics
Change Request Management
SAP Standards for E2E Change Control Management
Fast realization of business demands
Change Deployment
High quality and stability of the productive environment
Maintenance Management
Test Management
Change Request Management
![Page 15: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-15
© SAP AG 2007
Different Focus of Business Unit and IT
Fast reaction on business demands
Less formalism and bureaucracy
Less time to test
Focus on own business
Solid operation
Solid change management
Only planned transports
Only tested and approved changes into production
Business Unit IT
Often there is a conflict between business requirements for fast changes and operation requirements for stable environments.
![Page 16: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-16
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management: Unit Overview Diagram
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 2: Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Lesson 3: Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 1: Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
![Page 17: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-17
© SAP AG 2007
System diagnostics/administration
SAP NetWeaver Team
Application ManagementUpgrade & life cycle management, application diagnostics
Business Process OperationsIntegration & automation
Standardized E2E Solution Operations
Customer’s Business Unit
Global Business ProcessChampion
Regional Business Process Champion
End UserIncident and
problem management
PMO(Program Office)
Requestsfor change
Custom Development
IT Infrastructure
SAP Standards in Operations reduce Total Cost of Operations and enable Mission Critical Support
Customer’s IT
The first step for the efficient operation of E2E solutions is the specialization of organizations. Dedicated stakeholders are responsible for different objectives. The stakeholders can be arranged into different organizations that can be grouped largely into the two key organizational areas: Business Unit and IT.
On the business side, most stakeholders are end users. They use the implemented functionality to run their daily business. Some end users have specialized knowledge about the business applications. These key users provide first-level support for their colleagues. Business process champions have the lead role within the business units. They define how business processes are to be executed. A program management office communicates these requirements to the IT organization, decides on the financing of development and operations, and ensures that the requirements are implemented.
On the technical side, the customer IT organization has to ensure that the services provided by the SAP solution are available for the business units. The application management team is in direct contact with the business units. It is responsible for implementing the business requirements and providing support for end users. To do so, the application management team is supported by other organizations within IT. Business process operations cover the monitoring and support of the business applications, their integration, and the automation of jobs. Custom development takes care of adjusting the solution to customer-specific requirements and developments. SAP technical operations are responsible for the general administration of systems and detailed system diagnostics. The IT infrastructure
![Page 18: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-18
organization provides the underlying IT infrastructure (network, databases, …). Further specialization is also possible within these organizations. For example, there may be individual experts in different applications within SAP technical operations.
![Page 19: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-19
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Standards for E2E Solution Operations
Incident Management
Business Process ChampionException HandlingData Inconsistencies
Program Management OfficeChange Request ManagementUpgradeEnterprise Service-Oriented Architectures
Application ManagementRoot Cause AnalysisChange Control ManagementMinimum DocumentationRemote Supportability
![Page 20: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-20
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Standards for E2E Solution Operations
Business Process OperationsBusiness Process and Interface MonitoringData Volume ManagementJob Scheduling ManagementTransactional Consistency
Custom Development
SAP Technical OperationsSystem AdministrationSystem Monitoring
![Page 21: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-21
© SAP AG 2007
Technical Core Competence (Associate)
Customer’s Business Unit
Curriculum for SAP Solution Operations
PMO(Program Office) Application Management
Business Process
OperationsSAP NetWeaver Team
Customer’s IT
SAP System Administration
E2EBusiness Process
Integration & Automation
E2EChange Control
Management
E2ERoot
Cause Analysis
SAP Technology & E2E Solution Support SAP Technology
Technical Expert Competence (Professional)
EP Admin
XI Admin
BI Admin
Core WebAS(DBs)
Security
Management Competence(Master)
TechnicalQuality
Management
TechnicalUpgrade
Management
EP Diag
XI Diag
BI Diag
WebAs (DBs)Diag
Change Request
Software Log.
Test Mgmt
BusinessProcess
PerformanceJob
Scheduling
DataVolume Mgmt
Integration Mgmt
SolMan Impl.
![Page 22: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-22
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management: Unit Overview Diagram
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 2: Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Lesson 3: Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 1: Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
![Page 23: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-23
© SAP AG 2007
Control the Changes during the whole Application Livecycle
Global / RegionalBusiness Process Champion
Solution Architecture
Solution Design
Program Management OfficeChange Request Management
DB / OS / HW Changes & MaintenanceIT Infrastructure
Solution Maintenance
SAPMaintenance Management
Solution Correction
End User / Key UserIncident Management
Application ManagementApplication Change
Test Management Change Deployment Diagnostic
Workbench / Customizing Changes
Custom Development
Correction & Transport System Change System Diagnostic
SAP NetWeaver Team
The program management office is the central group in the customer business unit that is responsible for the overall planning, implementation and continuous improvement of the business processes in the solution landscape. All requests for changes, including Solution Design, Solution Maintenance, Solution Correction flow through this office and need to be integrated into a schedule of landscape changes. As such, change request management takes is a large part of the program management office’s activities. This office is responsible for managing everything from day-to-day changes and adaptations to all release planning and major infrastructure technology shifts. In addition, these activities must be aligned with all stakeholders.
The key interface between business and IT is the application management organization. End-users, key-users and the program management office use the services of IT for a wide variety of task; from solution landscape planning to implementation, from business unit re-quest handling to execution, from documentation standards, training and certification to management level reporting. Being such a central component, several of the introduced roles use the application management platform as their central working application.
It is essential that changes to the solution landscape are managed carefully to ensure transparency. The Change Request Management standard ensures that standardized methods and procedures are used for the efficient and prompt handling of all changes. In addition to change request management, the deployment and the analysis of changes need to be addressed, to ensure that changes are executed without disrupting ongoing business. This is
![Page 24: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-24
the focus of the Change Control Management standard. The standard covers two major areas of change control: Change Deployment and Change Diagnostics for Application and System Changes.
![Page 25: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-25
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management: Unit Overview Diagram
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 2: Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Lesson 3: Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 1: Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Change Diagnostics
Maintenance Management
Test Management
![Page 26: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-26
© SAP AG 2007
Change Diagnostics – Typical Questions
Is there ONE place where all changes in the
solution are listed
Did we changeany technicalconfigurationparameters?
How manytransports were
imported last week?
When did weimport support
packages?
Did we changeanything last
Tuesday?
Change Diagnostics supports customers in identifying, controlling, maintaining and verifying the versions of configurations and the values of parameters of the solution landscape components. Accurate information about configurations and their documentation is necessary to support auditing requirements and other solution operations processes. To track changes, the configuration information is recorded regularly inside the components and collected centrally in the SAP Solution Manger database. The configuration can be compared to a template or master configuration to analyze changes. The reporting includes all current and historical configuration data throughout the application life cycle. Together with Change Request Management and Change Deployment, Change Diagnostics supports the transition from project to operations and the management of code and configuration freeze phases.
![Page 27: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-27
© SAP AG 2007
Change Diagnostics: Overview
Technical Configuration
Business Configuration
“Content”EP, XI, BI, SLD
CodingPatches, SP,Release
Productive Environment
Documented in SAP Solution Manager (SMSY)
Type of changes
Changes toProduction
Enhanced Change and Transport SystemConfigurationand File
Reporting
Tools
E2E Change Analysis
This figure shows the different tools in E2E Change Diagnostics Configuration and File Reporting extract configuration parameters from Java or ABAP based
systems and display the parameters and their history in Solution Manager Diagnostics. The Change and Transport System records change to Business Configuration (Customizing
Requests) and Coding (Workbench Requests). The new Enhanced Change and Transport System is also able to transport Non-ABAP objects, such as Java archives.
Releases, Support Packages and Patches are documented in SAP Solution Manager (SMSY). E2E Change Analysis provides BI based reporting on all of the changes in a solution.
![Page 28: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-28
© SAP AG 2007
Capture and Manage the system landscape centrally in SAP Solution Manager
CUS
SCM
CUS
FVS
4.6C
PLM Solution Landscape
Solution Manager System Landscape
(SMSY)
server, databases, systems, system components
System Landscape Directory
Functions of Solution Manager System Landscape (Transaction SMSY) include: Creating landscape components: server, databases, systems, system components Defining non-SAP products for use in the system landscape maintenance Automatic data read and save via ABAP main instances Overview of system groups Generating RFC destinations to component systems; RFC connection errors are logged Manual data capture, for example, servers, non-ABAP and planned systems Graphic display • Landscape components (servers, databases, systems) • Assign attributes to landscape components
Analysis of system landscape by components
![Page 29: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-29
© SAP AG 2007
Change Analysis, Configuration & File Reporting -Architecture Overview
InfoCube
E2E Change Analysis
ABAP based installations
Solution Tool Plugins
JAVA based installations
SMD AgentsSolution Manager Solution Manager DiagnosticsDiagnostics
ConfigConfig StoreStore
Configuration and File Reporting
Data Collectiononce a day
Data Collectiononce a day
Number of Changes
Parameter Values
The data is collected in Java based systems via SMD Agents and in ABAP based systems via Solution Tool Plugin Extractors.
E2E Change Analysis uses the same tables as Configuration and File Reporting. It enhances the functionality of the previous Configuration and File Reporting by adding data
from ABAP based systems and by providing BI based reporting capabilities.
![Page 30: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-30
© SAP AG 2007
Change Diagnostics: Characteristics
Change Diagnostics provides transparency on the current softwareconfiguration and recent changes in the solution landscape.
Change Diagnostics:Efficient Root Cause Analysis: Provides a central entry point for analyzing changes in a solutionProvides accurate information on configuration parameters and their history. For example, database parameters, ABAP parameters and JAVA parameters.Enables the organization to standardize the solution configurationDocumentation of the solution landscape in the SAP Solution ManagerTransport statistics and KPI’s on the quality of the solution
![Page 31: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-31
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to Change Control Management: Unit Overview Diagram
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 2: Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Lesson 3: Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 1: Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Change Diagnostics
Maintenance Management
Test Management
![Page 32: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-32
© SAP AG 2007
Change Deployment – Typical Questions
Is our development system up to
date ?
Did we record application
changes automatically ?
How can we change ABAP &
Java components
synchronously ?How can we
avoid transport sequence
errors?
How to manage heterogeneous development
environments?
![Page 33: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-33
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System (CTS+)
ABAP change
Java change
…
ABAP change
Java change
…
ABAP CTS
Legend
logical transport route of non-ABAP objects
physical transport route of non-ABAP objects
check-in/check-out of non-ABAP objects
transport route of ABAP objects
ABAP Transport Controller
Non-ABAP
Virtual QAS Virtual PRD
Java DEV Java PRDJava QAS
SAP NetWeaver Application Server CTS+
Non-ABAPNon-ABAP
Transport of ABAP transport objectsEnterprise Portal objects (EPA, PAR)Objects of NWDI (SCAs,…)Objects from XIInterface for Non-SAP applications
The Enhanced Change and Transport System (CTS+) improves the established ABAP Change and Transport System, to manage transport of ABAP and non-ABAP-objects centrally.
Changes from heterogeneous development environments can be transported with the ABAP Change and Transport System and mixed objects (ABAP, JAVA, …).
It allows synchronized changes to business processes which run in ABAP and JAVA A Java transport landscape is represented by an ABAP transport landscape. The transport controller must be a physical ABAP system (at least NW04s, SPS12) in which
the transport routes are configured. Transport Requests are created on the transport controller. The Java Development Environment checks in Java Archives into the transport request. Then the transport request is imported into the virtual non-ABAP systems. In the After-Import
Method the Java Archives are deployed e.g. via Software Deployment Manager Non-ABAP applications inherit all properties of the ABAP Change and Transport System in
terms of documentation, tracking and troubleshooting features
![Page 34: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-34
© SAP AG 2007
Change Deployment: Characteristics
Change Deployment provides tools and best practises on how to develop and distribute changes within a system landscape on a technical level.
Change DeploymentManagement of heterogeneous development environmentsOne common tool for software logistics of ABAP and non-ABAP systemsNon-ABAP applications inherit all properties of the ABAP Change and Transport System in terms of documentation, tracking and troubleshooting featuresConsistent distribution of changes within a solutionSAP‘s best practises in transport management
![Page 35: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-35
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management: Unit Overview Diagram
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 2: Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Lesson 3: Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 1: Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Change Diagnostics
Maintenance Management
Test Management
![Page 36: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-36
© SAP AG 2007
Different Levels of Control
Change Request Management
SAP Solution Manager
Enhanced Change and Transport System (CTS+)SAP System ABAP Stack
ABAP
BetterControl
BetterControl
ImprovedDocumentation
ImprovedDocumentation
Java .net …..
Change Request Management in SAP Solution Manager is 100% compliant with the Enhanced Change and Transport System.
On the lowest level, transports are executed with proprietary Java tools. These Java tools can be controlled by the Enhanced ABAP Change and Transport
System (CTS+). This allows a better control of transports. Furthermore, the documentation, tracking and troubleshooting possibilities are improved.
On the next level of control, transports in the ABAP Stack can be managed by Change Request Management in SAP Solution Manager. This increases the control of the full change process, including the incident, approval process and change realization process.
![Page 37: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-37
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management – Sample Process
Change Request
Service Message
Developer
Requester
Tester
DEV
IT Operator
QAS
PRD
Service Desk Employee
Serv
ice
Des
kC
hang
e R
eque
stM
anag
emen
t
ChangeDocument
Maintenance Cycle
TaskList
Feedback
Controlled transports
Controlled transports
ChangeManager
An end user or key user uses the service desk to create a service message. This service message triggers a corresponding change request. The change request may affect various cross-components. After the program management office approves the change request, the application management organization performs related activities to realize the change request, for example, developing, testing and roll out.
![Page 38: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-38
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Three Tiers of Change Request Management
Management of all change requests
Change request categorization
Change documentation
Approval workflow
Status reporting
Complete change history
Change Admin
Customizing & Development (Realization)
Test execution
Seamless integration into TMS
Transport scheduling
Transport tracking
Change LogisticsProject Management
Project planning & budgeting
Project documentation
Customizing & Development (Specifications)
Test management
![Page 39: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-39
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management: Characteristics
The goal of Change Request Management is to ensure that standardized methods and procedures are used for efficient and prompt handling of all changes, therefore improving day-to-day operations.
Characteristics of Change Request Management:Transparency of all software changesFull documentation of each change: Each change in the system has a link to a Change Request and a Service DeskChanges can be scheduled according to priority, category and possible impactAll changes have to follow an established workflow. Only changes which are approved and tested come into productionChange Request Management incorporates SAP’s best practises in transport managementManagement of Non-ABAP systems is possible
![Page 40: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-40
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management: Unit Overview Diagram
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 2: Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Lesson 3: Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 1: Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Change Diagnostics
Maintenance Management
Test Management
![Page 41: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-41
© SAP AG 2007
Enhancement and Maintenance to adopt Innovation
New Enterprise Services
Industry-Specific Enhancements
Process and User Interface Simplification
Cross-Industry Functional Enhancements
Customers Adopt Innovation at their Pace
mySAP ERP 2005
SAP NetWeaver
2006 2007 2008 2009 20102005
NextRelease
Enhancement Packages
The maintenance strategy for SAP applications is based on the following principles: SAP offers three successive maintenance phases: mainstream maintenance, extended
maintenance, and customer-specific maintenance. SAP provides support packages during mainstream maintenance and extended maintenance.
The delivery frequency of support packages is dependent on the maintenance phase. As part of its release strategy, SAP announces the planned duration of the mainstream
maintenance period for a release as soon as the release is announced. For SAP applications based on SAP NetWeaver 2004 and higher, SAP usually applies the 5-1-
2 maintenance strategy: Five (5) years of mainstream maintenance One (1) year of extended maintenance (currently at an additional 2% fee) Two (2) years of extended maintenance (currently at an additional 4% fee) SAP is changing the SAP ERP major release schedule to a five-year rhythm, to align it better
with the customer adoption cycle. To ensure that customers take advantage of innovations while minimizing the impact to core operational systems, SAP plans to accelerate delivery of new functionality through enhancement packages that customers can opt to implement on top of SAP ERP 2005. Enhancement packages are intended to contain functional enhancements and enterprise services in areas such as shared services, end-to-end business processes such as order to cash or hire to retire, supplier collaboration, and industry-specific functionality. We
![Page 42: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-42
intend to deliver more innovation, quicker and in a more accessible way. SAP is thus ensuring the greatest possible protection of your investments by continuing to deliver high-quality ERP functions. We plan to deliver the next ERP release in 2010.
To find further information, please visit SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/erp and service.sap.com/maintenance.
![Page 43: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-43
© SAP AG 2007
R/3
Support Package Stacks (SP Stacks)
Appl.ABABasisKernel
Appl.ABABasisKernel
Appl.ABABasisKernel
SAP releases sets of Support Packages per product and per quarter –the SAP Support Package Stacks (SP Stacks)Support Packages & patches of SP Stacks must be used in the given combination.Other combinations only apply in exceptional casesHigher quality and ensured compatibility of included Support PackagesSimplified download of included Support Packages from a one page summaryAccelerated application, lower cost of operations and system maintenance
APO
BW
tQ1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Patch: Correction of single errors Published on demand Support Package: Collection of program corrections and updates to a particular software
component Includes all corrections and updates since the last Support Package Published regularly according to schedule Support Package Stack: Set of Support Packages for a particular product version that must be
used in combination Reduction of complexity and dependency of Support Packages Same tools and technologies for importing Support Package types
SAP recommendation: Apply a Support Package Stack as a whole to update an SAP system
![Page 44: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-44
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Schedule
Market CampaignComplaint Management
SAP Maintenance
Rollout Brazil
Implementation Projects
2007 2008 2009
One or twotimes per year
SP Stack
Hot News Top Notes
Periodic review and corrections….….
Urgent Corrections Notes/PatchesIncident ….
SAP HotNews Contains solutions for customer problems with very high priority, such as systems standstills
or data loss Allows customers to filter and display SAP HotNews for their chosen components
SAP TopNotes
Inform you about on potential hot spots in your projects Published on a monthly basis Represent the ten most important SAP Notes for each component Reviewed monthly by experts in the relevant departments and updated based on the current
SAP Note customer usage rate
![Page 45: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-45
© SAP AG 2007
Optimized Process for support package stacks
SAP Solution Manager
Maintenance Optimizer
Approve Import
Test
Release to production
Download
Approve download
Display relevant corrective SAP software packages
SAP Solution Manager
SAP HotNewsInbox
Approve Import
Test
Release to production
Download
Decide on relevance
Retrieve relevantHotNews from SMP
The Maintenance Optimizer controls the download of software patches and updates for all software components from SAP and from partners.
SAP HotNews Inbox controls the process from retrieving, deciding on relevance and implementing Hot News
![Page 46: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-46
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management: Characteristics
The goal of Maintenance Management is to keep applications up todate and to proactively eliminate known software errors. This improves the quality and stability of the solution.
Characteristics of Maintenance Management:Support Packages eliminate already known software errors and improve the quality and stability of the solutionSupport Packages include the most recent legal changesTroubleshooting is faster on a current support package levelas many possible root causes are already eliminatedImplementing a SAP note often requires the implementation of many dependent notes if the support package level is oldImplementation projects or connected systems often require a current support package level
![Page 47: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-47
© SAP AG 2007
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management: Unit Overview Diagram
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 2: Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Lesson 3: Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Lesson 1: Objectives of E2E Change Control Management
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Change Diagnostics
Maintenance Management
Test Management
![Page 48: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-48
© SAP AG 2007
Testing along the Software Lifecycle
Implementation ProjectProject
PreparationRealization
Development, TestBusinessBlueprint
Final Preparation and Go Live
Test Concept
Unit Test (Debugging)
ReviewReview
Regression Test / Volume Test
Use
r Acc
epta
nce
Test
OK
Functionalsign off
Systemsign off
Test planning
Inte
grat
ion
Test
BusinessBlueprint Doc
Test Case Development
Bug
Fix
ing
Bug
Fix
ing
Testing & Bug Fixing is ~30% of total project effort
OK
On average, testing and bug fixing consumes 30% of the project resources and duration. Testing will be planned accordingly.
The coarse testing phases are scheduled during the project planning and preparation. The test coordinator plans the test phases in detail and supports the project manager in coarse planning.
During the business blueprint phase, the test coordinator develops the test concept with support from the technical implementation team and the business analyst. The test coordinator ensures that while the business blueprint structure is built, test cases are described and developed according to the business processes. Testers for the first test phase are nominated and invited.
An update of the test concept is required before each test phase. The test coordinator verifies the test cases and ensures the creation and update. The test coordinator creates a test plan and tester assignment for each test phase.
![Page 49: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-49
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management: Characteristics
The goal of Test Management is to provide efficient and smooth procedures for manual and script-based testing.
Test Management Benefits: Reduces project costs and effort significantlyContinuous tracking and status analysis of the test progressClear and detailed test descriptionsReproducible test resultsIdentification of the most important test cases
The testing effort is between 20 and 30 percent of the total project effort. For maintenance projects, like support package implementation and upgrades, it can be as much as 70 percent
![Page 50: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-50
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management
Unit 7 Change Request Management
Change Diagnostics
Unit 2 Solution Landscape Documentation
Unit 3 E2E Change Diagnostics
Unit 10 IT Reporting for Change Control
Course Content
Change Deployment
Unit 4 NetWeaver Development Environments
Unit 5 Enhanced Change and Transport System
Unit 6 Transport Strategies
Maintenance Management
Unit 8 Maintenance Management
Test Management
Unit 9 Test Management
![Page 51: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 1-51
© SAP AG 2007
End to End Diagnostics: Unit Summary
You should be able to explain:Objectives of SAP E2E Change Control Management
Standards for SAP E2E Solution Operations
Standards for SAP E2E Change Control Management
Change Diagnostics
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Maintenance Management
Test Management
![Page 52: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-52
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
Netweaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
Solution Landscape Documentation
![Page 53: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-53
© SAP AG 2007
Contents:
SAP Solution Manager System Landscape
System Landscape Directory
Solutions
Projects
Business Processes
Solution Landscape Documentation
![Page 54: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-54
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Landscape Documentation: Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:Explain the Architecture and Use Cases of the Solution Manager System Landscape
Keep the Solution Landscape Documentation up to date, by using automatic data collection procedures within SAP Solution Manager and System Landscape Directory
Define and tailor Solutions to manage productive systems
Use Solution Manager Projects to manage complex implementation projects
Document business processes in the SAP Solution Manager
![Page 55: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-55
© SAP AG 2007
End-to-End Business Processes are a Challenge for Solution Operation
CRM
R/3
BW
EP 7.0
LegacySystem
Spread Sheet
Outlook
Siebel
PeoplesoftHR
XI
Manugistics
EP 6.0
External Web
Documentum
In the last few years, the IT world of SAP customers has become much more complex. Instead of one single R/3 system there are now extensive system landscapes distributed over the entire globe and involving different SAP.com-solutions. Therefore, it has become much more complicated to keep track of the whole system landscape. If something goes wrong within the solution landscape, it is much more difficult to judge the relevance for other activities. It is, therefore, much more important to have an operational concept for the customers solution landscape.
![Page 56: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-56
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager Architecture
Projects
Solution
Roadmap, Blueprint and ImplementationMaintenance OptimizerChange Diagnostics
Service Desk
Change Request Management
Testing
SAP Solution Manager
Application Manage-
ment
Systems
NWBI
Other
BusinessProcesses
Documentation
SAPERP
NWXI
Implementation Content
BPR
As the central instance, SAP Solution Manager provides a variety of centralized services for implementing and operating your SAP solutions.
The advantages are: • One central point of access • End-to-end process control • Guaranteed consistency within your system landscape • Dependencies between different components are taken into account
![Page 57: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-57
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Landscape Documentation Unit Overview Diagram
Solution Landscape Documentation
Lesson 1: Solution Manager System Landscape (SMSY)
Lesson 2: System Landscape Directory
Lesson 3: Solutions
Lesson 4: Projects
Lesson 5: Business Processes
![Page 58: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-58
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Manager Data Model (Transaction SMSY)
ABAPClient 002
Solution 2
Customer system landscapes
Solution 1
Main Instance
Client 200
Client …
J2EE
TREX
PRDsystem
DEV system
QAsystem
…system
PRDsystem
DEV system
QAsystem
…system
Logical component A
Logical component B
Project 2Project 1
Logical component A
Logical component B
DEV QA
Product
System
Product System / Product Version
PRD
DEV QA PRD
Logical component A
Logical component BDEV QA PRD
DEV QA PRD
LogicalSystem
A logical component is an administration unit, which uniquely assigns logical systems to system roles for a product throughout the system landscape and across projects.
For example, we can have the Logical Component Z_ERP, defined for Product SAP R/3, with Product Version 4.6C and Main Instance ‘R/3 Server’ containing the three systems R3D, R3Q and R3P with the roles of Development, Quality and Productive respectively.
A product can have several Main-Instances. For example, SAP CRM consists of CRM Server, TREX, CRM IPC, CRM Mobile Client. It is defined that process steps can only run on ‘Logical Components’. On the other hand, a business process step can be executed on ‘implementation relevant’ Main-Instances. Therefore, you can have one Logical Component for every implementation relevant Main Instance of a product.
![Page 59: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-59
© SAP AG 2007
How to Create Systems in SMSY
Pull via RFC
SAP Solution Manager SAP ABAP System
SMSY
1. Choose Product
2. Create New System
3. Setup RFC Destinations
4. Read System DataSAP Java System
No automatic data transfer
Start TX SMSY and open the Landscape Components view. Right click on right product category and choose “Create New System”
Enter a system ID Accept the automatically proposed product and product version Select your main instance and save the entries Establish the RFC connection to SAP Solution Manager to communicate with the satellite
system (ABAP) in order to import its data. This is not possible for Java; you have to do it manually
For automatic data capturing, start the TX SMSY_SETUP and configure the sources with the time interval
![Page 60: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-60
© SAP AG 2007
System-Demo SMSY
System-Demo
![Page 61: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-61
© SAP AG 2007
Create New System
To create a new system, select the product and right click on it. You can then create a new system either manually or using a wizard
![Page 62: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-62
© SAP AG 2007
Setup RFC Destinations
RFC Read Access: RFC to read data from satellite systemsRFC for Change Manager: RFC for Change Request ManagementTrusted System RFC: Log on to managed system as trusted user RFC for Solution Manager: Log on to managed system
RFC destinations can be set up using an RFC wizard. During the process of setting up the RFC destinations, you need to log on to the managed system as a user who is allowed to create RFC destinations in the managed system and to create users for RFC logon.
For detailed information on creating RFCs with the Solution Manager System Landscape, see the online documentation of the Solution Manager System Landscape (Transaction SMSY -> Help -> Application Help -> System Landscape Management -> Create Systems -> Generate RFC Connections).
![Page 63: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-63
© SAP AG 2007
Read System Data
Automatically collect data on Clients and Support Package Levels
When the RFC connections are available, you can read system data from the managed systems.
You can access information about clients, software components and support package levels
![Page 64: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-64
© SAP AG 2007
Schedule Periodic Data Transfer
Schedule an automatic data transfer once per dayAll systems in SMSY are updated.New systems can be added from TMS or SLD
Transaction: SMSY_SETUP The automatic data transfer refreshes data for all systems which are known in the SMSY and
for which RFC-data is available. In addition data on new systems can be collected if these systems are known in the TMS or in
a connected SLD
![Page 65: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-65
© SAP AG 2007
Use Cases of Transaction SMSY
Automatic reporting on Version Information of installed software components. You no longer have to gather this information manually, for example, in Excel sheetsImpact Analysis in the case of hardware and software changes or in case of unplanned downtimesCheck system inventory in case of as-is analysis in projects, system landscape planning or in order to guarantee a homogeneous system landscapeSolution Manager Key Generation in case of installation or upgrade to SAP NetWeaver04s based solutions and higher
Impact Analysis with the function where used list. System inventory with TX SMSY -> Utilities -> Analyses Generate License Key TX SMSY -> Other Object -> enter system on which you want to
install/upgrade SAP ECC -> Generate Installation/Upgrade Key
![Page 66: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-66
© SAP AG 2007
Data Source
SID, Product, Main Instance
Installation Number
Message Server, System Nr., DB
Software Components and version information
Transaction SMSY: Software and Hardware Inventory
Central maintenance of the whole system landscape Overview of all component systems in a complex system landscape Administrative basis for work in projects and monitoring One central maintenance environment for all parts of the system landscape
![Page 67: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-67
© SAP AG 2007
Where Used List of Systems
![Page 68: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-68
© SAP AG 2007
System Landscape Analysis
System landscape analysis by landscape components(Transaction: SMSY Utilities Analyses)
Reporting for servers, databases and systems Tabular overview of, for example, support package levels, software components Standard list functions, for example, filters, download
![Page 69: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-69
© SAP AG 2007
Generate Installation Key
1.2.
Details in Note 811923
Goto Transaction SMSY. In order Choose from the Menu: Main Instance | Other Object … Insert SID, Push “Generate Installation/Upgrade Key” Button In the next Pop-up insert “system number” and “message server” Push “Generate Key” Button
Details about the prerequisites can be found in note 811923.
![Page 70: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-70
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Manager Unit Overview
SAP Solution Manager Introduction
Lesson 1: Solution Manager System Landscape (SMSY)
Lesson 2: System Landscape Directory
Lesson 3: Solutions
Lesson 4: Projects
Lesson 5: Business Processes
![Page 71: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-71
© SAP AG 2007
SAP System Landscape Directory
System Landscape Directory
System Catalog: Landscape Description
Physical View: Technical System
Logical View: Business System
Software Catalog: Component Information
Product
Software Component
SAP Systems Data Supplier
Registered automatically
Third PartySystems
Maintained at customer site
Third PartyProduct &Software
Component
Maintained at customer site
Maintained at SAP CIM
Update
MasterComponentRepository
Component Types
Landscape Patterns
Possible Combinations
At the SAP site, a Master Component Repository mirrors the data from the SAP Product and Production Management System (PPMS). Therefore, the Master Component Repository contains up-to-date information about all available SAP products and their dependencies.
The content of the Master Component Repository is published in the SAP Service Marketplace, so that customers can update their individual component information. The content updates are available as delta files.
Customers can add additional information, about 3rd-party products that they are using and their own development activities, to their individual component information in their own System Landscape Directories.
The landscape description contains information about all systems and installed products or components at the customer’s site.
Applications and tools (installation, administration etc.) use information from the System Landscape Directory as a central information provider.
Based on proven industry standards of the Distributed Management Task Force (DMTF): • Common Information Model (CIM) • Web-Based Enterprise Management (WBEM)
You can access SLD by directing a browser to http://<server>:<port>/sld (where <server> is the SLD server and <port> is the J2EE HTTP port). You will be prompted for a user name and password.
![Page 72: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-72
© SAP AG 2007
Information Stored in SLD
Landscape Description
Technical Landscape
Landscapes
Business Landscape
Component Information
SLD is part of the J2EE Engine and can be reached using: http://<server_name>:<http_port>/sld
It contains the following parts: • Landscape Description • Technical Landscape • Business Landscape - Business Systems are logical systems that act as senders or receivers
within the SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure. A Business System is always associated with a technical system.
Component Information Name Reservation • Namespaces (done only by administrators) • Single names (done only by administrators – developers perform this task in the SAP
NetWeaver Developer Studio)
![Page 73: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-73
© SAP AG 2007
Landscape Description
Installed systems with comprised products and componentsIncludes installed versions and patch levelsSystem topology information (addresses and links)Data by/for SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (XI):
Application business system names Transport targets for directory content transportsSoftware component versions
![Page 74: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-74
© SAP AG 2007
Component Information
Software catalog provides information about all available SAP software
Includes available version numbers and patch levels
Dependencies between componentsand other relations:
Supported platforms and releasesfor OS, DB, ....Allowed combinations (integrationmatrix – inter-productdependencies)
Data provided by SAP ( regular update from SAP Service Marketplace)
Basis for the description of the system landscape
Customers can download and update the current components description from the SAP Service Marketplace
At SAP, we use one common server with up-to-date information. Note 669669 describes how the Component Information can be updated.
![Page 75: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-75
© SAP AG 2007
How Does SLD Get Landscape Description Data?
ABAPSystem
ABAPData
Supplier
JavaSystem
JavaData
Supplier
OtherSystem
OtherData
Supplier
sldreg(lib/exe)
Java System
SLD
RFC
HTTP
HTTPC
Gate-way
Data suppliers collect and send system data to SLD:Must be set up once per landscape elementAfter this, they send reliable and up-to-date data automatically:
At the system startup Periodical reporting (batch job)
Each SLD server contains an SLD data bridge, which is capable of sending system data received from the Data Supplies to multiple SLD servers.
The system information is reported periodically as well as at system startup. The data supplier within an ABAP-based system periodically delivers collected system
information to SAP Gateway (also required) Data suppliers are available for ABAP-based systems as of release 4.0B
(SAP_BASIS/SAP_ABA) SAP Gateway routes information to SLD bridge (part of SLD) SLD bridge transfers this information (as CIM-compliant data) to SLD
![Page 76: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-76
© SAP AG 2007
Data Supplier – ABAP-Based Systems
Transaction RZ70
To set up an ABAP data supplier, you only have to call transaction RZ70 and specify the host and service name of the SAP Gateway. A batch job can also be set up so that the data supplier regularly sends its data to SLD. In this example, the data supplier sends its data every 12 hours (720 minutes) to the SLD gateway.
The data collection programs, in the lower part of the transactional screen, are normally only required for advanced users or by SAP support.
![Page 77: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-77
© SAP AG 2007
Data Supplier – JAVA-Based Systems
The setup of a Java data supplier is similarly straightforward – in the J2EE Engine Visual Administrator (go.bat), choose Administration Server Services SLD Data Supplier and specify host, port, user and credentials of the SLD bridge to which you want to connect. You can also set up a batch job as in the ABAP case.
![Page 78: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-78
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager and System Landscape Directory
SAP SLD Server
SAP ABAP System
SLD
2. Specify service for communication
Configure the SLD Data Supplier
SAP Solution Manager
SMSY
1. Connect SLD to Solution Manager
3. Create TCP/IP connection
4. Schedule Periodic Data Transfer from SLD
Pull via RFC
Push via
RFC
Push via
http
SAP Java System
Configure the SLD Data Supplier
Pull via
RFC
SAP Solution Manager also provides a system data repository Both system data repositories can be used independently of each other A synchronization point exists. SMSY can read data from SLD
Use of these repositories depends upon current customer‘s landscape:
If there are only ABAP components in place SLD is optional If there are also Java components in place (SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal, SAP
NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure, etc.) SLD is mandatory SLD Clients
Configure the SLD Data Supplier (in an ABAP system) Call transaction RZ70 and maintain the gateway server host and the name of the gateway service.
Configure the SLD Data Supplier (in a J2EE system) Start the J2EE Engine Visual Administrator and navigate to Administration → Server → Services → SLD Data Supplier.
SAP Solution Manager
Connect System Landscape Directory to Solution Manager (transaction SLDAPICUST). Create a TCP/IP connection to the SLD (SM59)
![Page 79: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-79
For automatic data capturing, start the TX SMSY_SETUP and configure the sources System Landscape Directory with the time interval
![Page 80: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-80
SLD Server: Activate the SLD Server Call up the SLD initial page http://<host>:<port>/sld and choose
Administration → Server Settings. Enter a name for the Object Server. Import the SAP Master Component information Choose Administration → Import and select
the file CR_content.zip Specify Service for Communication (JCo RFC Provider) From the J2EE side ,
/usr/sap/JCXX/J2EE/admin/go or go.bat, Visual admin—Server Services Jco RFC Provider (fill with the information shown on the screen)
![Page 81: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-81
© SAP AG 2007
Establish Connection from SAP Solution Manager to SLD
The Implementation Guide for the SAP Solution Manager contains a step-by-step description of how to set up the connection from the SLD to SAP Solution Manager.
![Page 82: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-82
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Manager
Managed Systems
SMSY LandScape model (ABAP)
Solution Manager - IT Governance –
(ABAP)
Solution Manager - Diagnostic –
(J2EE)
SMD LandScape model withembedded pseudo SLD (J2EE)
ABAP based component
J2EE based component
Unmanaged component(C/C++, Java standalone, …)
SLD Data Supplier (SLDREG)
SLD Data Supplier (J2EE)
SLD Data Supplier (ABAP)
CIM via RFC (push)CIM via HTTP (push)
RFC calls (push)
1
2
3
5
46
RFC calls (poll)
Managing System
Local SLD (J2EE)
Remote SLD (J2EE)
1
6
2 34 5
Landscape Modelling - Today
(1) ABAP based component pushes changes in deployment to SLD via CIM over RFC on a regular basis
(2) J2EE based component pushes changes in deployment to SLD via CIM over HTTP on a regular basis
(3) Unmanaged component (C/C++, Java Standalone, …) pushes changes in deployment to SLD via CIM over HTTP on a regular basis
(4) ABAP based components are polled on a regular basis to read deployment data and transfer to SMSY via RFC
(5) Remote SLD (or even several SLDs) is polled on a regular basis to read deployment data transfer to SMSY via RFC
(6) SMSY pushes deployment data for ABAP and non-ABAP components to SMD Landscape Model
![Page 83: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-83
© SAP AG 2007
Landscape Modelling - Outlook
Solution Manager
Solution Manager - Diagnostic –
Solution Manager IT Governance –
Direct JAVA API calls (poll)Direct ABAP API calls (poll)
CIM via RFC / HTTP (push)SLD data via HTTP (push)
Managing system
Managed systems
ABAP based component
J2EE based component
Unmanaged component(C/C++, Java standalone, …)
SLD Data Supplier (SLDREG)
SLD Data Supplier (J2EE)
SLD Data Supplier (ABAP)
RemoteSLDLocal SLDSMSY
Unified SolMan landscape model
Regular data synchronizationfrom SLD to SMSY and back
1
2
3
54
Agent forNon-SAP
App(optional)
123
45
This figure shows how the SAP Solution Manager (SMSY) gets data from the System Landscape Directory (SLD) and vice-versa.
There is a local SLD on the SAP Solution Manager system which exchanges data with the SMSY.
If there are other SLDs in the system landscape they also exchange data with the local SLD on the SAP Solution Manager.
(1) Regular push of deployment changes to SLD for ABAP based component pushes via CIM over RFC and for all other components (J2EE, C/C++, Java Standalone, …) via CIM over HTTP
(2) Remote SLD‘s forward latest technical component-specific information to local SLD and store it in J2EE DB regularly or instantly (asynchronous).
(3) The SMSY polls local SLD to get latest landscape information (technical as well as logical) on a regular basis . After enrichment in SMSY, data is published from SMSY back to local SLD.
(4) All ABAP based SolMan apps read its landscape data from SMSY (as today) (5) All J2EE based SolMan apps read the landscape data from SLD (difference to today)
![Page 84: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-84
© SAP AG 2007
Components using SLD
NWDI
PI/XI Web DynproSLD
NetWeaverAdministrator
Solution Manager
Adaptive Computing Controller
Information stored in SLD is essential to follow applications running in your production landscape: • SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure:
- Availability of SLD, is required at restart of SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure - As used SLD caches may be invalidated manually, SLD may also be critical during
runtime of SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure. • Web Dynpro of Java:
- SLD is critical during runtime for adaptive RFC calls • SAP NetWeaver Administrator:
- Requires SLD for remote monitoring functions - If SLD is unavailable, central administration of systems is not possible
• Adaptive Computing Controller: - Requires SLD to operate (that is, start, stop and change of resources) - If SLD is unavailable, only monitoring functions of Adaptive Computing Controller are
available
![Page 85: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-85
© SAP AG 2007
Reasons to Have Several SLDs
Geographical distributed locations with local admin groups
Isolated production environment
Improve availability for applications relying on SLD data
…DEV CONS QA PRODFirewall
HQ
SAP NetWeaver
XI
WebDynpro
SAP NetWeaver
Admin.X7
24
There is no perfect strategy for setting up SLD in an SAP landscape. Several factors can influence your decision: • Organization, operation and security • Geographical situation of networks • Independent/Global Strategy • Subsequent separation of development and production environment • Usage of Components accessing SLD • Distribution of own Software Component Information
![Page 86: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-86
© SAP AG 2007
Your SLD Topology – A Question of Your Requirements
Central – Single SLD Distributed – Several SLDs
Synchronization of several SLDs – Automatic Forwarding
Synchronization of several SLDs – Export/Import
ExtranetIntranet
I nt r anet
SLD
Intranet
Hosting Provider
Customer 1
SLD SLD
SLD
Automatic forwarding
of landscape
data
Extranet (World Wide Company Network)
Region 1
SLD SLD
Automatic forwarding
of landscape
data
Extranet (World Wide Company Network)Region 1
Export and import of SLD data
Org
aniz
atio
nS
ynch
roni
zati
onSAP
System
SAPSystem
SAPSystem SAP
System
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
Customer 2
SAPSystem
Region 2
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
SLD
Region 2
SAPSystem
SLD
SAPSystem
SAPSystem
The simplest way is to have only one SLD for your landscape. The cost of running an SLD infrastructure increases with the number of SLD instances, as several SLDs have to be administrated (for example, CR Content has to be updated regularly). Depending on your requirements, you also have to think about synchronization of SLD data stored in different SLDs: • The SLD bridge can automatically forward data received by data suppliers to additional
SLDs • Data entered manually into one SLD (such as XI business systems, name reservation data,
products/software components, etc.) has to be synchronized manually with export/import functions of SLD.
Requirements/reasons to have more than one SLD in your landscape, for example: • Legal constraints • Company rules • Network constraints (such as firewalls) • Availability • Possibility to provide different views of SLD data (for example, you want that DEV
systems/admins are not able to see/access PROD system data)
![Page 87: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-87
All together, it depends on the actual requirements of a landscape (what data is required in which SLD, how often is a manual synchronization required, etc.) to decide what is the optimal SLD landscape.
For more information, see the Planning Guide – SLD (available in SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/sld)
Note 764393 describes different SLD topologies.
![Page 88: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-88
© SAP AG 2007
Distribution of Component Information
SAP MasterComponent Information
Customer/3rd Party ComponentInformation
SLD
All Comp. Information
Export
SLD
SLD
SLD
Import
Import
Import
The synchronization of SLD content (business systems, SWCV, transport groups and transport targets) is mandatory to use the transport functionality of the Integration Directory.
SLD Export/Import functionality is available to distribute SLD content between multiple SLDs. • With multiple SLD systems and customer defined software components import the CR data
provided by SAP into one system only and distribute it from there. • To distribute CR data in your system landscape, use the export line CR exports. These
exports contain all CR data from the export system, regardless of whether the data was created by the user or by SAP.
![Page 89: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-89
© SAP AG 2007
Export SLD Content
SLD Content can be exported/imported:CR: Component InformationLD: Landscape DescriptionNR: Namespace Reservation
After clicking Export, the page will be refreshed automatically after a successful export The exported .zip file can be downloaded from the refreshed page
![Page 90: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-90
© SAP AG 2007
Example of a Distributed Environment
Development QASPre-Prod Prod
SLD
SLD
SLD
SLD SLD
SLD
SLD
PI
PIPI
PI PI
PI
PIPI
PI
PIPI
PI
Cor
pora
te D
evel
opm
ent
Euro
peAs
iaA
mer
icas
Transport SLD Content by Export / Import
This figure shows the PI / SLD landscape in a distributed environment. There is a central development area, in which the Development and Quality Assurance
systems are located. These systems share a common SLD. In this SLD, Software Components and Namespaces for Java Development are defined. SAP content is imported into this SLD. All information from this SLD is imported and exported into the SLDs in the Preproduction and Production Environment.
Due to high availability requirements, each PI system in the Production environment has its own local SLD. The Preproduction environment is built up in the same way as the production environment.
The SLDs in the Development, QAS and Preprod environment have no information about productive systems. Therefore the productive systems cannot be called up accidently during the test phase.
![Page 91: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-91
© SAP AG 2007
Exercise
Exercise
![Page 92: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-92
© SAP AG 2007
Training Systems
Web AS Java
RDBMS
Portal Platform
Content Management &
BP for MSS
Front End PC
Adobe DocumentServices 1.0Web Browser
SAP ECC
Web AS ABAP
Client 800
SAP EP
JCO
TT5, hostname: ________
Network
Web AS Java
RDBMS
Content Management &
BP for ESS
BP for MSS
SAP XSS 6.0
SAP Solution Manager
Web AS ABAP
Instance: 00
SAP Solution Manager
DiagnosticsJCO
TT4, hostname: ________Adobe Document
Services 1.0SAP GUI
http://<hostname>:55000/sld
http://<hostname>:55000/irj
http://<hostname>:50000/smd
SLD
Client 200
Instance: 50
TT5 is a mySAP ERP 2005 system. TT4 is a Solution Manager 4.0 system. The Enterprise Portal and the System Landscape Directory are located on the mySAP ERP
2005 system TT5. The default port is 5<Instance number>00. The Solution Manager Diagnostics is located on TT4.
![Page 93: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-93
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Manager Unit Overview Diagram
SAP Solution Manager Introduction
Lesson 1: Solution Manager System Landscape (SMSY)
Lesson 2: System Landscape Directory
Lesson 3: Solutions
Lesson 4: Projects
Lesson 5: Business Processes
![Page 94: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-94
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager Architecture
Solution Directory
Systems
NWBI
Other
BusinessProcesses
Documentation
SAPERP
NWXI
Projects
Solution
Roadmap, Blueprint and ImplementationMaintenance OptimizerChange Diagnostics
Service Desk
Change Request Management
Testing
SAP Solution Manager
Implemen-tation
ContentBPR
Application Manage-
ment
As the central instance, SAP Solution Manager provides a variety of centralized services for implementing and operating your SAP solutions.
The advantages are: • One central point of access • End-to-end process control • Guaranteed consistency within your system landscape • Dependencies between different components are taken into account
![Page 95: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-95
© SAP AG 2007
Systems Software-Components
Solution MonitoringService Desk
Change Request ManagementCollaboration
Scenarios
Solution
Solution Definition
A solution describes a collection of information about systems, software components, and business processes (scenarios).
Solutions are the basis for the operation scenarios • Solution Monitoring • Service Desk • Change Request Management • Collaboration
Solutions provides handover information from the project phase to the operations phase • Any project change is copied to the solution directory after being set active
![Page 96: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-96
© SAP AG 2007
Europe ERP
Europe CRM
Europe Solution
Asia ERP
Asia CRM
Asia Solution
US ERP
US CRM
US Solution
Global BW
Example: Design of Solutions by Regions
In this example the solutions are separated by regions. The global BW system is part of all solutions
![Page 97: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-97
© SAP AG 2007
Gobal ERP
Global CRM
Financial Solution
Global BW
Example: Design of Solutions by Functional Areas
Gobal ERP
Global CRM
Logistics Solution
Global BW
Gobal ERP
Global CRM
HR Solution
Global BW
In this example the solutions are separated by functional areas. All systems are part of all solutions, but different business processes are running in each
Solution.
![Page 98: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-98
© SAP AG 2007
Criteria for Tailoring a Solution
Business Processes must run in only one solution (most important criterion)
All systems involved in a business process belong to the same solution
The number of systems in the Solution should be limitedThere is no strict limit, but the number of systems should be limited due to performance and usability aspectsThe performance is driven by the number of monitoring alerts that need to be processed in a certain time period
Organizational units of a company or a corporate groupAre different organizations supporting different system groups?Is it necessary to restrict authorization to monitoring and functional data to certain system groups?Does a hosting provider support different companies?
Normally small and medium size customers may use only one Solution!
From SAP’s point of view, the critical drivers for tailoring a solution are the size of the documented end-to end business processes, as well as the related number of systems involved, depending on use, for example, system monitoring.
For complex organizations, we recommend that you define several solutions in accordance with the organizational tailoring and the selection requirements of the individual organizational units. In this way, large and complex customers and corporate groups can be displayed more clearly in special sections and administrated more effectively. However, it is essential that all of the business objects for a business process are located within one solution. The process must not be divided among several solutions or sub processes.
![Page 99: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-99
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Overview
Transaction SOLUTION_MANAGER is the central access point for all operation scenarios in the SAP Solution Manager
The Solution Directory is the central point for maintaining business processes in SAP Solution Manager. Here, you can assign logical components to your solution landscape, create business processes and copy business processes from implementation projects or other sources. You can also maintain your solution settings, like the name of the solution, here.
![Page 100: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-100
© SAP AG 2007
Assignment of Logical Components to the Solution
Choose node <solution name>.
Assign logical components in tab
“System Group” via value help.
Business Processes are executed on logical components. Before you can maintain a business process you therefore have to assign the concerned logical components to the solution landscape.
In the node <solution name> you can also change the solution settings (tab “Solution Settings”), for example, what day of the week the Early Watch Alert data is supposed to be processed and for what systems the EWA should be processed within this solution.
![Page 101: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-101
© SAP AG 2007
Assignment of Business Processes in the Solution Directory
Business processes can be created manually, copied from a business process repository, from other solutions or from projects.
The data is displayed in a “swim-lane” graphic (as it is used also in the project maintenance) indicating on which logical component the business process step is executed.
![Page 102: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-102
© SAP AG 2007
Link Maintenance Project to a Solution
As of SAP Solution Manager 4.0 you can link a Maintenance Project to a Solution.
This enables you to:Check-out/Check-in Solution Structure ElementsCreate Change Requests for a Solution
In SAP Solution Manager 4.0, it is possible to link a Maintenance Project to a solution. For example, once a solution is handed over to the Operations functions for production support, it may be necessary to make changes to the process structure, linked documents or configuration objects. These items may now be “checked out” to the linked Maintenance Project where they can be changed and documented. After work is completed and approved these changes may be “checked in” to the solution. In this way the solution can be updated in an efficient and documented manner.
![Page 103: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-103
© SAP AG 2007
Scenario Checked Out
In this example the Business Scenario Order to Cash is checked out, and can be maintained in the linked maintenance project.
![Page 104: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-104
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Manager Unit Overview Diagram
SAP Solution Manager Introduction
Lesson 1: Solution Manager System Landscape (SMSY)
Lesson 2: System Landscape Directory
Lesson 3: Solutions
Lesson 4: Projects
Lesson 5: Business Processes
![Page 105: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-105
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager Architecture
Solution Directory
Projects
Solution
Roadmap, Blueprint and ImplementationMaintenance OptimizerChange Diagnostics
Service Desk
Change Request Management
Testing
SAP Solution Manager
Application Manage-
ment
Systems
NWBI
Other
BusinessProcesses
Documentation
SAPERP
NWXI
Implemen-tation
ContentBPR
As the central instance, SAP Solution Manager provides a variety of centralized services for implementing and operating your SAP solutions.
The advantages are: • One central point of access • End-to-end process control • Guaranteed consistency within your system landscape • Dependencies between different components are taken into account
![Page 106: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-106
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Manager Projects
Projects:Projects focus on managing changesAll implementation scenarios in SAP Solution Manager are based on projects:
ImplementationTestingUpgradeE-Learning Management
Any project change is copied to the solution directory after being set active
Handover to OperationProjects work not only in the production landscape, but in the complete transport landscapce including the following system types:
EvaluationDevelopment Quality Assurance…
![Page 107: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-107
© SAP AG 2007
Scope of Projects
Gobal ERP
Global CRM
Development
Global BW
Gobal ERP
Global CRM
Quality Assurance
Global BW
Gobal ERP
Global CRM
Production
Global BW
Project Land-scape
Solution
Project Phases
RealizationFinal
Preparation Go Live
In this example, the project works on the ERP and CRM system. The complete transport landscape is part of the project.
![Page 108: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-108
© SAP AG 2007
ImplementationProject
Solution 1
Solution 2
Solution 3bSolution 3a
UpgradeProject
TemplateProject
Solution 1 MaintenanceProject
ImplementationProject
ImplementationProject
Implementation
Operation
Upgrade
Rollout
Lifecylce Management is performed within Projects
Solutions represent a productive system landscape. Changes to a solution are managed in projects. The following types of projects exist: • Implementation
- Used for implementation projects • Template
- Create templates and re-use them in implementation projects • Upgrade
- Used for upgrade projects • Maintenance
- Used for change request management • Optimization / Safeguarding
- Used for SAP Optimization and Safeguarding Services
![Page 109: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-109
© SAP AG 2007
General Project Administration
General project administration functions:Transaction SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN Create projectsChange projectsDisplay projectsDelete projects Transport projectsDirect access to project templates
Any existing projects are displayed in the project overview of Solution Manager. Additional functions are available to coordinate the project administration data of a project. Transaction SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN provides an overview of the active projects in the
customer organization.
![Page 110: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-110
© SAP AG 2007
Define Project – General Data
Define general project data:Person responsible for the projectLanguage of the project: determines in which language the selected business content is displayed and storedOverall project statusProject time frame for plan and actual data
You can enter the following data on the General Data tab: Person responsible - The responsible person must exist in the project administration of the
SAP System. You can use the possible entries help to change the responsible person. Project language • When you choose a project language, all language-dependent information for this language
(project documentation and status information) is made available to project members. This is independent of the logon language of the project member.
• The project structure is created in the specified project language. • All content will be stored in the chosen project language. • Once the project language has been selected and saved, it can no longer be changed.
Status - The default values for status are set on the Project Standards tab. Plan Data - This tab allows you to enter the dates for the planned project start and finish as
well as the work required in man days (MD). Actual Data - This tab allows you to enter the dates of the actual project start and finish and
the actual work carried out in man days (MD). • The planned data and the actual data represent the time plan for the entire project. Any
dates entered for individual process steps in the Business Blueprint or Realization phases must lie within the time frame set on the General Data tab.
![Page 111: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-111
© SAP AG 2007
Define system landscape for a project:Select product and product version Assign development, quality assurance and productive systems to productsCheck related system landscape
Assign Logical Components
Transaction => Project Administration / SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN You define the system landscape for a template or implementation project in this tab. A system landscape for project consists of the following information: • Logical component • Product version • Logical systems for dedicated system roles
In Business Blueprint, the system role Evaluation may be maintained to test-drive related transactions of process steps. You can add systems for other system roles during the course of the project.
You cannot maintain the logical system information for non-SAP products. Maintaining logical components: • A logical component reflects a set of logical systems (instances) for a product. In case you
have to handle mulitple instances of systems for a product, you need to create additional logical components
• The selection of the logical component influences the scenarios/processes selection using the Business Process Repository in phase Business Blueprint. Only those scenarios/processes that are complient to defined logical component and product version are released for selection.
![Page 112: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-112
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Manager Unit Overview Diagram
SAP Solution Manager Introduction
Lesson 1: Solution Manager System Landscape (SMSY)
Lesson 2: System Landscape Directory
Lesson 3: Solutions
Lesson 4: Projects
Lesson 5: Business Processes
![Page 113: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-113
© SAP AG 2007
Business Processes in SAP Solution Manager
Scenario
Business Process 1
Business Process 2
Process Step 1
Process Step 2
...
Process Step 1
...
Component View
VISUALIZE flow of business processes and process steps
Show components required by business scenario or process
Show business partners or external software required by the business scenario or process
Tra nsfer Cam paig n, Targ et Gr oup, Products, Att ach ments, A ll oc. to Mobile
CRM MOBI LE C LIENT
Tra nsfer Acti vities to CRM Mobil e
Refere nce t o Busin ess Pro cess: Custom er V isit a nd O rde r Entry
CRM SERVER
Create Cam paig n
Refere nce t o Busin ess Pro cess: Tar get Gr oup Cre ation
Create Collat era ls
Allocate t o cam paig n
P lan Key Figu res
P lan A llocati ons
Releas e Ca mpai gn
Tra nsfer Cam paig n
Tra nsfer Ta rget Gro ups
Execute C amp aign
Refere nce t o Busin ess Pro cess: Lead P roces sing
Refere nce t o Busin ess Pro cess: Order P roces s in B2B eS ellin g
Refere nce t o Busin ess Pro cess: Order P roces s in B2C eSellin g
SAP R/3
Create Accou nting Object (WBS)
Post Direct Mark etin g Costs t o Accountin g Obj ect (WBS)
Settle Dir ect Ma rketi ng Co sts to Profitabilit y Seg ment
Load Cost Dr ivers
Assess Over hea d Cost s to WBS Element
SAP SEM
Perfor m Ma rket An alysis
Updat e the C am paig n Hier arc hy
Load Cam paig n Attrib utes
Updat e the K ey Fi gur es for the Camp aign
Load All ocati ons
Updat e Direc t Ma rketin g Cost s Info
Updat e Activities I nfo
Updat e Over hea d Cost s Info
Perfor m Cam pai gn Ana lysis Scenario-oriented structure (= Business Process Hierarchy)
Definition of the Business Blueprint allows you to document the business processes, in your enterprise, that you want to use in your SAP System. You create a project structure in which relevant business scenarios, business processes and process steps are organized in a hierarchical structure. You can also create project documentation to assign to individual scenarios, processes or process steps. To define how your business processes should run in your SAP Systems, you then assign transactions to each process step.
Definition of the Business Blueprint provides you with a detailed description of your business processes and system requirements. You can also print out the Business Blueprint document. The project documentation and the project structure that you use during the Business Blueprint phase, can also be put to further use during configuration and test organization. • When you configure your business processes, the system displays the project structure you
created for the Business Blueprint. You can use the Business Blueprint project structure as an orientation point during configuration.
• You can also display and edit the project documentation from the Business Blueprint phase during configuration.
• The project structure from the Business Blueprint forms the basis for all test plans that you create during test organization. The transactions that you assign to process steps in the Business Blueprint are put in test plans during test plan generation. The transactions can be processed as function tests to test the transactions.
![Page 114: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-114
© SAP AG 2007
Business Process Structure
Documentation linked to business
process steps
The Business Process Structure is the central documentation directory. Different types of documentation can be attached to business processes or business process
steps. Documentation can be: • General project documentation • Transactions to be used • Configuration Information • Development Documentation • Test Cases • Training Material
Documentation which is entered in SAP Solution Manager is available to all involved parties. The documentation can be re-used in later project phases, e.g. in testing or during the end-user
training
![Page 115: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-115
© SAP AG 2007
Copy Business Processes from Project to Solution
Create business processes.
Set status to “Production”.
For each business scenario, create the respective business processes. Choose <solution name> / Business Scenarios / <scenario name> / Business Processes in the tree and create the business processes in tab “Structure”.
Business Processes are attached to either a project or a solution. Business Processes can be copied from a project to a solution when a project goes live. Set the status for the business process to “Production” if you want to monitor the business
process. This is only possible if there is a production system assigned to the logical components that the business process is using.
![Page 116: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-116
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager Introduction: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:Explain the Architecture and Use Cases of the Solution Manager System Landscape
Keep the Solution Landscape Documentation up to date by using automatic data collection procedures within SAP Solution Manager and System Landscape Directory
Define and tailor Solutions to manage productive systems
Use Solution Manager Projects to manage complex implementation projects
Document business processes in the SAP Solution Manager
![Page 117: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-117
© SAP AG 2007
Additional Information
Self Study – Learning Maps for SAP Solution Manager:service.sap.com/rkt-solman
For more information, refer to the SAP Service Marketplace:service.sap.com/solutionmanager
In the SAP Community Network a Discussion Forum on SAP Solution Manager is available: www.sdn.sap.comForum SAP Solutions SAP Solution Manager
![Page 118: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-118
Exercises
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: Solution Manager System Landscape
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Find version information for a customer solution in SAP Solution
Manager
TT4 is the Solution Manger system which contains all information about the system landscape. TT5 is a satellite system which is managed by TT4.
2-1 Check the support package level in the SAP Solution Manager System TT4
2-1-1 Name the transaction to find the system landscape description in SAP Solution Manager: Answer: ______________________________________________
2-1-2 Call transaction SMSY and find information for the SAP ECC System TT5. What is the current Support Package Level for the software component SAP_APPL? Answer: ______________________________________________ What is the data source of the version information? Answer: ______________________________________________ When was the data last refreshed? Answer: ______________________________________________
![Page 119: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-119
2-1-3 Find version information for the Enterprise Portal on TT5 (SAP Netweaver TT5_X). What is the current Support Package Level for the software component CORE-TOOLS? Answer: ______________________________________________ What is the data source of the version information? Answer: ______________________________________________ When was the data last refreshed? Answer: ______________________________________________
![Page 120: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-120
Exercises
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: System Landscape Directory
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Find version information for a customer solution in the System
Landscape Directory
TT4 is the Solution Manger system which contains all information about the system landscape. TT5 is a satellite system which is managed by TT4.
2-2 Logon to the System Landscape Directory of TT5 and perform the following
analyses. 2-2-1 How can you logon to the SLD? 2-2-2 Click on Technical Systems and search for all technical systems of type
“Web AS Java”. 2-2-3 What is the current support package for the software component version
“J2EE Engine Core Tools 7.00” of this system?
Answer: ______________________________________________ 2-2-4 What is the lastest Support Package available for this component?
Answer: ______________________________________________ 2- 2-5 Where does the information on the latest Support Package come from?
Answer: ______________________________________________ 2-2-6 Is a business system defined?
![Page 121: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-121
![Page 122: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-122
Exercises
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: Solutions
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a solution landscape in SAP Solution Manager • Navigate in SAP Solution Manager
This exercise has to be executed in the Solution Manager system TT4. The solution consists of the mySAP ERP system TT5, an Enterprise Portal system, a CRM system and an XI system.
2-3 Create a Solution
2-3-1 Name two transactions to call the operations part of SAP Solution Manager: Answer: ______________________________________________
2-3-2 Copy Solution Landscape E2ECC Demo Solution in the operations part of your SAP Solution Manager to a new solution with the following data: • Solution Name E2ECC_## (## = your group number) • Select Copy existingEarly Watch, …
2-3-3 Navigate into Solution Landscape Maintenance of your solution. Which logical components are assigned to your solution? Answer: ______________________________________________
2-3-4 Navigate to the Business Scenarios area in the Solution Landscape Maintenance part of your solution. Which business scenarios and business processes are assigned to your solution? Business Scenarios: ___________________________________________ Business Processes: ___________________________________________
2-3-5 Display the graphic of the business process Sales Order Management.
![Page 123: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-123
![Page 124: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-124
Exercises
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: Projects
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a project in SAP Solution Manager • Maintain project data
This exercise has to be executed in the Solution Manager system TT4. The project consists of the mySAP ERP system TT5, an Enterprise Portal system, a CRM system and an XI system.
2-4 Create a project
2-4-1 Name the transaction in SAP Solution Manager to create a project Answer: _________________________________________________
2-4-2 Create a new project with the name E2ECC_## of type Maintenance. Do not assign a solution. Enter a title for the project and select the project language English.
2-4-3 In the folder System Landscape enter the same logical components that were assigned to the solution in the last exercise.
![Page 125: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-125
![Page 126: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-126
Exercises
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: Business Processes Optional Exercise
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Assign maintenance projects to solutions • Check out business processes from solutions into projects • Maintain business processes
This exercise has to be executed in the Solution Manager system TT4. The business process runs within a SAP ECC system, an Enterprise Portal system and a CRM system
2-5 Check out a business process and maintain it in a project
2-5-1 Go to the solution that you have created in the exercise before. Assign a maintenance project to the solution.
2-5-2 Enable Check-out / Check-in of Solution Structure Elements. 2-5-3 Check out the business process Sales Order Management 2-5-4 The business process can now be maintained in the maintenance project
which is assigned to your solution. Name the transaction for maintaining the business blueprint in a project? Answer: _______________________________________________
2-5-5 Go to transaction SOLAR01 and add an additional step to the business process. Call the business process repository and select the business scenario Logistics and the business process step Order Generation.
2-5-6 Check in the business process Sales Order Management back to the solution.
2-5-7 Is it still possible to maintain the business process in the project after it is checked in back to a solution? Answer: ________________________________________________
![Page 127: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-127
![Page 128: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-128
Solutions
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: Solution Manager System Landscape
2-1 Check the support package level in the SAP Solution Manager System TT4
2-1-1 Name the transaction to find the system landscape description in SAP Solution Manager: The transaction name is SMSY
2-1-2 Call transaction SMSY and find information for the SAP ECC System TT5. What is the current Support Package Level for the software component SAP_APPL? In the tree structure on the left hand side of transaction SMSY drill down into Landscape Components Systems SAP ECC TT5 SAP ECC Server. On the right hand side click on the tab Software Components. Search for the software component SAP_APPL and check the SP Level. What is the data source of the version information? Click on the tab Header Data and check the value for Data Source When was the data last refreshed? check the value for Last Changed On/By
2-1-3 Find version information for the Enterprise Portal on TT5 (SAP Netweaver TT5_X). What is the current Support Package Level for the software component CORE-TOOLS? In the tree structure on the left hand side of transaction SMSY drill down into Landscape Components SAP Netweaver TT5_X Enterprise Portal. On the right hand side click on the tab Software Components. Search for the software component CORE-TOOLS and check the SP Level. What is the data source of the version information?
![Page 129: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-129
Click on the tab Header Data and check the value for Data Source When was the data last refreshed? check the value for Last Changed On/By
![Page 130: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-130
![Page 131: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-131
Solutions
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: System Landscape Directory
2-2 Logon to the System Landscape Directory of TT5 and perform the following
analyses. 2-2-1 How can you logon to the SLD?
Use the URL http://<hostname>:<port>/sld and provide a username and password in order to logon to the SLD. The default port is 5<instance>00. Hostname, username and password will be provided during the training.
2-2-2 Click on Technical Systems and search for all technical systems of type Web AS Java In the Home screen of the SLD click on the link Technical Systems. Choose the technical system type Web AS Java.
2-2-3 What is the current support package for the software component version “J2EE Engine Core Tools 7.00” of this system? Mark the system TT5 which sent updates to the SLD most recently. In the lower part of the screen click on the folder Installed Products. Click the button Filter On and enter the filter “J2EE ENGINE CORE TOOLS 7.00” for the column Software Component Versions and hit Enter. Write down the current Support Package Level.
2-2-4 What is the lastest Support Package available for this component? Write down the latest available Support Package Level.
2-2-5 Where does the information on the latest Support Package Level come from? A file with the latest component repository information can be downloaded from the SAP Service Marketplace and imported into the SLD. This file contains information on available software components and support package level. It must be imported into the SLD regularly. See SAP Note 669669.
2-2-6 Is a business system defined?
![Page 132: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-132
![Page 133: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-133
Solutions
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: Solutions
2-3 Create a Solution
2-3-1 Name two transactions to call the operations part of SAP Solution Manager: Answer: DSWP, SOLUTION_MANAGER
2-3-2 Copy Solution Landscape E2ECC Demo Solution in the operations part of your SAP Solution Manager to a new solution with the following data: • Solution Name E2ECC_## (## = your group number) • Select Copy existingEarly Watch, …
Call /nDSWP. In the solution overview mark solution E2ECC Demo Solution and choose copy. In the subsequent screen enter the name E2ECC_## and mark Copy existing EarlyWatch, …. Then choose Copy Solution
2-3-3 Navigate into “Solution Landscape Maintenance” of your solution. Which logical components are assigned to your solution? Choose the name of your solution in the solution overview. Then, go to Operations Setup -> Solution Landscape Maintenance The logical components are:
- Z_E2ECC_ECC - Z_E2ECC_CRM - Z_E2ECC_EP
2-3-4 Navigate to the Business Scenarios area in the Solution Landscape Maintenance part of your solution. Which business scenarios and business processes are assigned to your solution? In the Solution Structure on the left hand side drill down into Business Scenarios Sales Business Processes Sales Order Management The Business Scenarios are: Sales The Business Processes are: Sales Order Management
2-3-5 Display the graphic of the business process Sales Order Management The result should look like this:
![Page 134: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-134
![Page 135: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-135
Solutions
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: Projects
2-4 Create a project
2-4-1 Name the transaction in SAP Solution Manager to create a project Answer: SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN
2-4-2 Create a new project with the name E2ECC_## of type Maintenance. Do not assign a solution. Enter a title for the project and select the project language English. In transaction SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN create a new project. Enter the project name E2ECC_## and the project type Maintenance. Do not assign a solution. In the next screen enter a title for the project and select the project language English.
2-4-3 In the folder System Landscape enter the same logical components that were assigned to the solution in the last exercise. Goto the folder System Landscapes Systems and enter the following logical components with the F4 help:
- SAP ECC ECC Server Z_E2ECC_ECC - SAP CRM CRM Server Z_E2ECC_CRM - SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal Z_E2ECC_EP
![Page 136: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-136
![Page 137: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-137
Solutions
Unit: Solution Landscape Documentation Lesson: Business Processes
2-5 Check out a business process and maintain it in a project
2-5-1 Goto the solution that you have created in the exercise before. Assign a maintenance project to the solution. In transaction DSWP select your solution and goto Operations Setup
Solution Landscape Solution Landscape Maintenance. In the Solution Structure mark the name of the solution and select the folder Solution Settings on the right hand side. In the area Assigned Maintenance Project press the button Assign and select the maintenance project that you have created before.
2-5-2 Enable Check-out / Check-in of Solution Structure Elements. Mark the check-box Enable Check-out / Check-in of Solution Structure Elements on the same screen
2-5-3 Check out the business process Sales Order Management. In the Solution Structure navigate into the business processes and mark Sales Order Management. On the right hand side of the screen click the button Request Check-out. Now the Check-out status is Check-out requested. Press the button Check out the object. The Check-out status is now Checked out.
2-5-4 The business process can now be maintained in the maintenance project which is assigned to your solution. Name the transaction for maintaining the business blueprint in a project: Answer: The transaction is SOLAR01
2-5-5 Goto transaction SOLAR01 and add an additional step to the business process. Call the business process repository and select the business scenario Logistics and the business process step Order Generation. Call transaction SOLAR01 and check in the title of the transaction that you are working in the right project. The business process Sales Order Management should now be seen in the business blueprint. In the Business Blueprint Structure on the left hand side mark the business process Sales Order Management. On the right hand side click on the folder Structure. You see the list of business process steps.
![Page 138: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 2-138
Position the cursor at the end of that list and select the F4-help in order to go to the Business Process Repository. See the following screenshot:
In the Business Process Repository select the following business process step: Logistics Order Generation Generate Orders SAP ECC 6.0 Assign the logical component Z_E2ECC_ECC to the business process step and save your work.
2-5-6 Check in the business process Sales Order Management back to the solution. In the business blueprint mark the business process Sales Order Management. On the right hand side click on the button Check-in request close to the Check-Out status. The Check-out status is now Check-In Requested Go back to the Operations Setup of the solution and mark the business process Sales Order Management. Press the button Check in
2-5-7 Is it still possible to maintain the business process in the project after it is checked-in back to the solution? No the business scenario Sales is no longer assigned to the maintenance project.
![Page 139: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-139
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
Netweaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
E2E Change Diagnostics
![Page 140: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-140
© SAP AG 2007
Contents:
Configuration and File Reporting
E2E Change Analysis
E2E Change Diagnostics
![Page 141: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-141
© SAP AG 2007
End to End Change Diagnostics: Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
Look up recent changes in the customer solutionsincluding:
Technical Configuration
Business Configuration
Content (EP, XI, BI, SLD, …)
Coding
Compare Technical Configuration between landscapes
![Page 142: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-142
© SAP AG 2007
Change Diagnostics – Typical Questions
Is there ONE place where all changes in the
solution are listed
Did we changeany technicalconfigurationparameters?
How manytransports were
imported last week?
When did weimport support
packages?
Did we changeanything last
Tuesday?
Change Diagnostics supports customers in identifying, controlling, maintaining and verifying the versions of configurations and the values of parameters of the solution landscape components. Accurate information about configurations and their documentation is necessary to support auditing requirements and other solution operations processes. To track changes, the configuration information is recorded regularly inside the components and collected centrally in the SAP Solution Manger database. The configuration can be compared to a template or master configuration to analyze changes. The reporting includes all current and historical configuration data throughout the application life cycle. Together with Change Request Management and Change Deployment, Change Diagnostics supports the transition from project to operations and the management of code and configuration freeze phases.
![Page 143: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-143
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change Diagnostics: Overview
Technical Configuration
Business Configuration
“Content”EP, XI, BI, SLD
CodingPatches, SP,Release
Productive Environment
Documented in SAP Solution Manager (SMSY)
Type of changes
Changes toProduction
Enhanced Change and Transport SystemConfiguration Tracking
Tools
E2E Change Analysis
This figure shows the different tools in E2E Change Diagnostics. Configuration Tracking extracts a configuration parameter from Java or ABAP based systems
and displays the parameter and their history in Solution Manager Diagnostics The Change and Transport System records changes to Business Configuration (Customizing
Requests) and Coding (Workbench Requests). The new Enhanced Change and Transport System is also able to transport Non-ABAP objects like Java archives.
Releases, Support Packages and Patches are documented in the SAP Solution Manager (SMSY).
E2E Change Analysis provides a BI based reporting on all changes in a solution.
![Page 144: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-144
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change Diagnostics: Benefits
Change Diagnostics supports customers in identifying, controlling, maintaining and verifying the versions of Configurations (e.g. OS/DB,SAP NetWeaver, Application, Customer Coding)
Benefits of E2E Change Diagnostics: Central entry point for analyzing changes in a solution BI methods to drill down from overviews to detailed lists of changesProviding hints for root cause analysis with data and trendsProviding accurate information on configuration parameters and their history (e.g. database parameters, ABAP parameters, JAVA parameters)Enabling the organization to standardize the solution configurationImproving security by controlling the versions of configurationsin use
![Page 145: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-145
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change Diagnostics Unit Overview Diagram
Lesson 2: E2E Change Analysis
E2E Change Diagnostics
Lesson 1: Configuration and File Reporting
![Page 146: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-146
© SAP AG 2007
Web AS Instance
Web AS Instance
Web AS Instance
D
S S S
D
S S S
D
S S S
Agent Agent Agent
Web AS Instance
Web AS Instance
Web AS Instance
D
S S S
D
S S S
D
S S S
Agent Agent Agent
Web AS Instance
Web AS Instance
Web AS Instance
D
S S S
D
S S S
D
S S S
Agent Agent Agent
SAP Solution Manager
Configstore
Production
QA
Development
Architecture of a J2EE System Landscape
Here you see a J2EE system landscape with development, QA, and production systems. • Each system consists of one or several hosts. • Each host consists of one or several instances. • Each instance consists of several nodes (dispatcher, server, and so on).
A diagnostics agent is located on each host. It transfers configuration data to Solution Manager diagnostics once per day.
The need to track configuration settings first came up in J2EE systems. J2EE systems have a large number of configuration parameters in different locations. In the early days, it was difficult to track changes or to keep the configuration parameters homogeneous within the solution landscape.
![Page 147: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-147
© SAP AG 2007
View Configuration Data
Configuration Change Reporting collects the configuration settings for all non-ABAP components in the customer solution and provides navigation via landscape trees to each configuration setting in the SMD. A history of changes is provided per single configuration setting (based on daily snapshots). In addition it is possible to display the configuration as it was at a given point in time. It also allows you to compare the configuration settings between two components within any landscape, at any given point in time. As a result, all the differences are highlighted.
Configuration and File Reporting is integrated into the Solution Manager Diagnostics. Select Root Cause Analysis Configuration Configuration and File Reporting to start the application.
![Page 148: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-148
© SAP AG 2007
2.Click
Result
Compare two Landscapes
1.Click
3.Click
Compare two landscapes or two snapshots of the same landscape : Choose the desired timestamp and Click on the button “Compare” Select the appropriate landscape in the drop-down list “Landscape2”. Choose the desired timestamp for the landscape2. Check the node to compare (e.g.: Landscape, NW, SAP J2EE Engineer, Enterprise Portal). Click on the “Compare” button. If you select a node other than the Landscape, you need to
select the item to compare in lanscape2 in a pop-up window after you click the compare. Expand the configuration hierarchy to compare the attribute values.
The procedure for comparing two snapshots of the same landscape is similar to that outlined
above.
![Page 149: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-149
© SAP AG 2007
Missing value
Unchanged value
Different value
Additional value
Compare two Landscapes - Result
In the result screen, you can drill down into the system parameters. You see different icons for unchanged values, different values, additional values and missing values.
![Page 150: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-150
© SAP AG 2007
Compare Multiple Instances
Missingvalue
Additionalvalue
Unchanged value
Different value
Additional value
Missing value
The function “Compare Multiple Instances reduces the effort spent on comparing multiple J2EE Nodes and complex J2EE landscapes in the background.
You can compare different nodes on the same host or nodes on different instances and different hosts
A history of changes is provided for each configuration parameter (based on daily snapshots). In addition, it is possible to display the configuration for a given point in time
It enables the organization to standardize the solution configuration The use case “Compare Multiple Instances” is very useful to: compare different instances among different hosts (clustered environment) compare different instances from different landscapes (eg: PROD vs, QAS, DEV, TEST)
Procedure:
Navigate to Compare Multiple Instances ->Trigger compare tab Check two or more instances to compare Select one instance as the main instance. This will be used as reference. All other instances are
compared with the main instance. Trigger the compare (takes a few second until the icon changes to green ) Click the Display button and the “Compare Results” is displayed in the navigation window.
![Page 151: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-151
The parameter changes (different value, missing value, unchanged value and additional value ) are marked with different icons
![Page 152: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-152
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change Diagnostics Unit Overview Diagram
Lesson 2: E2E Change Analysis
E2E Change Diagnostics
Lesson 1: Configuration and File Reporting
![Page 153: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-153
© SAP AG 2007
Configuration and File Reporting - Architecture
Java-based installationsJava-based installations
Diagnostics agentsDiagnostics agentsSolution Manager
Config store
Configuration and file reporting
Data collection once a day
Parameter values
The data is collected in Java based systems via Diagnostics Agents and in ABAP based systems via Solution Tool Plugin Extractors.
E2E Change Analysis uses the same tables as Configuration and File Reporting It enhances the functionality of the former Configuration and File Reporting by adding data of
ABAP based systems and by providing BI based reporting capabilities
![Page 154: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-154
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change Analysis - Architecture
Java-based installationsJava-based installations
Diagnostics agentsDiagnostics agentsSolution Manager
Config store
Configuration and file reporting
Data collection once a day
InfoCube
E2E change analysis
ABAP-based installationsABAP-based installations
Solution tool plug-insSolution tool plug-ins
Data collection once a day
Number of changes
Parameter values
The data is collected in Java based systems via Diagnostics Agents and in ABAP based systems via Solution Tool Plugin Extractors.
E2E Change Analysis uses the same tables as Configuration and File Reporting It enhances the functionality of the former Configuration and File Reporting by adding data of
ABAP based systems and by providing BI based reporting capabilities
![Page 155: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-155
© SAP AG 2007
Change Groups and Change Types
ABAP Software VersionABAP Component ReleaseABAP PackagesSupport Package Level SAP NotesSAP Kernel
JAVA Software VersionJAVA Component ReleaseJAVA Support PackagesFixesPatches
TransportsWorkbenchCustomizingNon-ABAP
Operation SystemOS ParameterOS LevelOS Patch Level
DatabaseDB ParameterDB LevelDB Patch Level
ABAP System ConfigurationABAP Instance Parameter RFC Destinations
JAVA System ConfigurationJAVA Instance Parameter
BI, SCM, CRM, XI, …
This slide contains a list of change types, which are currently available or planned in E2E Change Analysis. The list will be developed further.
Change Types are the smallest unit which are counted and displayed in E2E Change Analysis. Change Types are bundled in Change Groups.
![Page 156: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-156
© SAP AG 2007
Example: Data Source for ABAP Parameter
The table PAHI is the data source for the ABAP parameter
![Page 157: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-157
© SAP AG 2007
Different Types of Data
Details not availableNumber of events is displayed in the overview Detail information is locatedin the managed systems
Details not availableNumber of events is displayed in the overview Detail information is locatedin the managed systems
Timestamp MethodNumber of events since last data collection run is transferred to E2E ChangeAnalysis
Timestamp MethodNumber of events since last data collection run is transferred to E2E ChangeAnalysis
Transports and PatchesPatches, SP, ReleaseBusiness ConfigurationContent (EP, XI, BI, SLD)Coding
Transports and PatchesPatches, SP, ReleaseBusiness ConfigurationContent (EP, XI, BI, SLD)Coding
Details availableNumber of changes is displayed in the overview Full configuration set can be displayed for each day
Details availableNumber of changes is displayed in the overview Full configuration set can be displayed for each day
Snapshot MethodDaily snapshot is transferredto E2E Change Analysis
Snapshot MethodDaily snapshot is transferredto E2E Change Analysis
Technical ConfigurationOS, DB, ABAP parameters
Technical ConfigurationOS, DB, ABAP parameters
Detail ViewerDetail ViewerData Collection Method
Data Collection MethodType of DataType of Data
In E2E Change Analysis, we differentiate between two types of data: Technical configuaration, like OS, DB and ABAP parameters. These parameters are not
recorded by the Change and Transport System. A full snapshot of each configuration set is extracted on each day.
Changes which are recorded in transport requests or Support Packages and Patches, are already documented in the managed systems. For these types of changes only the number of events since the last data collection run is transfered to E2E Change Analysis. Details are located in the managed systems.
![Page 158: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-158
© SAP AG 2007
BI
ST
Data Extraction Process
E2E MainExtractorHOURLY
„Change Events“
E2E Change Analysis MainExtractorDAILY
„Configuration Changes“
E2E Change Analysis Other Infocubes
Configuration Store (SMD DB)
ConfigurationCollector(Wrapper)
SMD Scheduler
E2EExtraction Framework
E2EExtractionFramework
SMD
ABAP / JAVASystemABAP / JAVA
SystemABAP / JAVASystem
ABAP SystemABAP SystemABAP System
Java SystemJava SystemJava System
This diagram shows the data flow in E2E Change Diagnostics. The collection of the configuration parameters is shown on the left. Java based systems send
the parameters via the SMD agent to the config store. In ABAP based systems the configuration parameters are collected via ST-A/PI extractors. Data transfers for both Java and ABAP systems are triggered in the SMD Scheduler.
From the Configuration Database the configuration parameters are uploaded daily into the E2E Change Analysis infocube. This upload is controlled by the E2E Extraction Framework.
Recorded changes, like transport requests, SAP Notes or Support Packages are collected every hour by the E2E Extraction Framework. For these kinds of changes, no detailed information is stored in the Configuration Database. The number of events is uploaded directly into the infocube.
![Page 159: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-159
© SAP AG 2007
Required Software Versions
May 200701J_CRM500ST-A/PI
July 2007SP6BI_Cont
August 2007SP13Solution Manager
August 2007SPS13NW04s
Planned AvailabilitySupport Package Release
![Page 160: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-160
© SAP AG 2007
System Demonstration
System-Demo
![Page 161: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-161
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change Analysis - Overview
BSO B70
E2E Change Analysis is integrated into the Solution Manager Diagnostics. Navigate to Root Cause Analysis Configuration E2E Change Analysis. On the first screen, you see the number of changes for all systems of the solution in the
selected timeframe.
![Page 162: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-162
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change Analysis – Query Navigation
In the next step, select a system. When you open the Navigation Block, you can design individual queries. For example you
can display the number of changes per system, change type and calendar day.
![Page 163: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-163
© SAP AG 2007
Detail viewer per change type and change day
For the details, jumpinto the configstores, displaying theparameter for theselected system and calendar day
The number of changes is context sensitive. Right-click on the figures in order to navigate into the context menu. Then select Goto Config Details to display the complete configuration set for the selected day.
![Page 164: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-164
© SAP AG 2007
End to End Change Diagnostics: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Look up recent changes in the customer solutionsincluding:
Technical Configuration
Business Configuration
Content (EP, XI, BI, SLD, …)
Coding
Compare Technical Configuration between landscapes
![Page 165: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-165
![Page 166: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-166
Exercises
Unit: E2E Change Diagnostics Lesson: Configuration and File Reporting
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the configuration and file reporting in SAP Solution Manager
Diagnostics
This exercise has to be executed in the SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics of system TT4.
3-1 Logon to the Solution Manager Diagnostics in TT4 and perform the following
analyses. 3-1-1 What is the URL to logon to Solution Manager Diagnostics?
Answer: _______________________________________________ 3-1-2 Call the Configuration and File Reporting tool. What is the path?
Answer: _______________________________________________ 3-1-3 In the Landscape Selection choose the solution ESS Solution and the
system role Production System. In the Detailed Selection choose the host for the maininstance SAP XSS (Self Services). For which timestamps is configuration data available? Load the configuration data for the most recent timestamp.
3-1-4 In the View Configuration screen search for the configuration file “instance.properties”. What is the ConfigStore path and ConfigStore name? Answer: ______________________________________________ When was the file last changed? Answer: ______________________________________________
3-1-5 Click on the line to display the configuration parameters. Which of the parameters were changed? Answer: ______________________________________________ Check the parameter MaxHeapSize (server0). When was the parameter changed and what was the previous value?
![Page 167: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-167
Answer: ______________________________________________
![Page 168: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-168
3-1-6 Compare the complete configuration for the ESS Solution solution with an older version.
3-1-7 Perform a Deep Compare for the ConfigStores Path = DVEBMGS50/j2ee/
![Page 169: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-169
Exercises
Unit: E2E Change Diagnostics Lesson: E2E Change Analysis
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the E2E Change Analysis tool to track all changes in a solution
This exercise has to be executed in the Solution Manager Diagnostics of the system TT4.
3-2 Perform the following analyses in the E2E Change Analysis tool.
3-2-1 Navigate to E2E Change Analysis. What is the path? Answer: _______________________________________________
3-2-2 Select the solution ESS Solution and the system role Production.Select the timeframe 01-Jan-2007 until 28-Feb-2007. What is the number of changes? Answer: _______________________________________________
3-2-3 What is the number of changes for each host of the solution? Host 1: _______________________________________________ Host 2: _______________________________________________ Host 3: _______________________________________________ …
3-2-4 Look at the system TT5. For which change groups and change types have changes been recorded? Answer: _________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
![Page 170: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-170
3-2-5 Go to the Navigation Block and take the changes per Calendar Day as additional columns into the table. On which day did most changes take place? Answer: _________________________________________________
3-2-6 Drill down into the configuration details for the latest Java parameter changes. Which parameters were changed on that day? Answer: _________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________
![Page 171: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-171
Solutions
Unit: E2E Change Diagnostics Lesson: Configuration and File Reporting
3-1 Logon to the Solution Manager Diagnostics in TT4 and perform the following
analyses. 3-1-1 What is the URL to logon to Solution Manager Diagnostics?
http://<hostname>:50000/smd 3-1-2 Call the Configuration and File Reporting tool. What is the path?
Root Cause Analysis Configuration Configuration and File Reporting
3-1-3 In the Landscape Selection choose the solution ESS Solution and the system role Production System. In the Detailed Selection choose the host for the maininstance SAP XSS (Self Services). For which timestamps is configuration data available? Load the configuration data for the most recent timestamp. Make your selections and press the Start button. Check which timestamps are available in the listbox. Select the most recent timestamp and click on the Load button.
3-1-4 In the View Configuration screen search for the configuration file “instance.properties”. What is the ConfigStore path and ConfigStore name? In the View Configuration screen enter the filename “instance.properties” in the Search field and click on the Search button. In the next screen click on the Go to next button twice. The ConfigStore path is DVEBMGS50/j2ee/. The ConfigStore Name is cluster/instance.properties. When was the file last changed? Check the Date entry in the end of the line for the ConfigStore name.
3-1-5 Click on the line to display the configuration parameters. Which of the parameters were changed? All parameters with the icon were changed. Check the parameter MaxHeapSize (server0). When was the parameter
![Page 172: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-172
changed and what was the previous value? Click on the button Attribute History to display the change date and the previous value.
![Page 173: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-173
3-1-6 Compare the complete configuration for the ESS Solution solution with an older version. Go back to the screen Display landscape Production System of solution ESS Solution. Click on the Compare button. In Landscape 2 select an older timestamp and click on the Compare button. Now the screen Select Subtrees for Compare appears.
3-1-7 Perform a Deep Compare for the ConfigStores Path = DVEBMGS50/j2ee/ In the screen Select Subtrees for Compare select the ConfigStores Path = DVEBMGS50/j2ee/. Click on the button Deep Compare. In the next screen mark the same ConfigStore for landscape2, and click on Select. A new screen Compare Results appears. It shows all ConfigStores with changed parameters. Expand the list in order to see the changed parameters.
![Page 174: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-174
Solutions
Unit: E2E Change Diagnostics Lesson: E2E Change Analysis
3-2 Perform the following analyses in the E2E Change Analysis tool.
3-2-1 Navigate to E2E Change Analysis. What is the path? Root Cause Analysis Configuration E2E Change Analysis
3-2-2 Select the solution ESS Solution and the system role Production.Select the timeframe 01-Jan-2007 until 28-Feb-2007. What is the number of changes? Select the timeframe Custom Selection and choose From 01.01.2007 To 28.02.2007. Click on the button SID. In the folder Overview a diagram appears that shows the number of changes in the selected timeframe.
3-2-3 What is the number of changes for each host of the solution? Click on the button Hosts. A diagram appears that shows the number of changes for each host in the selected timeframe.
3-2-4 Look at the system TT5. For which change groups and change types have changes been recorded? Click on the folder for system TT5. A table is displayed that contains a list of all Change Groups and Change Types for which changes were recorded in the selected timeframe. Click on the Change Groups to see the Change Types.
3-2-5 Go to the Navigation Block and take the changes per Calendar Day as additional columns into the table. On which day did most changes take place? Look at the following screenshot to see how to open the Navigation Block and take the changes per Calendar Day as additional columns into the table.
![Page 175: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 3-175
Close the Navigation Block again and go back to the table. Now there should be a column for each Calendar Day. Compare the number of changes for each day.
3-2-6 Drill down into the configuration details for the latest Java parameter changes. Which parameters were changed on that day? Make a right mouse click on the number of changes for the latest Java parameter changes. In the context menu select Goto Config Details. A list of all parameters that were changed in that week is displayed.
![Page 176: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-176
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
NetWeaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
NetWeaver Development Environments
![Page 177: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-177
© SAP AG 2007
Contents:
ABAP Development Workbench
NetWeaver Development Infrastructure
Enterprise Portal
Exchange Infrastructure
Software Deployment Manager
NetWeaver Development Environments
![Page 178: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-178
© SAP AG 2007
NetWeaver Development Environments: Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
Describe the different development environments, which are integrated in SAP NetWeaver
ABAP Development Workbench
NetWeaver Development Infrastructure and itscomponents
Enterprise Portal Content Administrator
Exchange Infrastructure Integration Builder
Explain the functions of the Software DeploymentManager
![Page 179: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-179
© SAP AG 2007
ABAP Change & Transport System
Enterprise Portal Content Administrator
NetWeaverDevelopment Infrastructure
ABAP DevelopmentWorkbench Development
LandscapeQuality
LandscapeProductionLandscape
QualityComponent n
QualityComponent 1
ProductionComponent n
ProductionComponent 1
.
...
check in
Transport Transport
Deploy Deploy
EPA
Exchange Infrastructure
Integration Builder
TPZ
Manage Heterogeneous Development Environments
Software Deployment
Manager
Software Deployment
Manager
…(open Interface for
non-ABAP objects)
The Enhanced Change and Transport System (CTS+) is an improvement on the established ABAP Change and Transport System.
It allows changes from heterogeneous development environments to be transported with the ABAP Change and Transport System.
Java Archives can be checked in to transport requests as transportable objects on the target system, after Import Methods are executed to deploy the Java archives via the Software Deployment Manager.
![Page 180: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-180
© SAP AG 2007
NetWeaver Development Environments Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Lesson 1: ABAP Development Workbench
Lesson 2: NetWeaver Development Infrastructure
Lesson 3: Enterprise Portal
Lesson 4: Exchange Infrastructure
Lesson 5: Software Deployment Manager
![Page 181: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-181
© SAP AG 2007
Data Types in SAP Systems
Cross-client Customizing#
Customizing
# Appl.
data
Use
r
Customizing
# Appl.
data
Use
r
Modifications
CustomizingCustomizing
Customizing
Development
Customer Enhancements
SAP Repository
….
The SAP system contains different types of data. Some data can only be accessed from one client, such as business application data
(documents, material master), and most customizing settings Customizing is used to deifne a customers organizational structure. The client-specific data is closely related. Application data is checked against the customizing
settings in the client at input. If inconsistencies are found, the input is rejected. There are other settings, which are set once and are active for all clients. These client-
independent Customizing settings include printer settings, for example. The repository is also client-independent. It contains all ABAP dictionary objects (tables, data
elements, domains) as well as all ABAP programs, menus, screens, and so on. Because they are client-independent, Repository objects developed in one client are identical
in all other clients in the same system.
![Page 182: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-182
© SAP AG 2007
Integrated ABAP Development Workbench
Transaction SE80 is the integrated ABAP development workbench. All repository objects can be changed here.
![Page 183: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-183
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Implementation Guide for Customizing
The Implementation Guide is a tool for creating customer-specific system settings in the SAP system.
The hierarchical structure of the Reference IMG: • reflects the Application Component structure in the SAP system • contains additional General Settings (valid for all applications) and Company Structure
(SAP organizational units, country- specific default settings) • lists all documentation relevant for the implementation of the SAP system • contains functions to create customizing settings
IMG structure elements: • Structure nodes • IMG activities
Call the Reference IMG with SPRO
![Page 184: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-184
© SAP AG 2007
Cost cent er Edit Goto D etails E nviro nme nt Syste m Hel p
??
Global SettingsCountriesCurrenciesCalendars
Implementation Guide (IMG)
Customizing Organizer
CustomizingDEVK900124 Change Request
DEVK900125 TaskDEVK900126 Task
View Maintenance: DataV_TVAKV_TSPA
Transport Management System
Workbench Organizer
TransportableDEVK900131 Change Request
DEVK900133 TaskDEVK900134 Task
ABAP Program SourceZCDEMOZCACTION
ABAP Development Workbench
ObjectBrowser
ABAPDictionary
ABAPEditor
FunctionLibrary
ScreenPainter
MenuPainter
ABAP Development Workbench
Automatic Recording of Changes
SAP provides different implementation tools for Customizing and development. For Customizing: • The Implementation Guide (IMG) is the main Customizing tool. Once you decide which
R/3 modules you require, the IMG automatically generates a hierarchical list of steps (or Customizing transactions) for Customizing.
• The Customizing Organizer (CO) (Transaction code SE10) records Customizing changes in change requests (of type CUST) which can be released to the transport system for export to other systems in the R/3 System landscape.
For development: • The ABAP Development Workbench provides access to development tools, which cover
the entire software development cycle. These tools may be used for both customer-specific development and SAP enhancements of R/3 applications.
• The Workbench Organizer (WBO) (Transaction code SE09) records ABAP Development Workbench changes in change requests (of type SYST), which can then be released to the transport system for export to other systems in the R/3 System landscape.
The CO and the WBO are completely integrated with the Transport Management System (TMS).
![Page 185: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-185
© SAP AG 2007
WorkbenchOrganizer - SE09
Customizing
Change documentation
Teamwork
Table change history (logging)
Connected to Client Administration and Transport Management System
Development
Change documentation
Teamwork
SSCR
Packages
Object locking
Version management
Connected to Transport Management System
CustomizingOrganizer - SE10
Customizing Organizer and Workbench Organizer
Customizing changes are saved to a Customizing change request. Development changes are saved to Workbench change requests.
Customizing changes consist of table entries. Workbench change requests concern changes to R/3 Repository objects, such as ABAP
programs, screens, data dictionary objects and global documentation. Compared to Customizing, change management for development is more complex, requiring: • Registration of developers within SAP Software Change Registration (SSCR) • Development classes for R/3 Repository objects • Locking of R/3 Repository objects during development • Versioning of R/3 Repository objects
![Page 186: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-186
© SAP AG 2006
NetWeaver Development Environments Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Lesson 1: ABAP Development Workbench
Lesson 2: NetWeaver Development Infrastructure
Lesson 3: Enterprise Portal
Lesson 4: Exchange Infrastructure
Lesson 5: Software Deployment Manager
![Page 187: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-187
© SAP AG 2007
check-out & change development objects
Logon to SAP development
system
activate changes
test application
releasetransport
NetWeaver Development Infrastructure: Learning from ABAP
JAVA
Defines the whole environment of own and foreign
componentsCorrect libraries are copied automatically
Implicit check forformal correctness
visibility for everyone
early integration
test application
copy & checkout source files, change development objects
logon to NWDI DevConfig
build centrally &activate changes
release fortransport
Developer testswithin the central
environment
ABAP
The SAP NetWeaver Development Infrastructure (NWDI) supports the Java software development throughout the entire software lifecycle: • Centralized administration of the development environment • Access to objects stored in the NWDI for developers integrated into the SAP NetWeaver
Developer Studio • Synchronization of development on sources and archive level • Synchronization of development teams across repository boundaries, allowing for a
customer modification concept • Development environment used by SAP's customers, partners and SAP's own development
As shown here, though there are many technical differences between ABAP and Java, many basic concepts of the development process have been integrated into Java development.
![Page 188: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-188
© SAP AG 2007
Development environment (IDE)
Java
Run
time
Envi
ronm
ent f
or
the
SAP
Syst
ems
(DEV
,CO
NS,
...)
Dep
loym
ent
Local File
System
Component Model
ComponentBuild
Service(CBS)
Cha
nge
Man
agem
ent S
ervi
ce(C
MS)
Design Time Repository
(DTR)
LocalSAP
Web AS Java
Local Installation on Developer's PC
CentralInfrastructure
Local Build Tool
RuntimeSystems
Name ServiceSystem Landscape
Directory (SLD)
Building Blocks of NWDI
SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio (IDE, Integrated UI for all development tasks including those concerned with DTR, CBS, CMS and Name Service): SAP’s own development environment for developing multi-layer Java-based business applications. The new development environment is based on the open source product Eclipse. It fully supports SAP’s component model (SAP’s component model is a new way to structure software)
DTR: Central store for all types of source files. The store is presented logically as a hierarchical files and folders structure. The contents are physically stored in a database and can be accessed using the open protocols WebDAV and DeltaV.
CBS: Build Environment. The CBS stores all imported libraries (archives) to start development of new Software Components (SCs). It also builds and stores all newly created development components
CMS: Administration and quality management environment for (logical) development systems. It consists of the Landscape Configurator (responsible for the definition of development environments for specific SC releases (tracks with development configurations for development and consolidation)) and of the Transport Studio (that enables transport mechanisms for development components from Development Consolidation Assembly
Approval Name Service: Service to guarantee the uniqueness of names (technically, the Name Service is
an SLD)
![Page 189: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-189
SLD: SAP J2EE application that contains all relevant information about software products and components (both ABAP and Java) that can be installed in a system landscape. It also contains a description of the current system landscape. The SLD also stores the development configurations.
Please note: SLD is not part of NWDI, but already part of standard SAP Web AS Java installation. SLD is required by the NWDI.
![Page 190: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-190
© SAP AG 2007
SLD Used for Java Development
For Java development, SLD provides the following services:
Definition of software, products and software components to be developed with interdependencies
Naming Service:Reserve name spaces for unique names of development components
Storage of development configurations required for development
![Page 191: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-191
© SAP AG 2007
Development Cycle Using NWDI – Overview
Track & Dev. Configs.
Delivery
SL Change Mgmt.
Development
Next Release
define
import
release
prepare
define
ADM
INIS
TRAT
ION
/ Q
MAD
MIN
ISTR
ATIO
ND
EVEL
OPM
ENT
Product. & SCs1. SLD: Define software to be developed
Define a product (including release number)Define one or more software components (SCs) that form the product and their dependencies
2. CMS: Set up the development landscapeDefine a track for the specific release of the SCDevelopment configurations are generated for each development state of an SC (DEV/CONS). Used SCs are imported.
3. Dev. Studio: Edit and build development objects
Use SAP’s Developer Studio with access to NWDI by importing the corresponding development configurationRelease objects for further processing by QM
4. CMS: Perform further administrative stepsTransport into next dev. steps, quality assurance, and assembly using the Change Management Service
5. CMS: Deliver SCs and patchesDeliver software component versions
6. CMS: For the next release define new versions
Development process: • Define a product in the SLD • Define the development environment (DTR, CBS, and RTS) in the CMS for each release • Developers SAP NW Developer Studios are configured specifically for each development
task by a simple file import from SLD/CMS - Developers use DTR and CBS which give them access to the sources and archives they
need (central storage guarantees consistency of all objects) - Objects are only activated after a successful central build, which guarantees that only
checked objects go into broader use. - Successfully tested objects go into further use in the software life cycle consolidation
steps and next release in a defined way. • In the CMS the next steps are carried out in a defined way: Consolidation, approval, and
assembly. • Manage the delivery (archives and/or sources) • For the next release, define the version number in the SLD and go through all steps again.
Create a new track, etc. ….
![Page 192: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-192
© SAP AG 2007
Central Development
System
Consolidation System
Test system
Production System
3
Development Configuration
Entwickler
Development Configuration
21CB
Developer: Administrator:A
B
CheckIn 12
3
Import
Assembly & Import
Approval & Import
Buildspace
Software Component Archive (SCA)
Version i
Change Requests
Buildspace
WorkspacesWorkspacesWorkspacesWorkspaces
A
C
Activate
Release
Transports Within a Track – Overview
Netweaver Development Infrastructure
The figure above shows an overview of the transport process. Steps (A), (B) and (C) are performed by the developer whereas steps (1), (2) and (3) are performed by a transport manager or a quality manager.
After the Check-In (A) the developer activates (B) the sources from SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio. A central build process will be triggered. After a successful activation, the new binaries are deployed automatically into the central development system for central testing (if a runtime system for the development stage is defined within the track).
(C) After a successful test in the central development system, the developer releases the activity. The CMS creates a change request upon released activities. References to the released activities containing the relevant object versions are exported to the file system for transport. Finally, CMS adds the new change requests into the consolidation queue.
(1) The transport manager imports the appropriate change requests from consolidation queue. The import triggers the DTR import in inactive workspace, the CBS activation and – if a runtime system is available – an automatic deployment into the consolidation runtime system is started.
(2) After the consolidation stage, an assembly process will be started by the transport manager. During this step, all binaries (and sources, if necessary) in assured state are assembled into a component version. It is possible to test the assembled software component version again by deploying it to the test system (if configured in the track). After the component version has been successfully verified, it waits for approval for delivery.
![Page 193: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-193
(3) The component version can then be approved by the responsible person. After approval, it can be imported into the productive runtime system of the track or it can be copied as SCA file from the file system and delivered to customers or deployed manually via SDM or JSPM.
![Page 194: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-194
© SAP AG 2007
DevelopmentComponents
SoftwareComponents
ReleaseP1 P2
O1
D4
O3
D7
D8D6
D5
D11
D10D9
S1 S2
Products
SupportPackage
(Fix)
O2
Component Model in Delivery And Maintenance
Objects
The SAP component model for Java development is used in delivery and in the context of maintenance.
Software maintenance is organized into three tiers: Products are installed or undergo an upgrade to a new release. A release is a full delivery of
software components that provide new functions (and possibly user interfaces) or improvements. Installation and upgrade are not performed with CMS resources.
A Support Package (SP) is (unlike ABAP) a full delivery of one (or more) software component(s) and contains a number of fixes. The usual file format of an SP is the SCA format. Support Packages are implemented using the Java Support Package Manager Tool (JSPM). JSPM distinguishes between Systems that are under NWDI control and those that are not.
Fixes are full deliveries of a development component that allow quick error correction, before the complete SP is available. The usual file format is the SDA format.
• Hint: SAP usually does not yet deliver fixes. The smallest unit of delivery of SAP software is a Support Package.
Development Objects (DOs) • Stored as versioned files in the source repository (DTR) • Example: Web Dynpro view, table definition, Java source file
![Page 195: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-195
© SAP AG 2006
Structuring Applications Using the Component Model
SC B(imported, read only)
SC A(imported,read only)
SC X(changeable)
Product X
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
DC
consists of
uses
uses
DC
SAPNWDev.
Studio
CMS
SLD
Product • Business solution decided upon by management • Created in SLD • Made up of SCs
- New SC(s) (created in SLD) - Used SCs already available
New SCs • Provide a context for the creation of new DCs in the SC-compartment. • Only new SCs (not the used SCs) are changeable in the SAP NetWeaver Developer
Studio in the context of a development configuration. • Created in the SLD; composition of new and used SCs for the new product ( more
precisely: product version) in the CMS New DCs
• Provide a context for the creation of a new development objects • DCs have a type. For each type a build script is available • DCs provide
- project structures according to their type.
![Page 196: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-196
- DC Meta Data with information needed for the build process etc. (see slide with DC structure).
• DCs define the visibility of their development objects. • DCs define the use of other DCs. • DCs structuring the complete SC by use of parent DCs and inner DCs
Development objects • All file types used in Java/J2EE • SAP-specific files in Web Dynpro • Meta Data files used in automated processes of the NWDI • Component model-specific files such as DC and SC definition files • Two file types:
- Created: Stored as versioned objects in the DTR - Generated: Not stored in the DTR
Files are automatically chosen by the SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio (settings can be adjusted in the studio)
![Page 197: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-197
© SAP AG 2006
Source Code Management in the DTR – Basics
Distributed, concurrent development
Distributed versioning that spans repositories
Conflict detection
Support for conflict resolution
Files and FoldersDTR knows only files and folders
No knowledge about objects of programming model (classes, tables, screens etc)
Check in/check out modelFiles are checked out from DTR and modified “offline”
Files are checked in again when change is complete
The DTR provides central storage, versioning and management of java sources and other resources with an automated conflict detection and resolution. The Developer Studio enables comprehensive DTR support for all available project types (Web Dynpro, EJB,...).
Distributed, concurrent development – the DTR addresses the needs of large scale development:
• Some projects are so big that the development team is spread over different locations. The groups will work in parallel. The same requirements you have if you want to allow your customers to do modifications to your applications, which means modifications to the Java source code.
• The versioning mechanism of the DTR that spans repositories means that you can safely propagate changes from one DTR repository to another
• The conflict detection allows to detect, if two versions of one development object have been created in parallel and prevents inconsistent states of versions
• Conflicts that are reported by the DTR can of course be solved there: A conflict is always a uncertainty, which of two versions of a certain file shall be active in the DTR (see workspaces for details); the content of the conflicting versions can be displayed and the user can decide how to solve the conflict (see conflicts for details).
Files and Folders:
![Page 198: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-198
• Though the DTR stores all objects in a database the content of this database is presented to the DTR client in a files and folders fashion. This meets the concepts of the Eclipse-based SAP’s IDE the SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio.
• The storage of files is independent of the programming language so in principle all types of files can be stored and versioned, even if they are not part of the Java programming model.
![Page 199: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-199
Check in/check out model: • To change a file in the DTR you must check it out: To change them you will use a copy
in your local file system (see changing resources for details). • Changed objects will be checked back in to the DTR server – all changes will be part of
an activity then.
![Page 200: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-200
© SAP AG 2007
Design Time Repository – Modification Adjustment
WSSAP WScust
b1
Install
Apply SP
Accept / reject or merge integrated version
conflict
a1
a2
a1
a2
b2
Scenario:The same file was changed in two workspaces concurrently Propagation of changes from one workspace to another integration conflict
Distributed versioning and conflict resolution:
Changes are recognized as versions of same fileImported versions are correctly placed in version graphNo risk of overwriting changes in target repository
Example: There is a WS at SAP where an application is developed. The sources are delivered to a customer together with the archives. The customer uses his or her installation of the NWDI to modify the source code.
A new source object is created in SAPs workspace and stored in the DTR as version a1. This version is delivered to and installed at the customer’s site.
The customer modifies a1 in a customer workspace WScust and creates version b1. In the meantime, a version a2 is created in WSSAP and delivered as SP1. The customer now integrates the content of SP1 into his WS: Version a2 is detected as
conflicting with b1. The customer now has three conflict resolution options – his or her modifications are not
overwritten automatically. The whole version tree of a development object is always transported along with the actual
version of the object. We call this a global version history. He or she can choose to accept the new version from SAP. All subsequent transports will not
cause conflicts. He or she can also reject SAP’s new version a2 or merge his version b1 with a2 by creating a
new customer version b2
![Page 201: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-201
Version conflicts not only can occur during check-in of an activity – they can also happen during integration of an activity into another workspace (WS): A version of the same file that is neither a predecessor nor a successor of the new version has to be integrated into a workspace. Therefore, you have to decide about the active version in the workspace.
DTR – Distributed Versioning NWDI distinguishes the following conflicts: Check-in conflicts during normal course of development in every workspace. Integration conflicts when sources are used and changed over workspace boundaries (e.g. for
different releases of the same product).
![Page 202: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-202
© SAP AG 2007
CBS
Component Build Service (CBS)
Buildspace
DC 3 Archives
Temporary Folder
DTR
Build
DC 2
DC 4 Archives
DC 1 Archives
DC 2 Archives
DC 1
DC 3
DC 4
inactive workspaceDC 2
active workspace
DC 2
a b c
a b c d
DC 2
a
b
c
d
d
activate
DC 5 Archives
DC n Archives
Changes in DC 2 are activated. DC 2 uses DCs 1,3, and 4.If any DC uses DC 2, it will be rebuilt when DC 2 is activated.
d
Act.dedit
VR d
DC 2 is to be developed. DC 2 uses (is dependent on) DC 1, DC 3 and DC 4. A developer checks in his activity, which contains the modified source object d and activates
this change. The CBS pulls the actual version of all source objects belonging to DC 2 from the inactive
workspace. They are compiled based on the actual binary versions of the used components from the archive pool of the CBS.
Once the build succeeds, the DC 2 is activated, which means that its actual binary version is stored in the archive pool and is visible for all dependent components. The corresponding source versions are copied into the active workspace at the same time.
If there are any components depending on DC 2, they will be rebuilt according to internal build requests created by CBS.
![Page 203: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-203
© SAP AG 2007
NWDI
Design TimeRepository
ComponentBuild Service
CMS
Tran
spor
t Stu
dio
Land
scap
e C
onfig
urat
or
EnterprisePortal
CustomDevelopment
PureSourceControl
Dev
. Stu
dio
ModificationMgmnt
NWDI – Scenario Overview
ProcessIntegrat.
Process Integration: • Tracks & Transports – no development in Developer Studio, no use of DTR.
Portal: • Portal application DCs (restriction: Missing DCs; workaround: External Library DCs). • Portal content is created in Portal Content Studio and transported via DC Portal Content in
Developer Studio (restriction: Not supported; workaround described in How-To-Guide “Transporting SAP Enterprise Portal 6.0 Content” (in SAP Service MP alias nw-howtoguides).
Custom Development: • Development of arbitrary software using the component model of Java/J2EE + SAP
specific types (J2EE, Java, Dictionary objects, Web Dynpro, etc.). Modification Management: • Solutions (e.g. ESS) shipped by SAP (or any other vendor), that are developed in the
NWDI can be modified safely. SPs can be imported later, without losing the modifications: Merging of older and newer file versions has to be done manually, but is supported in the Developer Studio.
• This is based on the automatic conflict detection mechanisms of the DTR. Pure Source Control
![Page 204: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-204
• It is possible to store any type of file in the DTR – this also includes (non-DC) project files created in the Developer Studio.
![Page 205: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-205
© SAP AG 2007
NetWeaver Development Environments Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Lesson 1: ABAP Development Workbench
Lesson 2: NetWeaver Development Infrastructure
Lesson 3: Enterprise Portal
Lesson 4: Exchange Infrastructure
Lesson 5: Software Deployment Manager
![Page 206: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-206
© SAP AG 2007
Visible Portal Objects
iView
Page
DetailedNavigation
Top-levelNavigation
iView
Folders can contain documents, other items, and other folders. In an iView in the portal, you can navigate through portal structures and access the items they contain.
iViews are logical portal content building blocks, representing a visual application. Pages hold iViews and other pages containing iViews, organized in a layout. Roles are the largest semantic content object. A role is a folder hierarchy comprising other
content objects (worksets, pages, iViews). Worksets represent generic, re-usable structures or modules that can be added to roles. Portal Content Directory is the central persistence for all portal objects. This includes, for
example, storage of the metadata for the content objects (roles, worksets, etc.) and the relationship between the objects.
![Page 207: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-207
© SAP AG 2007
Role
workset 3
iView 1iView 2
workset 1 workset 2
workset 2.1 workset 2.2
iView 1iView 2iView 3
iView 1iView 2
iView 1iView 2
Portal Content Directory (PCD) Objects
The Enterprise Portal provides a role-based user interface
Page 1 Page 2
Role:One or more page(s) may contain relevant content for each role.
Worksets:Within each page, worksets group related tasks and content. Worksets are not visible elements.
•Page:Each visible page contains visible iViews which provide access to applications, reports, services, and information. A page provides top-level and detailed navigation panels.
•iViews:A visible iView provides a specific piece of information within a page.
Navigation
The business package is structured as follows: • For each role, one or more business packages are provided with the required content. • Each business package contains the content needed to complete the various tasks a person
with that role typically has to complete. These collections of task-oriented content are called “worksets.”
• Each workset consists of those iViews required to complete the tasks in that workset. iViews are the smallest content units. They contain the actual resources needed to complete the tasks that make up each workset.
The following PCD Objects may need to be maintained by means of SAP or other vendors‘ shipments, for example, a Business Package shipped in iViewStudio: • Folders (and their content) • iViews • Pages • Worksets • Roles
The Enterprise Portal Import / Export iView is used to transport the PCD objects. Local changes to the current object version will be overwritten by the import of the associated
EPA file.
![Page 208: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-208
The file type for exports / imports of PCD Objects is EPA (Enterprise Portal Archive) Any PCD Object (including „folders“ and their content) can be exported from one Enterprise
Portal System and imported into another one. The EPA file may also contain *.PAR files, if the PCD objects being exported have been
created based on their components. If PCD Objects are delivered as part of Business Packages, updates can be imported from
iViewStudio.
![Page 209: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-209
© SAP AG 2007
Packaging Model – Packaging Portal Transport Archives
Scenario A: Import and Export EPA-Files including PAR-Files via Portal Import/Export ToolYou want to import and export portal content objects and includedepending par-files (like EP6.0 SP2).
Scenario B: Import and Export EPA-Files without PAR-Files via Portal Import Export ToolYou want import and export portal content objects only
You pack the portal content objects into one EPA archive. You export objects to an EPA archive with the portal export function. You import the objects with the portal import function.
Scenario C: Import and Export SCAs and SDAs via SDMYou want to store portal content objects in an archive together with PAR files. It should be possible to deploy this archive to the portal with the SDM.
You export the portal content objects to an EPA archive in portal administration. PAR archives are created in the development environment. To combine the two archive formats into one archive, they must be converted to other formats.
It is important to use either the PAR-in-EPA or the PAR-in-EAR mechanism - if you use the latter approach, especially, you have to avoid that PARs are included into EPAs during export. This can cause inconsistent transports, because the PAR may depend on other parts of the EAR file (e.g. logging configuration) that is not included in the EPA file. • When you perform an export in portal administration, individual portal content objects are
packed in an archive in EPA format. In the past, EP 6.0 SP2, PAR files were also contained in EPA archives. However, in EP 6.0 on 6.40, there are two options on how to configure the content of export packages:
• Option 1: Include par-files in an export package (as in EP 6.0 SP2) • Option 2: Exclude par-files form an EPA archive.
- There are no longer PAR archives in an EPA archive. When you pack transport archives, portal applications (executable Java code packed into PAR archives) are strictly separated from portal content objects (roles, worksets or pages, packed in EPA archives) during the export.
- Portal applications are handled as part of the Java Enterprise applications and are packed into PAR archives in the development environment. PAR archives can be contained in archives with EAR format (Enterprise Archive) as modules. Different J2EE applications can be combined in EAR archives, for example PAR applications and
![Page 210: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-210
Web Dynpro applications. You can pack portal content objects into an archive together with PAR files and other J2EE applications.
- This type of archive can be deployed to the portal with the SAP Software Deployment Manager. To pack EPA and PAR archives into an archive, they must first be converted to other formats (SDA and SCA). Command line tools are provided for this purpose.
![Page 211: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-211
© SAP AG 2007
PCD Objects – The Export Function
Using the property Pcd.TransportApplication.ProtectedNamespacesin the file global/config/pcd/pcdStartup.template.propertiesnamespaces can be generally excluded from exportation.
This tool is used to export any type of PCD Object except for “Themes”.
In addition, while exporting a transport package, you can decide to export only name spaces of your choice.
A Transport Package can be created using the Export iView. Almost all types of PCD objects can be added to the Transport Package to be then exported.
The only PCD Object type for which a dedicated export function must be used is the Theme.
![Page 212: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-212
© SAP AG 2007
PCD Objects – The Import Tool
The Enterprise Portal Import iView is used to upload the new PCD objects (except by „Themes“).
If the EPA file contains any PAR files, they will be uploaded correctly onto the portal as well. No additional PAR upload is necessary.
Using the property Pcd.TransportApplication.ProtectedNamespaces in the file global/config/pcd/pcdStartup.template.properties namespaces can be excluded from importation.
![Page 213: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-213
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Enterprise Portal File Types
SAP NetWeaver Packaging Model
EPT PAR WDA
EAREAP
DevelopmentComponent
DevelopmentComponent
DevelopmentComponent
Represents a
Represents a
Software entity with own life cycle
Single deployable archive
Runtime-internal sub-archives
…
SCA
SDA
SCA – Software Component ArchiveSDA – Software Deployment Archive
EPA – Enterprise Portal ArchiveEPT – Enterprise Portal Transport
PAR – Portal ArchiveEAR – Enterprise Application Archive
WDA – Web Dynpro Application
SDA: Software Deployment Archive (The smallest unit that patches can be created and delivered for) • The delivery format for SAP applications in program languages other than ABAP.
SCA: Software Component Archive • The physical representation of a version of a software component, which contains a
specific number of SDAs. EAR: • A special case in the J2EE context, mostly contains J2EE specific XML files and satisfies
the requirements of J2EE. • SDM will not rename EAR during the deployment.
![Page 214: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-214
© SAP AG 2007
NetWeaver Development Environments Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Lesson 1: ABAP Development Workbench
Lesson 2: NetWeaver Development Infrastructure
Lesson 3: Enterprise Portal
Lesson 4: Exchange Infrastructure
Lesson 5: Software Deployment Manager
![Page 215: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-215
© SAP AG 2007
Execution of Collaborative Business Processes
Shared Collaboration Knowledge
Integration Builder
IntegrationDirectory
(ID)
IntegrationRepository
(IR)
IntegrationServer
(IS)
System Landscape Directory (SLD)
Central Monitoring
SAPSystems
3rd PartySystems
3rd PartyMiddlewareComponent
Marketplace/BusinessPartner
PI Component Overview
SAP PI consists of the following components: Design Time / Configuration Time • The Integration Builder: A client-server framework for accessing and editing two stores of
Shared Collaboration Knowledge: - The Integration Repository: For the design and development of Interface, Process, and
Mapping objects that are used to implement Integration Scenarios. - The Integration Directory: For configuring scenarios from the Integration Repository in
the concrete customer landscape. - By separating design time activities from configuration time activities, SAP can ship
content for the Integration Repository, which each customer can implement for their specific landscape in the Integration Directory. As far as possible, the goal is to reduce the problem of developing interfaces to the simpler task of configuring interfaces.
Runtime • The Integration Server: The central processing engine of the PI. All messages, whether
SAP or non-SAP, A2A or B2B, regardless of backend technology or vendor, are processed in a consistent way.
• Central Monitoring: To give a comprehensive and focused view of all components and processes at runtime.
![Page 216: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-216
SLD • The System Landscape Directory: a central repository of information about your system
landscape and software components. This data is required during design- and runtime.
![Page 217: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-217
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Web AS≥ 6.20
Integration Builder – Design Time
Integration Repository
System Landscape Directory
Software ComponentSoftware Component Version
J2EE/ABAP
ProxiesMessage Interfaces
Message Types
Integration Builder
Interface Editor
Data Types
Business Processes
Mappings
Business Scenarios
Context Objects
Scenario Editor
Process Editor
Mapping Editor
Condition Editor
BPEL
XSLTJava
XPath
WSDL
XSD
The development of a collaborative process begins with its design. In the Integration Repository, we can define the messages and interface for an integration scenario separately for the outbound and inbound components. Mapping programs are then created to transform messages as they are processed. These objects are stored in the Integration Repository and are associated with software component versions that belong to a product to be shipped.
Message Interfaces describe which data can be transferred by a message. Data Types are predefined data structures; Message Types are for example IDOC’s. Mappings describe the relationship between inbound and outbound interfaces.
Messages can be transferred to ABAP systems via Proxies. If the proxy has to be adjusted this requires changes in the ABAP stack which are transported by ABAP transport requests.
![Page 218: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-218
© SAP AG 2007
DB
UI Client
Server
IntegrationDirectory
IntegrationRepository
Integration Builder Server Framework
Integration Builder – Generic Functions
Query Service & Cross ReferencesImport/Export & CMS interfaceInternationalizationChange list ManagementVersioningLockingAuthorization & Authentication
Integration Builder Client Framework
Layout Building BlocksPersonalizationNavigation
The Integration Builder Server Framework provides software logistics features like Locking, Versioning and Change List Management.
It provides an Import/Export interface as well as an interface to CMS of the NWDI. Changes are saved in user-specific change lists. To make these changes visible for all users of
a repository, the developer must activate the entire change list.
![Page 219: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-219
© SAP AG 2007
Integration Builder – Configuration Time
Integration Directory
Collaboration ProfilesParties & Services
Channels
Integration Builder
Business Processes
Routing Rules
Scenarios
Collaboration Agreements
Receiver Determination Rules
Interface Determination Rules(including Mapping Assignment)
Security
Configuration Editors
Configuration Wizards
The Integration Directory is used to configure the sender-receiver relationships which will be used at runtime for specific systems. The configuration data is structured, organized, and saved in the Integration Directory in the form of configuration objects.
The following objects are managed in the Integration Directory: • Routing Rules describe how to find the receiver system and interface if a message of a
certain type comes from a certain sender system and interface. • Collaboration Agreements describe details on the data exchange between a receiver and
sender interface, e.g. if handshake is used. • Collaboration Profiles describe in which way data is exchanged between a sender and
receiver interface, e.g. files can be copied into a certain directory in the receiver system or they can be sent to an ftp-server
The Collaboration Agreements and Communication Profiles can be transported, but since configuration data may differ in the source and target environments, special elements like passwords and adapter meta data cannot be exported. Therefore, you have to recreate the information in the target environment manually.
![Page 220: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-220
© SAP AG 2007
Transport of PI Objects via Export/Import
Integration Repository Objects:Integration ScenarioActionIntegration ProcessMessage InterfaceMessage TypeFault Message TypeData TypeData Type EnhancementExternal DefinitionContext ObjectInterface MappingMessage MappingMapping TemplateImported ArchiveAdapter MetadataCommunication Channel TemplateFunction ModuleABAP Dictionary TypeIDocIDoc Message TypeIDoc TypeIDoc SegmentIDoc Extension
All objects of the Integration Repository (Business Scenarios, Interfaces and Mappings) can be transported.
The Integration Builder provides an Import/Export interface as well as an interface to CMS of the NWDI.
![Page 221: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-221
© SAP AG 2007
Import of PI Objects
Copy the .tpz file to the target PI server in the following folder:
…\usr\sap\<SID>\SYS\global\xi\repository_server\import
Launch the wizard for importing design objects and finish the steps.
The imported file will be moved to the following folder:
…\usr\sap\<SID>\SYS\global\xi\repository_server\import\importedFiles
After exporting, we can locate the file in the following folder on the source PI server:…\usr\sap\<SID>\SYS\global\xi\r
epository_server\export
![Page 222: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-222
© SAP AG 2007
Transport of PI objects via NWDI (CMS)
SAP NetWeaverCM
S
PI-Track YDirectory
SC X (Definition)
PI-Track XRepository
SLD
Names (reserv.)
DTRCBS TransportS
tudio
LandscapeC
onfigurator
Change Management Service
SAP NetWeaverUsage Type PIRepository• SC version
• Data Types• Message T.• ...
• SC version
Directory• Business Scenario• Party• Services• …
SAP NetWeaverUsage Type PIRepository• SC version
• Data Types• Message T.• ...
• SC version
Directory• Business Scenario• Party• Services• …
SAP NetWeaverUsage Type PIRepository• SC version
• Data Types• Message T.• ...
• SC version
Directory• Business Scenario• Party• Services• …
With NWDI used PI systems are set
in tracks
With NWDI PI, transports can be managed centrally in these tracks
Consolidate Productive
In the NWDI PI-tracks are defined for PI Repository and Directory content. In these PI-tracks the URLs of the used PI-Systems for Dev/ Cons/ Prod and SC versions to be
developed are set. All transports can be managed centrally using the CMS Transport Studio. • Note, that the synchronization of transports for 2 tracks is a manual task.
However, with the central approach using the CMS transport this has become significantly easier.
![Page 223: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-223
© SAP AG 2007
PI uses SLD:
As a server for business system names
Management of software component versions
Transport targets for directory content transports
End-to-end monitoring of Runtime Workbench
The SLD content is the prerequisite for the PI transportation. An error message will occur, if the imported Integration Repository or Integration Directory objects cannot find related entities from the SLD
There are two main areas of content in the SLD: the software catalog and the system catalog • The software catalog describes the installed products and their constituent components.
The software catalog is delivered with content about all SAP products. Customers and partners can extend this catalog with information about software from other vendors.
• The system catalog describes the systems in the data center from two perspectives: a logical view (business systems) and a physical view (technical systems). In other words, the system catalog describes the concrete implementation of the customer landscape.
Information from the software catalog is used in the IR to organize development efforts. Information from the system catalog is used in the ID to drive the specific configuration of Integration Scenarios.
![Page 224: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-224
© SAP AG 2007
Activity Sequence when transporting PI objects
Maintain the groups and transport targets in the System Landscape DirectoryExport the Integration RepositoryExport the Integration DirectoryExport and import the System Landscape Directory (only in the case of multiple SLDs)Copy the exports from the source host directory to the target hostImport the Integration RepositoryImport the Integration DirectoryRework data in the Integration Directory (end points and logon data)Activate distribution in Directory
Before development begins, a software component version must be available in the System Landscape Directory and assigned to a product version. This is normally carried out by a development manager.
When development begins, the development manager or project manager imports the software component version from the System Landscape Directory into the Integration Repository and defines the namespaces for development. Furthermore, for each imported software component version he or she can define a system from which RFCs or IDocs can be imported.
With the namespaces now available, development can begin with the design of the business processes in the repository. Changes are saved in user-specific change lists. To make these changes visible for all users of a repository, the developer must activate the entire change list.
To ship the objects in the repository, you must export them in a file. You may want to export the objects so as to import them into a test system, for example.
When developing a new version of the product, you normally increase the version number of the software component and the product from step one. By using release transfer, you can transfer objects from other software component versions into the new software component version.
![Page 225: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-225
© SAP AG 2007
NetWeaver Development Environments Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Lesson 1: ABAP Development Workbench
Lesson 2: NetWeaver Development Infrastructure
Lesson 3: Enterprise Portal
Lesson 4: Exchange Infrastructure
Lesson 5: Software Deployment Manager
![Page 226: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-226
© SAP AG 2007
Software Deployment Manager – Features
Software Deployment Manager (SDM) is used to deploy Java patches, hotfixes or business packages.
Provides the ability to track changes or code updates to softwarecomponents on the J2EE Engine.If needed the SDM controls the restart of the satellite systemduring the deployment process.Deployment in filesystems and databases is managed.Undeployment of a software component with dependencies.Calculation of dependencies between archives.Version control of archives. No overwriting of newer versions.
![Page 227: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-227
© SAP AG 2007
SDM Repository
The SDM Repository contains the registered Software Component Archives (SCAs) and Software Deployment Archives (SDAs).
Select a component to see its detail information (version, vendor, dependences).
![Page 228: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-228
© SAP AG 2007
Deployment of new Archives
The SDM Interface appears.
1) Click on the Deployment tab
You use the Deployment tab to deploy new software packages with the Software Deployment Manager (SDM). The SDM takes you through the individual steps, from selecting the Software Component Archive (SCA) and the Software Deployment Archive (SDA), to actually deploying the software in the target directory.
![Page 229: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-229
© SAP AG 2007
Undeployment
You can use the undeployment function to remove installed applications from the J2EE Engine.
Only components which have no dependency to other components can be undeployed.
![Page 230: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-230
© SAP AG 2007
Dependency Graph
In the SDM repository, right-click the component and choose “Show Dependency Graph”.
![Page 231: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-231
© SAP AG 2007
Log Viewer
You use the Log Viewer tab to display the log for the SDM work steps. You can display the work steps of the server and the graphical user interface (GUI)
![Page 232: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-232
© SAP AG 2007
NetWeaver Development Environments: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Describe the different development environmentsintegrated in SAP NetWeaver
ABAP Development Workbench
NetWeaver Development Infrastructure and itscomponents
Enterprise Portal Content Administrator
Exchange Infrastructure Integration Builder
Explain the functions of the Software DeploymentManager
![Page 233: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-233
![Page 234: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-234
Exercises
Unit: Netweaver Development Environments
In this exercise, you can check if you know the different Netweaver Development Environments and their basic concepts
This exercise consists of questions and answers.
4-1 Which of the following components is not part of NWDI but required by NWDI?
Please choose the correct answer.
Change Management Service (CMS)
System Landscape Direcory (SLD)
Design Time Repository (DTR)
Component Build Service (CBS)
![Page 235: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-235
4-2 Which of the following statements are correct with regard to Netweaver Development Environments? More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
The SAP NetWeaver Development Infrastructure (NWDI) supports the Java software development throughout the whole software lifecycle
The ABAP Development Workbench provides access to development tools, which does not cover the entire software development cycle
The name services of the NWDI is part of the Change Management Service (CMS)
The ABAP Development Workbench provides version management for repository objects
4-3 PI/XI uses the System Landscape Directory (SLD) as …?
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
As a server for business system names
Adapter framework for 3rd party products
Management of software component versions
Version and change list management
![Page 236: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-236
Solutions
Unit: Netweaver Development Environments
4-1 Which following component is not part of NWDI but required by NWDI?
Please choose the correct answer.
O Change Management Service (CMS)
X System Landscape Direcory (SLD)
O Design Time Repository (DTR)
O Component Build Service (CBS)
4-2 Which of the following statements are correct with regard to Netweaver
Development Environments? More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
X O The SAP NetWeaver Development Infrastructure (NWDI) supports the Java software development throughout the whole software lifecycle
O X The ABAP Development Workbench provides access to development tools, which does not cover the entire software development cycle
O X The name services of the NWDI is part of the Change Management Service (CMS)
X O The ABAP Development Workbench provides version management for repository objects
![Page 237: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-237
![Page 238: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 4-238
4-3 PI/XI uses the System Landscape Directory (SLD) as …? More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
X O As a server for business system names
O X Adapter framework for 3rd party products
X O Management of software component versions
O X Version and change list management
![Page 239: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-239
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
NetWeaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
Enhanced Change and Transport System
![Page 240: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-240
© SAP AG 2007
Contents:
Transport of non-ABAP Objects
Configuration
Process Flow
Tracking of Changes
Benefits of Change Request Management
Enhanced Change and Transport System
![Page 241: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-241
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System: Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
Explain the concept of transporting Non-ABAPobjects with the Enhanced Change and Transport System
Track changes in JAVA systems
Know how Change Request Management supportschanges of non-ABAP objects
![Page 242: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-242
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System Unit Overview Diagram
Enhanced Change and Transport System
Lesson 1: Transport of Non-ABAP Objects
Lesson 2: Configuration
Lesson 3: Process Flow
Lesson 4: Tracking of Changes
Lesson 5: Benefits of Change Request Management
![Page 243: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-243
© SAP AG 2007
Motivation to Extend the Change and Transport System
Change and Transport System (CTS) and NetWeaverDevelopment Infrastructure provide powerful functions to control transports in ABAP and JAVA.
What was missing?Synchronized import into double stack systemsA solution for the transport of Portal contentA central administration interface for all types of transports and systemsTracking and management of Non-ABAP objects with Change Request Management
The open issues are addressed with the Enhanced Change and Transport System
![Page 244: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-244
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System (CTS+)
Connect Java Systems to standard CTSNon-ABAP applications inherit all properties of the ABAP Change and Transport System in terms of documentation, tracking and troubleshooting featuresManages transport of ABAP and non-ABAP-objects centrallyAllows combined transports for mixed objects (ABAP, JAVA, …)Allows synchronized changes to business processes whichrun in ABAP and JAVA100% Compatible with SAP Solution ManagerNo need to upgrade of Java landscapes
![Page 245: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-245
© SAP AG 2007
Change and Transport System
Developer Studio
andNWDI
Exchange Infrastructure
Integration Builder
ABAP Workbench
SE80 DevelopmentLandscape
QualityLandscape
ProductionLandscape
QualityComponent n
QualityComponent 1
ProductionComponent n
ProductionComponent 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
check in
Transport Transport
Deploy Deploy
SCA
Enterprise Portal
Content Administrator
EPA
Manage Heterogeneous Development Environments
…(open Interface for
non-ABAP objects)
The Enhanced Change and Transport System (CTS+) improves the well proven ABAP Change and Transport System.
It allows changes from heterogeneous development environments to be transported with the well proven ABAP Change and Transport System.
Java Archives can be checked in to transport requests as transportable objects on the target system, after Import Methods are executed to deploy the Java archives via the Software Deployment Manager.
![Page 246: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-246
© SAP AG 2007
Supported Solutions and Deployment Options
Transport of:Enterprise Portal objects (EPA, PAR)Objects from NWDI (SCAs,…)Objects from XIInterface for Non-SAP applications
Deployment Options: SDMXIFS
Transport of: • ABAP transport objects • Enterprise Portal objects (EPA, PAR) • Objects from NWDI (SCAs,…) • Objects from XI • Interface for Non-SAP applications
Will be developed further (e.g. integration with Maintenance Optimizer) Other applications can be supported if they provide deployment procedures. Currently there are deployment services for: • SDM, XI, FS (filesystem)
![Page 247: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-247
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System Unit Overview Diagram
Enhanced Change and Transport System
Lesson 1: Transport of Non-ABAP Objects
Lesson 2: Configuration
Lesson 3: Process Flow
Lesson 4: Tracking of Changes
Lesson 5: Benefits of Change Request Management
![Page 248: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-248
© SAP AG 2007
Transporting Non-ABAP Changes
Legend
logical transport route of non-ABAP objects
physical transport route of non-ABAP objects
check-in/check-out of non-ABAP objects
transport route of ABAP objects
ABAP Transport Controller
Non-ABAP
Virtual QAS Virtual PRD
Java DEV Java PRDJava QAS
SAP NetWeaver Application Server CTS+
Non-ABAPNon-ABAP
New System Type:
Virtual Non-ABAP System
Transport parameter
contain deploy options
A Java transport landscape is represented by an ABAP transport landscape. The transport controller must be a physical ABAP system (at least NW04s, SPS12), in which
the transport routes are configured. Transport Requests are created on the transport controller. The Java Development Environment checks in Java Archives into the transport request. Then, the transport request is imported into the virtual non-ABAP systems. In the After-
Import Method, the Java Archives are deployed via Software Deployment Manager
![Page 249: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-249
© SAP AG 2007
Java Stack: Example EP (or XI Java Stack)
EPDev. System
EPQA System
EPProd. System
CTS+TransportController
ABAP
Java
Java Java Java
CTS+
DeployService
DevEnv DevEnv DevEnv
NW04s = SPS12
Upload of Archive
NW04s < SPS12 NW04s < SPS12 NW04s < SPS12
Virtual QAS Virtual PRDImport Import
1
2
3
4Deploy in EP QA System via SDM
TP calls Deploy Service
The Transport Organizer (SE09) of a CTS+ Transport Controller is used to manage the transport requests for the Java stack of the Java system
Own transport route and separate transport requests for the Java stack are required Solution Manager and ChaRM can be used to synchronize ABAP- and Java stacks’ transport
requests. CTS+ Server controls the imports into the Java stack of the Java system
![Page 250: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-250
© SAP AG 2007
Double Stack Installation: Example XI
XISource System
ABAP stack
Java stack
XITarget System
ABAP stack
Java stack
Transport Route
Transport Request
ABAP Objects
Java Objects
XIDev. System
XIQA System
XIProd. System
ABAP
Java
ABAP
Java
ABAP
Java
CTS+
DeployService
CTS+
DeployService
CTS+
DeployServiceIB IB IB
NW04s = SPS12 NW04s = SPS12 NW04s = SPS12
Transport Transport
Changes to ABAP objects are recorded automatically by CTS Changes to XI repository and XI directory objects have to be checked in into a CTS transport
request manually One transport request may contain the changed ABAP objects and the changed XI repository
and dictionary objects. Import of the XI repository and directory objects into the Java stack of the XI system is
controlled by the transport control program tp Technically, the import into the Java stack is one additional import step which starts the XI
import client via the CFS deploy web service Imports can be scheduled and monitored by TMS
![Page 251: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-251
© SAP AG 2007
STMS Configuration in the Transport Controller
In this example, the transport controller is B7T. An XI landscape and a Portal landscape are connected to the transport controller.
![Page 252: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-252
© SAP AG 2007
Transport Parameters for the Virtual Non-ABAPSystems
EP System XI System
EPQ is a virtual, non-ABAP system which represents an Enterprise Portal QA system. The transport parameters for deployment are: • DEPLOY_DATA_SHARE \\trans70.wdf.sap.corp\trans70\OTO\data • DEPLOY_OUTBOX /tmp/oto/out • DEPLOY_URL http://wdfd80077398a:53018 • DEPLOY_WEB_SERVICE CTSDEPLOY
XIQ is a virtual non-ABAP system which represents an XI QA system. The transport
parameters for deployment are: • DEPLOY_DATA_SHARE \\trans70.wdf.sap.corp\trans70\OTO\data • DEPLOY_WEB_SERVICE CTSDEPLOY • DEPLOY_XI_URL http://ldciu7s:52000/rep
![Page 253: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-253
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System Unit Overview Diagram
Enhanced Change and Transport System
Lesson 1: Transport of Non-ABAP Objects
Lesson 2: Configuration
Lesson 3: Process Flow
Lesson 4: Tracking of Changes
Lesson 5: Benefits of Change Request Management
![Page 254: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-254
© SAP AG 2007
Web Service for Deployment
Web Service for Deployment
Web Interface to Transport Organizer
Assign archive to transport request
ABAP Transport Controller
Create Transport Request
Portal - DEV
Create content
Enhanced Change and Transport System -Process
Portal - QAS
Portal - PRD
Release Transport Request
Virtual QAS
Virtual PRD
Export Java Archive
Call Web Service (Close
Coupling)
Import
Import
Deploy
Deploy
Deploy
Deploy
The complete workflow of the Enhanced Change and Transport System is shown in this figure.
In the Close Coupling scenario the CTS Adapter Web Service is called from the Java Development Environment and the Java Archive is automatically transferred.
In the Loose Coupling scenario the CTS Adapter Web Service cannot be called from the Java Development Environment. In this scenario the Java Archive must be exported to the File System. Then the CTS Adapter Web Service is called and the Java Archive is searched and uploaded from the file system.
When a transport with a non-ABAP file is imported into the virtual QAS system then the non-ABAP file is transfered to a Web Service for Deployment. This Webservice then deploys the file to the right application.
In case of EP or NWDI the deployment tool is the Software Deployment Manager.
![Page 255: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-255
© SAP AG 2007
Create Transport Request
The first step is to create a transport request in the Transport Controller
![Page 256: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-256
© SAP AG 2007
Export Java Archive
At the same time, the content of the Java application is developed and exported into the file system.
In the „Close Coupling Scenario“ there is a button „Start Export“ which leads you directly to the CTS Adapter Web Service
![Page 257: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-257
© SAP AG 2007
Web Interface to the Transport Organizer
Assign Objects to Transport Requests and Release Request
In the CTS Adapter Web Service you can attach Non-ABAP objects to transport requests and release the transport request
![Page 258: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-258
© SAP AG 2007
Import Request in Virtual Non-ABAP System
Then, go to the import queue of the virtual non-ABAP system which represents the QA system.
Import the transport request. In the After-Import Method Execution, the Java Archive is deployed by the Software
Deployment Manager
![Page 259: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/259.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-259
© SAP AG 2007
ABAP Stack
Runtime
Java Stack
SystemRuntime
Build Env.
Workbench
Repository
ABAP Stack
Runtime
Java Stack
SystemRuntime
Build Env.
Workbench
Repository
ABAP Stack
Runtime
Java Stack
SystemRuntime
Build Env.
Workbench
Repository
ABAP Transport Landscape vs. CMS Track (NWDI)
PROD SystemQA System
TMS: 3-System-Landscape
DEV SystemConsolidation Delivery
Change Requests
Change Requests
CMS: Track„QA System“
CONS SystemPROD SystemTEST SystemDEV System
DevelopmentConfiguration
CONS System
Runtime System
DevelopmentConfigurationChange
RequestsSCASCA
assemblyRuntime System
Runtime SystemRuntime System
ABAP SystemABAP SystemABAP System
SAP NetWeaver - ProductionSAP NetWeaver – Quality AssuranceSAP NetWeaver - Development
The figure above compares the typical ABAP 3-System-Landscape from the Transport Management System (TMS) with the Java CMS Track Concept that allows 4 development stages.
In ABAP development there usually is one central development system (DEV) in that all the development takes place. When the development team has finished the development, the corresponding change request is released and can then be imported into the Quality Assurance System (QA). The changes are tested in the QA system. After a successful test, they can be approved and imported into the production system (PROD).
In Java development (scenario “Developing Components with the NWDI”) however there are four development stages within a track: development (DEV), consolidation (CONS), test (TEST) and production (PROD). Up to four runtime systems can be assigned to this track.
If you now consider the development SAP systems that have both the AS ABAP and the AS Java runtime environment, you may map the ABAP 3 system landscape to the Java 4 system landscape by combining the Java consolidation system and the Java test system to a “QA System” and map this system to the ABAP QA System. This can be done by either omit the test system completely in the CMS Track or by omitting the CONS runtime system and use the TEST runtime system instead.
The question whether the QA runtime system should be assigned to CONS or TEST cannot generally be answered. There are advantages and disadvantages for both variants:
![Page 260: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/260.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-260
• In you use the CONS runtime system then the deployment to the runtime system is started immediately after the build in CONS. This means that the integration of sources, build and deployment is performed as one “import“ task in CMS.
• If you use the TEST runtime system however (as indicated in the figure above), the assembled SCAs get deployed. In this case you are absolute sure that you test exactly this version you will later deliver to production.
![Page 261: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-261
© SAP AG 2007
ABAP Stack
Runtime
Java Stack
SystemRuntime
Build Env.
Workbench
Repository
ABAP Stack
Runtime
Java Stack
SAP NetWeaver – Quality Assurance
SystemRuntime
Build Env.
Workbench
Repository
ABAP Stack
Runtime
Java StackSAP NetWeaver - Development
SystemRuntime
Build Env.
Workbench
Repository
CMS: Track
PROD System
TMS: 3-System-Landscape
DEV System
Synchronization of ABAP and Java Transports
SCA
Change Requests
SCA
assembly
QA System PROD SystemChange Requests
SCA
deployment istriggered by tp
import
check-in to ABAP change request
CONS SystemCONS System
Runtime System
DevelopmentConfiguration
DEV System
DevelopmentConfiguration
Runtime System
ABAP System
Java RuntimeABAP System
ABAP System
Java Runtime
SAP NetWeaver - Production
The figure above compares the typical ABAP 3-System-Landscape from the Transport Management System (TMS) with the Java CMS Track Concept that allows 4 development stages.
In ABAP development there usually is one central development system (DEV) in that all the development takes place. When the development team has finished the development, the corresponding change request is released and can then be imported into the Quality Assurance System (QA). The changes are tested in the QA system. After a successful test, they can be approved and imported into the production system (PROD).
In Java development (scenario “Developing Components with the NWDI”) however there are four development stages within a track: development (DEV), consolidation (CONS), test (TEST) and production (PROD). Up to four runtime systems can be assigned to this track.
If you now consider the development SAP systems that have both the AS ABAP and the AS Java runtime environment, you may map the ABAP 3 system landscape to the Java 4 system landscape by combining the Java consolidation system and the Java test system to a “QA System” and map this system to the ABAP QA System. This can be done by either omit the test system completely in the CMS Track or by omitting the CONS runtime system and use the TEST runtime system instead.
The question whether the QA runtime system should be assigned to CONS or TEST cannot generally be answered. There are advantages and disadvantages for both variants:
![Page 262: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/262.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-262
• In you use the CONS runtime system then the deployment to the runtime system is started immediately after the build in CONS. This means that the integration of sources, build and deployment is performed as one “import“ task in CMS.
• If you use the TEST runtime system however (as indicated in the figure above), the assembled SCAs get deployed. In this case you are absolute sure that you test exactly this version you will later deliver to production.
![Page 263: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-263
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System Unit Overview Diagram
Enhanced Change and Transport System
Lesson 1: Transport of Non-ABAP Objects
Lesson 2: Configuration
Lesson 3: Process Flow
Lesson 4: Tracking of Changes
Lesson 5: Benefits of Change Request Management
![Page 264: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-264
© SAP AG 2007
Tracking of Changes
Use the Import History to find information on transports in Non-ABAP systems:
Object ListsTransport Logfiles
The Import History can be accessed from any system in theTransport Domain
![Page 265: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-265
© SAP AG 2007
Import History of Non-ABAP System
By using the ABAP Change and Transport System, Java applications inherit all properties of the ABAP CTS.
The Import History can be reached from transaction STMS: Overview Imports <SID> Goto Import History
Here, you can find the list of all transports which were imported into a system and the import timestamp.
From the import history, you can navigate through the object list and the transport logfiles
![Page 266: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-266
© SAP AG 2007
Navigate through the Object List
From the Import History you can navigate through the object list. By doubleclicking on the GUID of the Non-ABAP object you reach the Non-ABAP object
details. Here you can find the name of the archive. Further information will be developed, e.g. content of the Java Archive.
![Page 267: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-267
© SAP AG 2007
Navigate through the Transport Logfiles
From the Import History you can navigate through the transport logfiles. In the detailed logfile for the Deployment step, you can see if the deployment was successful. You can also see further information, like host and port of the SDM.
![Page 268: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-268
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System Unit Overview Diagram
Enhanced Change and Transport System
Lesson 1: Transport of Non-ABAP Objects
Lesson 2: Configuration
Lesson 3: Process Flow
Lesson 4: Tracking of Changes
Lesson 5: Benefits of Change Request Management
![Page 269: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-269
© SAP AG 2007
Different Levels of Control
Change Request Management
SAP Solution Manager
Enhanced Change and Transport System (CTS+)SAP System ABAP Stack
ABAP
BetterControl
BetterControl
ImprovedDocumentation
ImprovedDocumentation
Java .net …..
Change Request Management in SAP Solution Manager is 100% compliant with the Enhanced Change and Transport System.
On the lowest level, transports are executed with proprietary Java tools. These Java tools can be controlled by the Enhanced ABAP Change and Transport System
(CTS+). This allows better control of transports. Furthermore, the documentation, tracking and troubleshooting possibilities are improved.
On the next level of control, transports in the ABAP Stack can be managed by Change Request Management in SAP Solution Manager. This increases the control of the full change process, including the incident, approval process and change realization process.
![Page 270: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-270
© SAP AG 2007
TransportLandscapeCRM
TransportLandscapeEP
TransportLandscapeBW
TransportLandscapeERP
TransportLandscapePI
Development Landscape QALandscape
ProductionLandscape
DevelopmentEnvironment
SE80DS & DI
Portal ContentAdministrator
System
mySAP ERP
mySAP CRM
System
mySAP ERP
mySAP CRM
EnterprisePortal
System
mySAP ERP
mySAP CRM
EnterprisePortal
BW
EnterprisePortal
BW BW
ProcessIntegration
(XI)
ProcessIntegration
(XI)
ProcessIntegration
(XI)
DS & DI
SE80
SE80Integration
Builder
SE80DS & DI
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management
Change Request Management in a Mixed ABAP/JAVA Landscape
Change Request Management can handle dependent transports in different systems. In this example, the Solution Manager Project comprises several SAP systems. The systems
have dependent transports. All transports for the whole solution are bundled under the umbrella of the Solution Manager project. When the project goes live all transport requests that belong to the same Solution Manager project are imported at the same time. So all dependencies are considered automatically.
![Page 271: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-271
© SAP AG 2007
Enhanced Change and Transport System: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Explain the concept of transporting Non-ABAPobjects with the Enhanced Change and Transport System
Track changes in JAVA systems
Know how Change Request Management supportschanges of Non-ABAP objects
![Page 272: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-272
Exercises
Unit: Enhanced Change and Transport System
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Transport Java Archives via CTS+ • Control the success of the imports
The ABAP stack of the SAP Solution Manager TT4 is configured as CTS+ Transport Controller. Enterprise Portal content will be imported into the Java stack of system TT5.
5-1 Create a transport request on TT4 for an Enterprise Portal Archive (EPA) and import it into the Enterprise Portal on TT5.
5-1-1 Logon to the Enterprise Portal on system TT5. What is the URL to logon? Answer: ____________________________________________________ 5-1-2 In the tab Content Administration open the folder Portal Content. Goto
Browse the Portal Catalog and check if there is an entry for “com.sap.OTO_Training” with a user specific iview under Portal Content.
Answer: ____________________________________________________ 5-1-3 Logon to the system TT4. Create a transport request of type Workbench.
Insert a Non ABAP object into the object list of the transport request. Select an Enterprise Portal Archive for your username out of the directory G:\SHARE\E2ECC\OTO. Release the transport request.
5-1-4 Import your transport request into the virtual Non ABAP system JAQ in transaction STMS.
5-1-5 Check in the transport log files if the import was successful. 5-1-6 Check in the object list for the name of the Java archive. 5-1-7 Check the transport route configuration. 5-1-8 Check the TP parameter settings for the Non ABAP system JAQ. What are
the values for: DEPLOY_URL :
_______________________________________________ DEPLOY_WEB_SERVICE:
______________________________________
![Page 273: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-273
5-1-9 Logon to the Enterprise Portal on system TT5. In the tab Content Administration open the folder Portal Content. Goto Browse the Portal Catalog and check if there is an entry for “com.sap.OTO_Training” with a user specific iview under Portal Content.
![Page 274: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-274
Solutions
Unit: Enhanced Change and Transport System
5-1 Create a transport request on TT4 for an Enterprise Portal Archive (EPA) and
import it into the Enterprise Portal on TT5. 5-1-1 Logon to the Enterprise Portal on system TT5. What is the URL to logon? Answer: The URL is http://<hostname>:55000/irj. The username and
password will be provided by the trainer. 5-1-2 In the tab Content Administration open the folder Portal Content. Goto
Browse the Portal Catalog and check if there is an entry for “com.sap.OTO_Training” with a user specific iview under Portal Content.
Answer: At the beginning of the exercise this Portal Content object should not be available.
5-1-3 Logon to the system TT4. Create a transport request of type Workbench. Insert a Non ABAP object into the object list of the transport request. Select an Enterprise Portal Archive for your username out of the directory G:\SHARE\E2ECC\OTO. Release the transport request.
Logon to TT4 and start transaction SE09. Create a new workbench request with the Create button. Insert a short description for your transport request and save. Position the curser on the modifiable request and press the button Include Objects in the toolbar ( ). Choose now Non ABAP Objects and insert the directory G:\SHARE\E2ECC\OTO.. Assign the epa file “com.sap.OTO_Training_UserXX_20070314_103400.epa” relying to your userid. Set the attributes EP Enterprise Portal and SDM. To finish
this activity release the transport request with the release button. ( )
![Page 275: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-275
5-1-4 Import your transport request into the virtual Non ABAP system JAQ in
transaction STMS. In TT4, start the transaction STMS and go to Transport Overview. Double
click on the JAQ system and press the refresh button. Select your transport and import it with the Import Request button ( ).
5-1-5 Check in the transport log files if the import was successful.
Select your transport and click on the Logs button ( ). There are logfiles for the import and the deployment. Click on the logfile for the deployment and read the content of the logfile.
5-1-6 Check in the object list for the name of the Java archive.
Select your transport and click on the Object List button ( ). Expand the list of Non ABAP objects and doubleclick on the GUID. You see the object that you have attached to the transport request.
5-1-7 Check the transport route configuration. In transaction STMS goto Overview Transport Routes. 5-1-8 Check the TP parameter settings for the Non ABAP system JAQ. What are
the values for DEPLOY_URL and DEPLOY_WEB_SERVICE? In transaction STMS goto Overview Systems. Double click on JAQ and
select the tab Transport Tool. DEPLOY_URL = http://<hostname>:<port> DEPLOY_WEB_SERVICE = CTSDEPLOY 5-1-9 Logon to the Enterprise Portal on system TT5. In the tab Content
Administration open the folder Portal Content. Goto Browse the Portal Catalog and check if there is an entry for “com.sap.OTO_Training” with a user specific iview under Portal Content.
Answer: At the end of the exercise this Portal Content object should be available.
![Page 276: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 5-276
![Page 277: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-277
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
NetWeaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
Transport Strategies
![Page 278: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-278
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Content:
System Landscapes
Client Strategies
Release Management
Transport Dependencies
Critical Objects
Transport Strategies: Unit Content
![Page 279: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-279
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
Understand the limitations of the 3 system landscape and the benefits of advanced transport topologies
Understand the different client roles
Describe pros and cons of parallel projects, synchronized releases and maintenance cycles
Know how to manage transport dependencies
Be aware of critical objects
![Page 280: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-280
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 4: Release Management
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Lesson 6: Critical Objects
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
![Page 281: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-281
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Three System Landscape
Standard Transport Process
Risk: Import Single Strategy
Risk: Inconsistencies in the Transport Landscape
Advanced Topologies
![Page 282: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-282
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Three-system-landscape
DEV
CR
CR
1
QASCR
PRDCR
CR
2 3
Buffers
A three-system-landscape consists of a development system DEV, a quality assurance system QAS and a productive system PRD.
The development system DEV is needed to implement changes. In the quality assurance system QAS performs functional tests and integration tests with
production-like data. This system is also needed to test the import of the change requests. Without a quality
assurance system, the import of transports cannot be tested before it is executed in production.
![Page 283: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-283
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Step 1: The Transport Request is Released
DEV
CR
CR
1
QASCR
PRDCR
CR
Buffers
Systems
Step 1:
The transport request CR is released. Development objects which are locked, are released and the change request CR is written to the import queue of the quality assurance system.
The import queue has two functions. The first one is that it contains all change requests that have been released, and the second is to remember the sequence, in which the change requests have been released.
![Page 284: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-284
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Step 2: The Transport Request is Imported into QAS
CR
QASCR
CR
2
DEVCR
PRDCR
Buffers
Systems
Step 2:
The complete import queue for the quality assurance system QAS is imported. System QAS is used for first tests with production-like data and, therefore, the import of the
complete transport buffer should be done in short time intervals, for example, every 15 minutes.
This can be scheduled automatically. The change requests that are imported are also written to the import queue of the productive
system PRD. This guarantees that the change requests and their import sequence to the quality assurance system QAS are remembered.
![Page 285: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-285
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Step 3: The Transports are Imported into Production
PRDCR
CR
3
DEVCR
QASCR
CR
Buffers
Systems
Step 3:
The import buffer of the productive system is imported into production.
![Page 286: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-286
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Three System Landscape
Standard Transport Process
Risk: Import Single Strategy
Risk: Inconsistencies in the Transport Landscape
Advanced Topologies
![Page 287: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-287
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Risk: Import Single Strategy
Problems:Transport requests are imported in an individual sequenceRisk of forgotten transportsRisk of version downgrades by overtakers
SolutionsImport project or mass import strategy
There are several risks in a three-system-landscape: The following slides explain these risks in more detail.
![Page 288: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-288
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Risk: Forgotten Transports
PROG ZREPORT …CALL ZMODULE…
•FUNC ZMODULE
DEVDEVK900001
QAS PRDDEVK900001
1
DEVK900002 DEVK900002
PROG ZREPORT …CALL ZMODULE…
2
Test of ZREPORT in QAS is o.k.
3
DEVK900002
Generation of ZREPORT will lead to error
PROG ZREPORT …CALL ZMODULE…
4
Transport request DEVK900002 contains a report ZREPORT which calls the function module ZMODULE in request DEVK900001.
In QAS DEVK900001 and DEVK900002 are tested together. The test is ok. But then only DEVK900002 is transported into PRD. It fails because DEVK900001 was
forgotten.
![Page 289: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-289
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Risk: Downgrading Object Versions
PROG ZREPORT …CALL ZMODULE…
•FUNC ZMODULE
DEVDEVK900001
QAS PRDDEVK900001
1
DEVK900002 DEVK900002
PROG ZREPORT …CALL ZMODULE…
2
Test of ZREPORT in QAS is o.k.
3
DEVK900002
PROG ZREPORT …CALL ZMODULE…
4
Old version of ZREPORT is active in PRD
PROG ZREPORT …CALL ZMODULE…
•FUNC ZMODULE
5
DEVK900001
Transport request DEVK900002 contains a report ZREPORT which calls the function module ZMODULE in request DEVK900001.
In QAS DEVK900001 and DEVK900002 are tested together. The test is ok. However, only DEVK900002 is transported into PRD. It fails because DEVK900001 was
forgotten. Now DEVK900001 is also imported into PRD. But the test in PRD fails again because now
the old version of ZREPORT (version of DEVK900001) has overwritten the newer version (version of DEVK900002).
![Page 290: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-290
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Project buffer Project buffer
Consistency of Project Cycles with Import Project
DEV QAS PRD
Legend:
Project transport requests
If there are more than five developers, the only way to avoid these kind of transport errors is to use the „import all“ or „import project“ method.
![Page 291: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-291
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Three System Landscape
Standard Transport Process
Risk: Import Single Strategy
Risk: Inconsistencies in the Transport Landscape
Advanced Topologies
![Page 292: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-292
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Systems
Inconsistencies in the Transport Landscape
DEV QAS PRD
Open Developments
Transports not yet in PRD
Inconsistencies between DEV, QAS and PRDOpen developments in DEV which have not yet been exportedTransports in QAS which have not yet been imported to PRD
Transport requests which are in transition, but have not been imported into production result in inconsistent systems. Therefore, programs can still work in QAS but might fail in PRD.
![Page 293: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-293
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Risk: Inconsistencies in the transport landscape
Reasons:Sequence violationsTransports which were not transported completelyTransports stay in the import buffer of QAS or PROD too longWrong initial system set upSeveral parallel projects with different project timelinesProjects and maintenance in parallel
Solutions:Appropriate transport strategyPre-Production System
There are several risks in a three-system-landscape: The following slides explain these risks in more detail.
![Page 294: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-294
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Systems
Detecting Version Inconsistencies during Bug-fixing
DEV PRDQAS
1) Error in production Object 1 must be maintained
Object 1 is different
Obj1
2) Object 1 is already changed in DEV and cannot be maintained
Objects which have been changed in a project that is currently in transition cannot be maintained anymore during bug-fixing.
![Page 295: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-295
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Systems
Version Compare for Fixes between DEV and PRD
DEV PRDQAS
Object 1 is different
Obj1-V2 Obj1-
V1
1) Comparing active DEV object version with active PRD object version
2) Evtl. intermediate switch DEV object version for fix
You can compare the object versions in DEV and PRD before a maintenance task. If the versions are different, then you have to temporarily switch back an old object version from the version history in the development system. This object version is corrected and transported to production. In the next step the correction is done again with the latest object version.
This procedure is not possible for BW objects, because they do not have a version history.
![Page 296: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-296
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Systems
Detecting Cross Reference Errors during Bug-fixing
DEV QAS PRD
1) Error in production Object 1 must be maintained
Obj1 Obj2-V2
2) Object 1 uses Object 2. Object 2 was changed by the project
Error in PRD
Obj1 Obj2-V1
4) Error in PRD because Object 2 is still in the old version
Obj1 Obj2-V2
3) Test in QAS is ok
Test in QAS is ok
In this example Object 1 was not changed by the project. But Obj1 uses Obj2, and Obj2 was changed. At the beginning Obj1 does still work.
Now Obj1 has to be corrected. The new version of Obj1 does still work with the new version of Obj2. However, the new version of Obj1 does not work with the old version of Obj2. This is only detected in PRD.
For example Obj1 could be a program that reads data from a table (Obj2). At the beginning, the program reads data from the first 3 columns of the table. Then, an additional column is added to the table. If the program now also reads data from the new column, this only works with the new version of the table. It will fail in PRD.
![Page 297: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-297
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
DEV QAS PRDPRE
Cross-Reference Inconsistencies and Pre-Production
Obj1-V2
Obj2-V2
Obj1-V2
Obj2-V2 Obj1-
V2Obj2-
V1
Obj1-V1
Obj2-V1
The Pre-Production System (PRE) has the current software/configuration state of production
The next urgent correction or project cycle can be isolated in PRE
Cross Reference Errors can be detected before they go into Production
The solution to cross-reference inconsistencies is a Pre-Production system. If the Pre-Production system has the current software / configuration state of production, the error can already be detected and fixed in Pre-Production.
![Page 298: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-298
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Problems in a Three System Landscape
Advanced Topologies
Pre-Development or Sandbox System
Pre-Production System
Phased System Landscape
Hotfix System
Template Rollout Landscape
![Page 299: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-299
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Pre-Development or Sandbox System
DEV QAS PRD
SBX Sandbox System
Early Prototyping without impacting the Development State
Takeover from Sandbox to Development must be done manually
Advantages: • Work in PRE without disturbing the maintenance landscape • No obsolete developments in DEV
Disadvantages: • Manual redo of development work in DEV is recommended • Transports might be possible if there are no conflicts with changes in DEV
Typical Scenario: • Playground system for developers • Long running projects can be kept out of the current transport landscape in the prototyping
phase Recommendation: • The system must be refreshed from time to time by the development system so that it stays
on a current software/configuration level
![Page 300: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-300
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
DEV QAS PRDPRE
Pre-Production System
The Pre-Production System (PRE) has the current software/configuration state of production plus the next coming change
The next urgent correction and project cycle can be isolated in PRE
Cross Reference Errors can be detected before they go into Production
Advantages: • Protection against syntax errors due to cross-reference related inconsistencies, when
moving ‘isolated changes’ to production • Separation between ongoing Unit Tests in QAS and Integration Tests in PRE. Often there
are frequent imports of all development tasks into QAS. This does not allow a proper integration test by the business department at the same time.
The Pre-Production System is strongly recommended in most cases. Only in the following cases, might a 3 system landscape be sufficient: • The number of changes is very low • Only maintenance is done, no new functionality is developed • This landscape allows to conduct parallel projects with different Go-Lives, e.g. rollout
projects.
![Page 301: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/301.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-301
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Pre-Production System in a Three System Landscape
DEV PRDPRE
Development and Unit Test takes place in the same system
The Pre-Production System (PRE) has the current software/configuration state of production plus the next coming change
The next urgent correction and project cycle can be isolated in PRE
Cross Reference Errors can be detected before they go into Production
If an additional system is too expensive, then we recommend simulating the unit test system in an additional client within the development system. This workaround provides you with a “logical” 4 system landscape.
In this landscape client dependant changes cannot be unit tested in a separate system. See the lesson “Client Strategies” for more details.
![Page 302: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/302.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-302
© SAP AG 2006
Phased System Landscape (Project and Maintenance)
Maintenance Landscape
QAS
Project Landscape
DEV TST
Cut-Over
Ret
rofit
PRDCON
Leading DevelopmentSystem (no copy)
Advantages: • Imcompatible new implementations or upgrades can be managed in parallel to maintenance • New software states ( Support Packages Stacks ) can be implemented without changing the
state of CON Disadvantages: • More Effort -> Retrofit from CON to DEV • Cut-Over requires code freeze in maintenance cycle • Cut-Over must be incorporated into maintenance cycle • Maintenance is difficult after the cut-over from TST to CON. An additional maintenance
system might be needed • More Systems
Recommendations: • Activate Version Management during Import/Deploy for CON (Transport parameter
VERS_AT_IMP = ALWAYS) • Activate customizing logging (transport parameter RECCLIENT = ALL, Profile parameter
rec/client=ALL) • Manage namespace conflicts for BI query development • All performed Retrofits must be incorporated into Cut-Over Release • Projects must be incorporated into the next maintenance cycle
![Page 303: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/303.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-303
Typical Scenarios: • The phased system landscape is most appropriate if only one major project, with a fixed Go-
Live date, is developed in the project landscape. The maintenance is then performed in the maintenance landscape.
![Page 304: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/304.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-304
© SAP AG 2006
Phased System Landscape II
Maintenance Landscape
QAS
Project Landscape
DEV TST
1) Cut-Over
Ret
rofit
PRD
REG
2) Sync CON and QAS
CON
Leading DevelopmentSystem (no copy)
Description of the procedure: • First, the new release is imported into the regression test system. • Then, the new release is imported into production. • Finally, the new release is imported into CON and QAS. • Advantages (compared with Dual Landscape): • Maintenance is still possible in CON and QAS during the regression test. • It is possible to run several parallel projects in the project landscape. Only the project which
goes live next is allowed to enter into REG. Disadvantages (compared with Dual Landscape): • A codefreeze in the maintenance landscape is recommended during the regression test phase • More Systems needed
Typical scenarios: • Synchronized releases (e.g. quarterly) or parallel projects in the project landscape • Minor maintenance cycles in the maintenances landscape (e.g. daily or weekly cycles) • Rollout scenarios (e.g. rollouts to different countries)
![Page 305: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/305.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-305
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Template Roll-out Landscape
Regional/Functional/Local/ 1
CON1 QAS1 PRD1
Central Development
DEV TST CON2 QAS2 PRD2
CON3 QAS3 PRD3
– Corporate Template Development
– Corporate Template Test
– Cut-Over Development
– Test & Verification
– Production
Cut
-ove
rC
ut-o
ver
Regional/Functional/Local/ 1
Regional/Functional/Local/ 1
Procedure • Corporate templates are developed in the corporate development landscape • The cut-over landscapes adjust the template to their local requirements and add additional
functionality • On the long term all cut-over landscapes are on a different software configurations • Advantages • Corporate functions can be developed and tested once centrally (harmonized business
processes) • Regional / functional / local requirements can flexibly be added in the cut-over landscapes • Corporate functions can be fast maintained in cut-over landscape and retrofitted into the
next corporate release • Go-Life dates of corporate releases can be managed individually by each cut-over
landscape Disadvantages • The rollout of a new template into the cut-over landscapes is challenging and risky as the
cut-over landscapes and the corporate development landscapes are inconsistent. Therefore this landscape is not recommended.
• Administrative effort to decide what is global what is local
![Page 306: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/306.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-306
• More complex system landscapes • Central maintenance takes a longer way to production • Recommondations • …
![Page 307: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/307.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-307
• … • Regional / functional / local developments should be encapsulated in separate namespaces • Regional / functional / local customizing should be restricted to certain number ranges • Global namespaces should be locked in the cut-over landscapes (SE06) • Global Customizing should be locked in the cut-over landscapes by using BC Sets • Typical Scenarios • Certain processes have to be implemented centrally. Other processes have to be
implemented only in single regions/locations/functional areas • Business processes need to be harmonized but there are still different requirements in
different regions/locations/functional areas
![Page 308: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/308.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-308
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 4: Release Management
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Lesson 6: Critical Objects
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
![Page 309: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/309.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-309
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Track for Development of a New Release
CONS
RuntimeSystem
DEV
RuntimeSystem
Test
PROD
DEV TEST
Approval
RuntimeSystem
Prod
Track: DEV
Since the Change Management Service (CMS) of the NWDI enables you to attach up to four runtime systems to a track - one for each state of the software - the following use of runtime systems has proven itself as most effective. • Runtime system 'Development': Immediate testing of the newest changes. The runtime
system in the development state is especially effective when it is combined with regular automated tests, for example an automated test that runs every night. In this way a lot of errors can be detected very early in the process. The overall quality of the software improves.
• Variant:If you think that local tests by the developers are sufficient for the overall quality of your software, it is possible to omit the runtime system from the development system. The first integration test system will then be the runtime system of the "Test" system.
• Runtime system 'Test': Testing of consolidated software state.This system offers a test environment for the software that mirrors the production environment.
• Runtime system 'Production': Deployment in the production system
![Page 310: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/310.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-310
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Tracks for the Maintenance of a Release
TEST
Track: DEV
CONSDEV
Development
PROD
Track: COR
TEST
Maintenance
DEVCONS
The maintenance of a release is supported by NWDI using a second track. A transport connection delivers changes from the development track to the maintenance track. A repair connection transports corrections made in the maintenance state back into the development track, thus avoiding double maintenance where possible.
After a software version has been deployed in the production system, you are confronted with the problem that you need to patch the production state, while at the same time you are developing new functionality in the development location. To avoid double maintenance of these corrections, they are transported automatically to the development location if a repair connection is configured between the tracks. The following procedure outlines the back transport process for the developers: • Release your transport. It shows up in the import queue of the previous track immediately. • Import the transport. • Check in the conflict view after the import into DEV, resolve the conflicts and activate the
change. • Release your transport if you had to resolve a conflict. This resolves the conflict in the
follow-on workspaces automatically. For a detailed description of the maintenance scenario, see the SAP NetWeaver library:
(http://help.sap.com -> ... -> Application Maintenance with the NWDI)
![Page 311: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/311.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-311
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 4: Release Management
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Lesson 6: Critical Objects
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
![Page 312: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/312.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-312
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Data Types in SAP Systems
Cross-client Customizing#
Customizing
# Appl.
data
Use
r
Customizing
# Appl.
data
Use
r
Modifications
CustomizingCustomizing
Customizing
Development
Customer Enhancements
SAP Repository
… .
The SAP system contains different types of data. Some data can only be accessed from one client, such as business application data
(documents, material master), and most customizing settings. Customizing is used to define a customer‘s organizational structure. The client-specific data is closely related. Application data is checked against the customizing
settings in the client, at input. If inconsistencies are found, the input is rejected. There are other settings, which are set once and are active for all clients. These client-
independent Customizing settings include, for example, printer settings. The repository is also client-independent. It contains all ABAP dictionary objects (tables, data
elements, domains) as well as all ABAP programs, menus, screens, and so on. Because they are client-independent, Repository objects developed in one client are identical
in all other clients in the same system.
![Page 313: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/313.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-313
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Different Client Roles in 4 System Landscape
Authorizations
Gold ClientFor refreshes
DEV Test (SCC1)
Client Dependant Changes
Client independent Changes
Quality Assurance
ProductionPre-Production
Client independant changes: • All workbench and client-independant cutsomizing changes are carried out in this
client. There is a delivery route from this client into the QAS system. • There is no need to import client independant changes into the other clients in the
development system. • Client dependant changes: • All client dependant customizing changes are carried in this client. It can be
separated from the development client for two reasons: - Faciliate the authorization concept: Separate developers and customizers in
different clients - Ability to setup client dependant transport routes from the customizing client
into the other clients of the development system. This is not needed for the development client.
DEV Test Client: • This client contains test data, and is regularly refreshed by the gold client.
Customizers are supposed to test their work in this client by SCC1 copies after they have performed a customizing change in the customizing client.
• Authorizations:
![Page 314: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/314.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-314
• This client is used for authorizations and user profiles. • Gold client: • This client contains test data and is used to refresh the DEV Test Client using
regular client copies.
![Page 315: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/315.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-315
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Different Client Roles in a Three System Landscape
Quality Assurance
Production
Gold ClientFor refreshes
Authorizations
Unit Test
DEV Test (SCC1)
Client Dependant Changes
Client Independent Changes
If a fourth system is too expensive, then we recommend that you simulate the unit test system in an additional client in the development system. This workaround provides you with a “logical” 4 system landscape.
The client specific transport routes go from the customizing client into the Unit Test client. Once the requests have been successfully unit tested, they are forwarded to the golden client and the QA system by delivery routes.
In this landscape client, dependant changes cannot be unit tested in a separate system.
![Page 316: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/316.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-316
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport StrategiesLesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 4: Release Management
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Lesson 6: Critical Objects
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
![Page 317: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/317.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-317
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Parallel Projects
Synchronized Releases
Maintenance Cycles
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
Lesson 4: Release Management
Change Calendar
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
![Page 318: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/318.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-318
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Project Release Management
Implementation CIC 2.0
Trade Promotion Management
Rollout CIC 1.1Go Live
01 / 2006 01 / 200710 / 200607 / 200604 / 2006
Projects are defined by their release cycles. Any change, related to a project, moves synchronously from development through test to production or delivery.
![Page 319: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/319.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-319
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Object Conflicts and Object Dependencies
Project 1
Project 2
DEV
Conflicts
Project 1
Project 2
DEV
Dependencies
There are two types of problems when working with parallel projects. • Object Conflicts:
- This means that the same objects are contained in different projects. The project which is imported last, overwrites the objects of the other project. Therefore, the project which was imported first might not work anymore after the import of project 2.
• Object Dependencies: - Objects in different projects use each other, for example, a program in project 1 calls an
object included in project 2. If only one of the projects is imported into another system, it will fail. This problem is called cross-reference inconsistency.
![Page 320: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/320.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-320
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Cross-System Object Lock: Architecture 4.0
Test System Production System
Locks are performed on LIMU level for Workbench objects and on key level for Customizing objects
Development System 1Client1
…
Development System 2Client1
…
SAP Solution Manager Cross-System Object
LockProjects
The Cross-System Lock is a feature of Change Request Management in SAP Solution Manager. It solves the problems caused when the same objects are part of different projects.
When a repository object or customizing entry is changed, a lock entry is written into a table in the Solution Manager. This lock is only removed at the point of import into production. When a second project tries to change the same object, an event is raised. Depending on the configuration, this event can be an error or only a warning.
The Cross-System Lock allows locking objects from the change up to the import into production.
Objects can be locked between projects, and urgent corrections within a maintenance project.
![Page 321: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/321.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-321
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Pre-Production System and Project Dependencies
DEV QAS PRDPRE
The Pre-Production System (PRE) has the current software/configuration state of production plus the next coming project
The next upcoming project cycle can be isolated in PRE
Cross Reference Errors can be detected and solved before they gointo Production
The solution for cross-referencing inconsistencies is a Pre-Production system. If the Pre-Production system has the current software / configuration state of production, the error can already be detected and fixed in Pre-Production.
![Page 322: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/322.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-322
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Parallel Projects – Best Practices
Projects in different areas can be done in parallel.
Projects in the same area should be done in sequence or handled as one project.
Good timing of projects from the beginning can reduce the effort.
Bundle several small projects into one.
Swap out long running projects into separate sandbox systems.
![Page 323: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/323.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-323
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Technical Realization: Usage of SAP IMG and CTS-Projects
Create IMG project
Activate CTS functionality
Assign Transport Requests to CTS project
SAP offers the use PROJECTS, to group comprehensive customizing and development activites.
With projects, you can define the customizing scope you want to cover. Please note that this is only important if you have several, simultaneous project activities. By activating a CTS project to work with your customizing project, you can link every change
request to a CTS project. The CTS project attribute of the change request lets you control the import of these changes into several target systems.
![Page 324: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/324.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-324
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Parallel Projects
Synchronized Releases
Maintenance Cycles
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
Lesson 4: Release Management
Change Calendar
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
![Page 325: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/325.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-325
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Synchronized Release Deliveries
CIC1
Synchronized Releases
01 / 200810 / 200707 / 200704 / 2007
CIC2.v1 CIC2.v2
TPM
TPM: Trade Promotion Management
CIC: Customer Interaction Center
There are fixed Go-Live dates for projects, for example, once per quarter. All projects can select one of the selected Go-Live dates. All projects that Go-Live together also go into the test phase together.
![Page 326: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/326.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-326
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Phase Control in cProjects and Change Request Management
Project cycleDevelopment phase(w/o or w/ release) Test phase
Go-live phase
Emergency correction phase
All Projects go together into the next project phase
Customer Interaction
Center
Test GoLiveTrade Promotion Mgt. Dev
SAP Solution Manager Project
cProject Programs Milestones
Each project cycle is controlled by it‘s phases. Projects that go-live together should also be tested together.
There should be a pre-production system, which all projects that are part of the next Go-Live can enter. All other projects have to stay in the development or unit test environment.
Project phases can be controlled by CTS status switches. They are set and controlled by the Change Request Management scenario. The project phases of several parallel projects can be synchronized, by using cProjects Program Management. Several Change Request Management projects are linked to one cProjects project.
![Page 327: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/327.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-327
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
cProjects Project View
cProjects is a powerful project management and planning tool with interfaces to various R/3 modules (e.g. CO, HCM, …)
Milestones can be defined in cProjects. These milestones can be linked to the phases in Change Request Management. Only if certain milestones are approved in cProjects, can the phase be switched in the related Change Request Management projects.
A high level coordination team has to confirm before projects can go into the next phase. All other functions of cProjects are explained in dedicated cProjects training courses.
![Page 328: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/328.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-328
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Phase Shift in Change Request Management
It is possibile to switch the phases in the task-list. In this example, it will be switched from „Development with Release“ to „Test“. This is rejected by the system, because cProjects did not yet complete the required tasks. This must be completed first, because tasks may be still open in cProjects, which have to be completed urgently, before the phase switch can be completed. If the required tasks are completed in cProjects, then the phase can be switched to „Test“ in Change Request Management.
![Page 329: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/329.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-329
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Advantages of Release Deliveries
Advantages of Release Deliveries:Common regression testing for several projects at onceChanges in production only at certain pointsNo cross-reference dependencies with other projectsHigher stability in production
Advantages of Parallel Projects:No wait times for release deliveriesIndividual project duration of each project is possibleFaster realization, due to individual timing of each project
![Page 330: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/330.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-330
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Parallel Projects
Synchronized Releases
Maintenance Cycles
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
Lesson 4: Release Management
Change Calendar
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
![Page 331: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/331.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-331
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Maintenance Cycles or Single Transports
… Maintenance Cycles
… Single Transports
01 / 2006 01 / 200710 / 200607 / 200604 / 2006
Advantages of the Single Transport Strategy: • Fast Realization of Changes • Only small changes to production at a time Easy to find the error • Disadvantage: No regression testing
Advantages of Maintenance Cycles: • No frequent changes in production • Regression and integration testing is possible (and needed) • Higher Stability in Production
![Page 332: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/332.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-332
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
NetWeaver Development Environments
Parallel Projects
Synchronized Releases
Maintenance Cycles
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
Lesson 4: Release Management
Change Calendar
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
![Page 333: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/333.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-333
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Change Calendar – What should be contained?
Which information should be contained?:Overview of current and planned projectsWhich projects are located in which systemsGo-Live dates of projects or transports
Where is it used?:Scheduling of new projects and change requestsAvoiding conflictsAligning implementation projects and maintenance tasks
![Page 334: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/334.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-334
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Development
Quality
Pre-Production
Production
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Project2 Release
Development
Project3 Release
Development
Project4 Release
Development
Support Package
Implement.
Project2 Integration
testing
Project3 Integration
testing
Project4 Integration
testing
Project3 Acceptance
testing
Project1 Acceptance
testing
GL
ReleaseGL
ReleaseGL
GL GL
Maintenance
Critical error fixand associated update to
development When a critical error is discovered in
production, the error-fix is done in a separate “maintenance environment” and updated
manually to development system pipeline.
Example 1: Project Timeline
ReleaseGL
Project2 Acceptance
testing
This example shows the project plan for a roll-out project. The customer has chosen a sequential approach. When one project leaves the development system and goes into QA, the next project starts in Development.
The customer has a 4 system landscape and a maintenance system, which is refreshed by a production copy after each Go-Live.
This figure provides an overview of which project is on which system, at a certain point in time. This gives the program office a good overview when new projects need to be scheduled.
![Page 335: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/335.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-335
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Example 2: Maintenance Planning Calendar
Calender for 2006
January ISPIWP ICP February ISPIWP ICP March ISPIWP ICP April ISPIWP ICP May ISPIWP ICP June ISPIWP ICP1 Sun New Year´s Day [1] 1 Wed 1 Wed 1 Sat 1 Mon [18] 1 Thu 2 Mon [1] 2 Thu 2 Thu I S P
I C P 2 Sun 2 Tue 2 Fri 3 Tue 3 Fri 3 Fri I W P 3 Mon [14] 3 Wed 3 Sat 4 Wed 4 Sat 4 Sat 4 Tue 4 Thu 4 Sun Whitsunday (G)5 Thu 5 Sun 5 Sun 5 Wed 5 Fri 5 Mon Whitemanday (G) [23]6 Fri Epiphany (G) 6 Mon [6] 6 Mon [10] 6 Thu 6 Sat 6 Tue 7 Sat 7 Tue 7 Tue 7 Fri 7 Sun 7 Wed
8 Sun 8 Wed 8 Wed 8 Sat 8 Mon [19] 8 Thu 9 Mon [2] 9 Thu 9 Thu 9 Sun 9 Tue 9 Fri 10 Tue 10 Fri 10 Fri 10 Mon [15] 10 Wed 10 Sat 11 Wed 11 Sat 11 Sat 11 Tue 11 Thu 11 Sun 12 Thu 12 Sun 12 Sun 12 Wed 12 Fri 12 Mon [24]13 Fri 13 Mon [7] 13 Mon [11] 13 Thu 13 Sat 13 Tue
14 Sat 14 Tue 14 Tue 14 Fri Good Friiday (G) 14 Sun 14 Wed 15 Sun 15 Wed 15 Wed 15 Sat 15 Mon [20] 15 Thu Corpus Christi Day (G)16 Mon [3] 16 Thu 16 Thu I S P
I C P 16 Sun Easter Day 16 Tue 16 Fri
17 Tue 17 Fri 17 Fri I W P 17 Mon Easter Monnday (G) [16] 17 Wed 17 Sat
18 Wed 18 Sat 18 Sat 18 Tue 18 Thu I S P
I C P 18 Sun 19 Thu 19 Sun 19 Sun 19 Wed 19 Fri I W P 19 Mon [25]20 Fri 20 Mon [8] 20 Mon [12] 20 Thu 20 Sat DC Main (G) 20 Tue 21 Sat 21 Tue 21 Tue 21 Fri 21 Sun DC Main (G) 21 Wed
22 Sun 22 Wed 22 Wed 22 Sat 22 Mon [21] 22 Thu 23 Mon [4] 23 Thu 23 Thu 23 Sun 23 Tue 23 Fri 24 Tue 24 Fri 24 Fri 24 Mon [17] 24 Wed 24 Sat 25 Wed 25 Sat 25 Sat 25 Tue 25 Thu Ascension Day (G) 25 Sun 26 Thu 26 Sun 26 Sun 26 Wed 26 Fri 26 Mon [26]27 Fri 27 Mon [9] 27 Mon [13] 27 Thu 27 Sat 27 Tue 28 Sat DC Main (G) 28 Tue 28 Tue 28 Fri 28 Sun 28 Wed 29 Sun DC Main (G) 29 Wed 29 Sat 29 Mon [22] 29 Thu 30 Mon [5] 30 Thu 30 Sun 30 Tue 30 Fri 31 Tue 31 Fri 31 Wed
Leg endISP ReleaseDelivery Time QuarterEndClosing PCB M aintenance Delivery
ISW ReleaseDelivery Time YearEndClosing PCB Release Delivery
ICP ReleaseDelivery Time EM (for Emergency Request) Import I *P
M aintenanceDelivery ReleaseDelivery DB Reorg
This example shows the maintenance calendar of a solution consisting of a BW, CRM and ERP system.
Support Packages are imported from the end of January to beginning of February. Every second weekend, there are maintenance deliveries (Go-Lives of maintenance cycles). Sometimes, there are codefreezes due to quarter end activities. Projects can be incorparated into any maintenance cycle. This gives flexibility to the projects
as there are many Go-Live windows. This calendar shows 2 Best Practices: • All systems in a solution should be delivered with projects or maintenance cycles at the
same time. This is due to the dependencies of changes in different systems (see „transport dependencies“).
• The system owners are also responsible for maintenance. First, the maintenance is planned. Then, the implementation projects consider the maintenance plan in their project schedule.
![Page 336: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/336.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-336
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Project Overview in SAP Solution Manager
This screenshot shows transaction SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN. It shows all projects, currently planned in the SAP Solution Manager. If you double click on the projects, you see more details, for example, begin and end dates, etc.
![Page 337: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/337.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-337
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Project Overview in Change Request Management
This screenshot shows transaction /TMWFLOW/CMSCONF in Change Request Management. It shows all projects of type implementation. Furthermore, you can see which project phase they are in and which systems the projects are located in.
![Page 338: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/338.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-338
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 4: Release Management
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Lesson 6: Critical Objects
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
![Page 339: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/339.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-339
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Customizing Synchronization
Synchronization of Transports
Special Dependencies
Lesson 4: Release Management
![Page 340: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/340.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-340
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
ERP-DEV ERP-QAS ERP-PRD
Consistent Customizing between Systems
CRM-DEV CRM-QAS CRM-PRDreplicate
Applications require consistent data between product instances, like conditions in ERP and CRM.
Data replication takes place at Save or Release Task time. Changes are synchronized in both landscapes within the project cycle context.
In this example, customizing settings between ERP and CRM must be kept synchronous. For this, SAP Solution Manager provides a customizing distribution scenario. This will be described on the next slides.
![Page 341: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/341.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-341
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
sourcesettings target
settings
Sync
hron
izat
ion
Gro
up
Customizing Distribution: Overview
Customizing dataR/3DEV
R/3QAS
R/3PRD
CRMDEV
CRMQAS
CRMPRD
...DEV
...QAS
...PRD
SAP SolutionManager
with Customizing Distribution
Transport
Transport
Transport
Transport
Transport
Transport
You often need to synchronize selected customizing settings in various systems in a system landscape. You can use Customizing Distribution to synchronize customizing settings in a source system, such as, SAP R/3, with the customizing settings in target systems, such as a SAP CRM system in a SAP system landscape.
Customizing Distribution uses transport requests to transport customizing changes from development systems to the quality assurance and production systems. Customizing Distribution is performed between development systems only.
Customizing objects (Synchronization Objects) that should be synchronized between various SAP components are predefined.
When you create a synchronization group, you can select synchronization and other customizing objects using the Synchronization Group Editor.
When you change customizing settings of an object in the source system, Customizing Distribution begins transferring the changes to the target system.
You use Customizing Distribution to transfer customizing changes made in a SAP R/3 development system, to other development systems in the system landscape. For example, you can use Customizing Distribution to:
Download selected customizing from a SAP R/3 Enterprise to a newly-installed SAP APO system.
Synchronize customizing in an HR and a non-HR system and use ALE distribution in a stand-alone HR.
![Page 342: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/342.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-342
Synchronize customizing in a SAP R/3 Enterprise and a SAP CRM system, because there are business processes that run in both SAP R/3 and SAP CRM.
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Automatic Customizing Distribution in Detail
SAPSolutionManager
SAPERPDEV
SAPCRMDEV
SAPERPQAS
SAPERPPRD
SAPCRMQAS
SAPCRMPRD
Time zonesTransport zonesCurrenciesCustomer groupsProduct groups...
Save customizing intotransport request1
Notify Solution Managerabout customizing changes
2
Map source to target customizing, after importing changes
3
Send target settings to target system4
Time zonesTransport zonesCurrenciesCustomer groups...
Write target settings into transport request5
Log
Generate distribution logs6
Save customizing into a transport request. Notify Solution Manager about customizing changes. Map source into target customizing, after importing changes. Send target settings to target system (via BC Set). Write target setting into a transport request. Generate distribution log.
![Page 343: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/343.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-343
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
How To Set Up Customizing Distribution
Define customizing distribution scenario:What? – Synchronization groupFrom where to where? – Source and target systemsAt what times? – Distribution types/frequency
Overview distribution options:At transport recording (for immediate testing)At transport release (after successful testing)Timed distribution (transfer of customizing only at pre-defined times, e.g. at night or at weekends)Initial distribution (complete copy of selected customizing objects)
Choose a distribution type or types: • Timed Distribution: Customizing Distribution is scheduled in the background, at the times
you specify. • Synchronization by Transport Changes: Each time a transport request belonging to the
project is changed, the relevant customizing is distributed. • Synchronization by Transport Release: Each time a transport request belonging to the
project is released, the relevant customizing is distributed. • Initial Distribution: Settings from customizing tables from SAP R/3 are written in
customizing tables in the target system without foreign key checks.
![Page 344: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/344.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-344
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Customizing Synchronization
Synchronization of Transports
Special Dependencies
Lesson 4: Release Management
![Page 345: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/345.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-345
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
TransportLandscapeCRM
TransportLandscapeEP
TransportLandscapeBI
TransportLandscapeERP
TransportLandscapePI
Development Landscape QALandscape
ProductionLandscape
DevelopmentEnvironment
SE80DS & DI
Portal ContentAdministrator
System
mySAP ERP
mySAP CRM
System
mySAP ERP
mySAP CRM
EnterprisePortal
System
mySAP ERP
mySAP CRM
EnterprisePortal
BI
EnterprisePortal
BI BI
ProcessIntegration
(XI)
ProcessIntegration
(XI)
ProcessIntegration
(XI)
DS & DI
SE80
SE80Integration
Builder
SE80DS & DI
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management
DS & DI
Change Request Management in a mySAP Business Suite Solution
Change Request Management can handle dependent transports in different systems. In this example the Solution Manager Project comprises a several SAP system. The systems
have dependent transports. All transports for the whole solution are bundled by the umbrella of the Solution Manager project. When the project goes live all transport requests that belong to the same Solution Manager project are imported at the same time. So all dependencies are considered automatically.
![Page 346: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/346.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-346
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Solution Manager Project Comprises Several Transport Tracks
Solution Manager Project
– Development Environment- ERP
Transport Request1Transport Request2
- CRMTransport Request3
- BWTransport Request4
– Quality Assurance Environment- ERP - CRM- BW
– Production Environment- ERP - CRM- BW
Change Request Management can handle dependant transports in different systems. In this example the Solution Manager Project comprises an ERP, CRM and BW system. The
systems have dependant transports. All transports for the whole solution are bundled under the umbrella of the Solution Manager project. When the project goes live all transport requests, that belong to the same Solution Manager project, are imported at the same time. Therefore, all dependencies are considered automatically.
![Page 347: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/347.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-347
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Customizing Synchronization
Synchronization of Transports
Special Dependencies
Lesson 4: Release Management
![Page 348: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/348.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-348
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
ERP-DEV ERP-QAS ERP-PRDConfig
Data Consistency between Systems: CRM Delta Load
CRM-DEV CRM-QAS CRM-PRDConfig
Master Data
Master Data
Master Data
Master Data
Config
Config
1
2
Applications require consistent master data and condition data between product instances, like ERP and CRM.
The delta load must be performed before the configuration changes are imported.
Applications require consistent master data and condition data between product instances, like ERP and CRM or APO.
The CRM delta load must be performed before the configuration changes are imported
![Page 349: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/349.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-349
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
ERP-DEV ERP-QAS ERP-PRD
Data Consistency between Systems: OLTP and OLAP
BI-DEV BI-QAS BI-PRD
Data Source Data Source
Transfer Rules Transfer Rules
Replicated DS Replicated
1
2
3
A
C
B
Applications require consistent interface data between OLTP extractor and OLAP transfer structure.
The data structure must be imported into the OLTP system, before the transfer structure in the OLAP system is to be imported
The BI system wants to receive data from the ERP system. For this, the following steps have to be performed: • Create data source in the ERP-DEV system (e.g. transaction RSO2). • Replicate the data source into the BI-DEV system. • Create Transfer Rules in the BI-DEV system.
When it comes to transport into the QA environment, the following steps must be performed in the right order: • Transport data source in the ERP-QAS system. • Replicate data source into the BI-QAS system (there exist transport objects for data source
replication). • Transport transfer rules into the BI-QAS system.
![Page 350: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/350.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-350
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Transport Strategies: Unit Overview Diagram
Transport Strategies
Lesson 1: System Landscapes
Lesson 3: Client Strategies
Lesson 4: Release Management
Lesson 5: Transport Dependencies
Lesson 6: Critical Objects
Lesson 2: Best Practises for Running the NWDI
![Page 351: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/351.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-351
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Critical Transport Objects
Uncritical Objects:Forms, e.g. SAP ScriptsAuthorizationsSimple Customizing (without generation of repository objects)
Critical Objects:Customizing with generation of repository objects (e.g. LIS)Report sourcesDictionary Objects
Very Critical Objects: Frequently used Sources (e.g. User Exits)Dictionary Objects which must be converted (esp. Big tables like vbap, coep)Dictionary Objects which are frequently used by other objects (komk, komp, t001w)
Critical Transport Objects have a long import runtime. During the time of the import, inconsistencies, dumps and, in rare cases, even logical errors (wrong results) can occur in the system. Therefore, critical transport objects should be known. Imports that contain critical transport objects should be imported during downtime or, at least, during times of low system usage.
![Page 352: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/352.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-352
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Critical Business Objects
Critical Business Objects are:SD condition tablesUser exitsComplete development classes in business critical areas
Business critical objects are central objects, which are used by many applications or very critical applications. If they are changed it might have severe side-effects in many areas. Therefore, an extended test is needed before these objects are imported into production.
The list contains some business critical objects.
![Page 353: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/353.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-353
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Checking for Critical Objects
Object listR3TR PROG ZABAPR3TR TABU ZTABLE...............
Object listR3TR PROG ZABAPR3TR TABU ZTABLE...............
Object listR3TR PROG ZABAPR3TR TABU ZTABLE...............
Object listR3TR PROG ZABAPR3TR TABU ZTABLE...............
Object listR3TR PROG ZABAPR3TR TABU ZTABLE...............
Object listR3TR PROG ZABAPR3TR TABU ZTABLE...............
Object listR3TR PROG ZABAPR3TR TABU ZTABLE...............DEV: 0
QAS: 7PRD: 3
Request1 DEVK9000162 DEVK9000183 DEVK9000204 DEVK9000235 DEVK9000026 DEVK9000337 DEVK900035
Object listR3TR PROG ZABAPR3TR TABU ZTABLE...............
Table of critical objects
Compare critical objects
R3TR TABU ZTABLE
To check if the change requests in an import queue contain critical objects that should not be imported into the target system, go to the Import Overview and choose Queue Check Critical objects. The object lists of the requests are checked to see if they contain critical
transport objects. The results are displayed in a hierarchical list. Requests containing critical objects are marked with the appropriate icon. The critical objects are highlighted in color.
Before performing this check, you need to have maintained the critical transport objects in the SAP System whose import queue you want to check for critical objects.
To display or maintain the critical transport objects defined for the relevant SAP System, call transaction STMS in the SAP System for which you want to display/maintain the critical objects. Choose Overview Imports Extras ��Critical transport objects.
Since the table of critical objects is a Customizing table, it should be maintained in the development system, and then transported to other SAP Systems from there.
The TMS check for critical transport object is executed at the time of the import into production.
![Page 354: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/354.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-354
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Approval of Critical Objects in Change Request Management
Change Request Management also provides approval for critical objects. When a critical object is contained in a transport of the change transaction, no export is possible unless the change manager approves the critical object.
The benefits of this procedure, compared to the TMS check for critical transport objects are: • Customizing entries can also be marked as critical. • The check is performed at the time of export from the development system. This gives the
organization many options on how to deal with that critical object. If a critical object is only detected at the time of the import, it is often difficult to postpone a scheduled Go-Live.
Critical objects can be configured in transaction is /TMWFLOW/CMSCONF.
![Page 355: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/355.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-355
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Downtime Aspects
Import mass changes and single changes that contain critical objects during downtime or, at least, during times of low system usage.
Switch off background jobs.
Use Import ALL instead of Import Single.
Create Merge Transports, as described in note 139513.
Set GENERATION = FALSE in TP_DOMAIN_<SID>.PFLNo generation of programs and screensStart SGEN for transport request (uses several processes) or start the report RSGENINVLAS
Business Warehouse :Long Import Times due to long running After-Import-MethodsDo not allow Data Load during Imports, Queries might be okayImport Single should be used
During the time of the import inconsistencies, dumps and, in rare cases, even logical errors (wrong results) can occur in the system. Therefore, we recommend to import mass changes and single changes that contain critical objects during downtime or, at least, during times of low system usage.
There are some possibilities to reduce the import time of big imports. The best practices are listed on this slide.
![Page 356: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/356.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-356
© SAP AG 2006, Title of Presentation / Speaker Name / 1
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
Understand the limitations of the 3 system landscape and the benefits of advanced transport topologies
Understand the different client roles
Describe pros and cons of parallel projects, synchronized releases and maintenance cycles
Know how to manage transport dependencies
Be aware of critical objects
![Page 357: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/357.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-357
![Page 358: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/358.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-358
Exercises
Unit: Transport Strategies
In this exercise, you can test your knowledge on system landscapes and transport strategies
This exercise consists of questions and answers.
6-1 What are risks when using the Import Single strategy?
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
Inconsistencies between workbench and customizing requests
Cross-reference inconsistencies due to forgotten transports
Long import times of individual transport requests
Wrong transport sequence
6-2 What is recommended when several parallel implementation projects with different
GoLive dates are running in one transport landscape?
Please choose the correct answer.
Global rollout landscape
Separate development client for each project
![Page 359: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/359.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-359
Preproduction system
6-3 What are advantages of a phased system landscape?
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
Faster realization of business requirements
Implementation projects and maintenance tasks can be separated
No codefreeze required
Clean environment for emergency corrections
![Page 360: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/360.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-360
Solutions
Unit: Transport Strategies
6-1 What are risks when using the Import Single strategy?
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
O X Inconsistencies between workbench and customizing requests
X O Cross-reference inconsistencies due to forgotten transports
O X Long import times of individual transport requests
X O Wrong transport sequence
6-2 What is recommended when several parallel implementation projects with different
GoLive dates are running in one transport landscape?
Please choose the correct answer.
O Global rollout landscape
O Separate development client for each project
X Preproduction system
![Page 361: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/361.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 6-361
6-3 What are advantages of a phased system landscape?
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
O X Faster realization of business requirements
X O Implementation projects and maintenance tasks can be separated
O X No codefreeze required
X O Clean environment for emergency corrections
![Page 362: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/362.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-362
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
NetWeaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
Change Request Management
![Page 363: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/363.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-363
© SAP AG 2007
Content:
Change Request Management Overview
Project and Release Management
Change Requests
Maintenance Activities
Implementation Projects
Tools
Best Practices
Change Request Management: Unit Content
![Page 364: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/364.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-364
© SAP AG 2007
Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
Define the Change Request Management business process
Explain how to use the SAP Solution Manager system for the Change Request Management scenario
Describe the various elements of Change Request Management as part of SAP Solution Manager
Describe SAP’s best practices in transport management which are implemented in the SAP Solution Manager
![Page 365: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/365.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-365
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 1: Change Request Management Overview
Lesson 2: Project and Release Management
Lesson 3: Change Requests
Lesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Lesson 5: Implementation Projects
Lesson 6: Tools
Lesson 7: Best Practices
![Page 366: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/366.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-366
© SAP AG 2007
Story Line: Change Request Management
Effective application management is essential for companies to stay ahead of competition.
SAP’s scope of application management includes all types of application changes:
Business process changes, implementation and upgrade projectsPeriodic maintenance Emergency corrections
Change Request Management strengthens the strategy of SAP Solution Manager, as SAP‘s application management platform which:
Ensures reliabilityReduces Total Cost of Ownership and increases Total Solution ValueBridges the gap between business requirements and IT administration
![Page 367: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/367.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-367
© SAP AG 2007
ITIL Change Management Process
Create RfC
Accept: Filter RfC
Classify: Category and Priority
Urg
ent
Cor
rect
ion
Plan: Impact und Resources
Con
figur
atio
n M
anag
emen
t pro
cess
es th
e da
taan
d co
ntro
ls th
e st
atus
of t
he C
Is
Fallb
ack
Evaluate and close
Urgent?
Coordinate
Develop
Test
Implement
Control
yes
no
Correct
Rejected: New RfC
yes
no
What is ITIL®?
Acronym for the "IT Infrastructure Library" guidelines developed for the British government De-facto global standard in the area of service management Contains comprehensive, publicly accessible documentation on the planning, provision and
support of IT services Provides the basis for improving the use and effect of an operationally deployed IT
infrastructure Describes the architecture for establishing and operating IT service management. The ITIL books are best practice guidelines for service management, with the guidelines
describing what rather than how. Service management is tailored to the size, the internal culture and, above all, the requirements of the company. The impartial view of the external consultant may help to break away from the rigid structures.
![Page 368: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/368.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-368
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Three tiers of Change Request Management
Management of all change requests
Change request categorization
Change documentation
Approval workflow
Status reporting
cProjectAdministration
Change Admin
Development & Customizing Infrastructure
Workbench Organizer
Transport Management
Transport scheduling
Transport tracking
Change LogisticsProject Management
Project Administration
Project documentation
Project Blueprint & Configuration
Test Management
Learning Management
![Page 369: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/369.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-369
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management – Roles in a Nutshell
… categorizes, approves and monitors Change Requests.
… is the Steering Committee in the Change Management process.
… implements a change and hands over to the Tester.
… tests a change, sets status in the Change Document.
… takes care of software logistics.
… creates an Service Message or a Change Request directly.
Developer
Requestor
Tester
ChangeManager
IT Operator
Service Desk Employee
Change Advisory Board
… handles the Service Message and creates a Change Request.
Responsibilities:
Requestor: To describe the change required in detail. To identify the priority of the request and describe why the capability is needed, and to identify the impact if the desired capability is not provided.
Service Desk Employee: To act as the central point of contact between the User and IT Service Management. To handle Incidents and requests, and provide an interface for other activities, such as Change, Problem, Configuration, Release, Service Level, and IT Service Continuity Management.
Change Manager: • To ensure that standardized methods and procedures are used for efficient and prompt
handling of all Changes, in order to minimize the impact of any related Incidents on service.
• To accept, or reject Change Requests. • To monitor the Change Management process. • To release Changes for production.
Developer: To implement and document a Change in the development system, to provide adequate test cases, or update existing ones.
![Page 370: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/370.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-370
Tester: To follow instructions in the relevant test cases and make sure that the Change has been promoted correctly into the consolidation environment. If a Change causes incidents in the consolidation environment, it is the testers duty to set the Change back into development.
IT Operator: To provide support if the Change Management process is impeded in any way. To import the Change into the production environment.
![Page 371: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/371.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-371
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 1: Change Request Management Overview
Lesson 2: Project and Release Management
Lesson 3: Change Requests
Lesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Lesson 5: Implementation Projects
Lesson 6: Tools
Lesson 7: Best Practices
![Page 372: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/372.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-372
© SAP AG 2007
Projectcreated in cProjects
SAP SolutionManagerproject
SAP Solution Manager
Projectcycle
transaction
cProjects
Project cycle
task list
Release Management & Change Request Management
IMG project
IMG project
...
Physical (development)
systems
CTSprojectCTS
projectCTS
project
Logical systems(clients)
CTSproject
CTSprojectCTS
project
...
...
TransportRequest
The Solution Manager project is represented as an IMG project in each satellite system and a CTS project in each satellite system client.
For each Solution Manager project, a project cycle is generated, which is represented by a task-list for managing the technical administration, and a cycle transaction for managing the organizational administration of the project cycle.
Transport requests are only managed by the project cycle. The project assignment of each transport request is mandatory
The Solution Manager project can be extended by cProjects to manage project phases and project tasks. cProjects allow the management of inter-project dependencies.
![Page 373: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/373.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-373
© SAP AG 2007
Release Management with Change Request Management
SAP Solution Manager projects can be extended by adding project cycles, which control project phases.
Project phases determine whether or not transport requests can be created, released, or imported.
Project phases are visible in the blueprint and configuration transactions.
cProjects can be used to extend project management capabilities and to manage multiple phase-specific projects.
This is the IT Infrastructure Library (ITIL) definition of release management. ITIL is the de-facto global standard for service management. For more information, go to www.itil.org
![Page 374: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/374.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-374
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager Projects and Project Cycles
SAP Solution Manager project
Project cycleDevelopment phase(w/o or w/ release) Test phase
Go-live phase
Emergency correction phase
cProject
Each project cycle is controlled by it‘s phases. Project phases are static and linked to each cycle
Each project cycle phase offers certain functions which differ according to the project type.
![Page 375: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/375.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-375
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management – Cycle Management
CycleTransaction
DEV
QAS
PRD
Controlled transports
Controlled transportsCha
nge
Req
uest
Man
agem
ent
ChangeManager
Project Cycle
Cycle TaskList
The project cycle is an abstraction layer, representing the fix phase structure of a cycle, that cannot be changed.
The cycle task-list represents the system landscape tracks the tasks to be used by an IT operator or IT administrator for managing project related IT activities, especially imports. Custom task-list templates with additional tasks can be created by customers.
The cycle transaction represents the service request for managing the phase changes. Documentation, additional status, notification, electronic signatures etc. can be managed from within the cycle transaction. Phase shifts should be done from within the cycle transaction but not from within the cycle task-list, since additional activities and status can only be managed from within the service request.
![Page 376: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/376.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-376
© SAP AG 2007
Project Cycle I
SAP Solution Manager projects define the project landscapes
Project landscapes contain one or more logical components
Logical components incorporate logical systems that have the following system role types:
Source System (development systems and starting systems)Target System (any system between the development and productionsystems)Production System (production systems and ending systems) Single System (evaluation systems without connection to a transport route) Post-Processing System (retrofit systems)
IMG and CTS Projects collect changes:An IMG project represents an SAP Solution Manager project in onedevelopment systemA CTS Project represents an IMG project in one client
When a project cycle is being generated, all logical components are taken into account as well as the transport routes of all systems.
Tracks are being generated for each development system that matches to a system of role type ‚Source System‘ in the logical component and as a source of a consolidation route in TMS. Each track is represented by one CTS project.
![Page 377: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/377.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-377
© SAP AG 2007
Project Cycle II
Project cycles generate the phase instance of a project
Only one active cycle can exist simultaneously for each projectProject Cycles:
control project phasescontrol whether or not transports are created, exported, or importedincorporate all logical systems that belong to a projectcan be closed after the go-live phase, or reset to the “In Development”phase
The project types that are supported are:Template projectImplementation projectUpgrade projectMaintenance project (special semantics apply and will be explained later)
Projects of type maintenance are represented by transaction type SDMN Projects of type implementation, upgrade and template are represented by transaction type
SDDV
![Page 378: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/378.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-378
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 1: Change Request Management Overview
Lesson 2: Project and Release Management
Lesson 3: Change Requests
Lesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Lesson 5: Implementation Projects
Lesson 6: Tools
Lesson 7: Best Practices
![Page 379: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/379.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-379
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management – Change Request
Serv
ice
Des
kC
hang
e R
eque
st M
anag
emen
t
ChangeTransaction
SDMJ / SDHF
Change RequestSDCR
ChangeManager
Service Message
SLFNRequester
Service Desk Employee
Feedback
A Change Request has no corresponding Project. With the approval process a project type is assigned to the Change Request. Approving a
Change Request results in a change transaction for this type of project.
![Page 380: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/380.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-380
© SAP AG 2007
Creating and Approving a Change Request
An approved change request results in the creation of a change transaction.The entry in the IBase field is used to identify the production system that the changeis required for.The entry in the Subject field is used to identify the project type and the change process type.
Project types: TemplateImplementationUpgradeMaintenance
Change types: Urgent Correction (only for maintenance projects)Normal Correction (for any project type)Administration Activity (for any project type)
Customizable Fields: Category, Priority, Reference, Date, ProductsExtended general Customizing (project): Event-driven notifications, feedback, cost management, extended custom fields and custom tabsExtended change request-specific Customizing (project): Text profiles, activity profiles, status schema, transaction types
Implementation, Upgrade and Template Projects: When a change request for a Normal Correction is being approved, a project cycle must be
linked to it. The project cycle must be in the project phase development w/ release or development w/o release.
Maintenance Project: In a maintenance project, Normal Corrections can be approved during all phases, starting with
development w/o release up to Go-Live. In addition, Urgent Corrections can also be approved during all phases, starting development
w/o release up to Go-Live.
![Page 381: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/381.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-381
© SAP AG 2007
Approval Process: Create and Accept RfC
Create RfC
Accept: Filter RfC
Classify: Category and Priority
Urg
ent
Cor
rect
ion
Plan: Impact und Ressources
Urgent? yes
Rejected: New RfC
no
It is not my fault someone else was responsible for it!
That is not what I have required!
Create RfC:
Provide a tool so that no change requests are lost Accept: Filter RfC
• Assign RfC to a business process • Is the requestor authorized? • Is it an RfC or an incident?
Assign a responsible Change Manager Check if there are similar requests • Bundle and consolidate them
Check if there are ongoing changes in this area Tools: • Change Request Reporting
![Page 382: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/382.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-382
© SAP AG 2007
Approval Process: Classify and Plan RfC
Create RfC
Accept: Filter RfC
Classify: Category and Priority
Urg
ent
Cor
rect
ion
Plan: Impact und Ressources
Urgent? yes
Rejected: New RfC
no
I had other priorities-that's why I‘m too late!
Why didn't you ask me earlier!-Production can‘t assemble it!- Service can‘t support it! - Sales thinks it’s great new technology but sees no market
Classify: Category and Priority:
Priority: • Impact to the business process ($) • Due date (e.g. month end closing)
Category: • Depends on the priority • Which cycles exist
- Urgent correction - Normal Correction - Project Request
• Definition of the Transaction Type - Administrative - Transport
• Identify the components and business processes which are involved Tools: • Change Calendar • Solution Directory (Business Process Library)
![Page 383: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/383.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-383
Plan: Impact and Resources • Complexity of change • Business areas affected • Critical objects check • Regression test required
![Page 384: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/384.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-384
© SAP AG 2007
System-Demo
System-Demo
![Page 385: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/385.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-385
© SAP AG 2007
Exercise
Exercise
![Page 386: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/386.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-386
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 1: Change Request Management Overview
Lesson 2: Project and Release Management
Lesson 3: Change Requests
Lesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Lesson 5: Implementation Projects
Lesson 6: Tools
Lesson 7: Best Practices
![Page 387: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/387.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-387
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Administration Activities
Maintenance Cycle
Urgent Correction
Normal Correction
Test Message
Maintenance Project
![Page 388: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/388.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-388
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Project: Definition
The maintenance project is prerequisite for production support.
A maintenance project manages maintenance cycles for as long as is defined by the project lifecycle.
The maintenance cycle consistently distributes any maintenance or urgent correction change to any system of the project landscape.
One maintenance project can have multiple maintenance systems assigned to it, including the corresponding transport routes (one logical system for Workbench requests and one logical system for Customizing requests, for example). A maintenance cycle belongs to just one maintenance project.
![Page 389: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/389.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-389
© SAP AG 2007
Harmonizing Maintenance Activities
Urgent Corrections(independent of MC)
NormalCorrections
Maintenance CycleDevelopment
(w/o or w/ release) Test Go-LiveEmergency Correction
cProject
Test messages(during integration test)
SAP Solution Manager Project (Maintenance Project)
Maintenance Cycle
Harmonization Harmonization Harmonization
The maintenance project is a prerequisite for production support. It is the central unit for all information, such as, logical component and system landscape, and
the high level project plan. It closes the gap between planning and software logistics: • SAP Solution Manager project • IMG project • CTS project
A maintenance cycle belongs to just one maintenance project.
![Page 390: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/390.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-390
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Administration Activities
Maintenance Cycle
Urgent Correction
Normal Correction
Test Message
Maintenance Project
![Page 391: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/391.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-391
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Cycle: Definition
A maintenance cycle is the period of time in which you:
make changes in maintenance systems
include these changes in new transport requests
import these requests into follow-on systems for testing
At the end of a maintenance cycle, all transport requests are imported into the production system at the same time. Subsequently, the maintenance cycle can be closed manually and anew one can be created, if necessary (but only in compliance with the rules of the change requests that belong to the maintenance cycle).
![Page 392: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/392.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-392
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Administration Activities
Maintenance Cycle
Urgent Correction
Normal Correction
Test Message
Maintenance Project
![Page 393: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/393.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-393
© SAP AG 2007
Harmonizing Maintenance Activities
SAP Solution Manager Project (Maintenance Project)
Urgent Corrections(independent of MC)
NormalCorrections
cProject
Test messages(during integration test)
Maintenance CycleDevelopment
w/o or w/ release Test Go-LiveEmergency Correction
Urgent corrections are fast changes that have to be imported into the production environment as quickly as possible.
An urgent correction can be described as the smallest subproject of a broader maintenance project cycle.
Urgent Corrections can be performed during the maintenance project phases ‚Development w/o release‘ up to ‚Emergency Correction‘.
Urgent Corrections can be approved and developed but not exported during Go-Live Phase.
![Page 394: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/394.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-394
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management – Urgent Correction
Change Request
Service Message
Developer
Requester
Tester
ChangeManager
DEV
IT Operator
QAS
PRD
Controlled transports
Controlled transports
Service Desk Employee
Serv
ice
Des
kC
hang
e R
eque
st M
anag
emen
t
ChangeDocument Task
List
Feedback
Maintenance Cycle
An urgent correction is represented by a singular task list that is created when an urgent correction is being generated during approval time.
An urgent correction task-list is being closed when the urgent correction is being closed. An urgent correction can be described as the smallest subproject of a broader maintenance
project cycle. Technically, an urgent correction is managed by “import subset” and is automatically merged
into the current open maintenance cycle.
![Page 395: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/395.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-395
© SAP AG 2007
System-Demo
System-Demo
![Page 396: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/396.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-396
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Administration Activities
Maintenance Cycle
Urgent Correction
Normal Correction
Test Message
Maintenance Project
![Page 397: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/397.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-397
© SAP AG 2007
Harmonizing Maintenance Activities
SAP Solution Manager Project (Maintenance Project)
Urgent Corrections(independent of MC)
NormalCorrections
cProject
Test messages(during integration test)
Maintenance CycleDevelopment
w/o or w/ release Test Go-LiveEmergency Correction
Harmonization Harmonization Harmonization
The Normal Correction relates to the life cycle of the project. As of SAP Solution Manager 4.0 SP6 the transaction type for the Normal Correction will be
SDMJ. It is an optimization of the Normal Correction (SDMI), which is already available. Each project can have as many Normal Corrections as required. A Normal Correction phase depends on the phase of the project cycle phase. • For Maintenance Projects Normal Corrections can be approved during the phases
Development w/o release up to Go-Live. • From the Test phase up to Go-Live, no export of transports is possible.
Normal Corrections allow development up to unit testing: • Transport requests can be created • Transport tasks can be created • Test transports can be created • Test transports can be exported • Development can be closed • Unit test can be performed • Unit test can be confirmed
![Page 398: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/398.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-398
© SAP AG 2007
Normal Correction
The normal correction relates to the life cycle of the project
Each project can have as many normal corrections as required
A normal correction can be shared by multiple developers, and multiple transport requests and transport tasks can be created
A normal correction phase depends on the phase of the project cycle
Normal corrections can only be distributed by ‘import project’Transport requests/tasks can be created and exported from within the service requestProject exports and imports can be managed by the maintenance task-list
![Page 399: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/399.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-399
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management – Normal Correction
Change Request
Service Message
Developer
Requester
Tester
ChangeManager
DEV
IT Operator
QAS
PRD
Controlled transports
Controlled transports
Service Desk Employee
Serv
ice
Des
kC
hang
e R
eque
st M
anag
emen
t
ChangeDocument
Feedback
Maintenance Cycle
A Normal Correction is generated as a follow-up transaction by the approval activity. Normal Corrections are directly linked to a project cycle transaction and project cycle task-
list. From within a Normal Correction, the creation of a transport request and transport task and the
release of related transports are controlled by the Change request/Normal Correction. Imports are done by means of import projects from within the cycle task-list.
A Normal Correction can be shared by multiple developers and multiple transport requests and transport tasks can be created
![Page 400: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/400.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-400
© SAP AG 2007
Import buffer Import buffer
Consistent Normal Corrections in a Project Cycle
DEV QAS PRD
Legend:
Normal CorrectionsTest Transports (Transport of Copies)
Normal Corrections are exported as test transports, which are performed as transports of copies.
Up to status consolidated , only test exports are possible: The system generates and exports transports of copies from the workbench or customizing requests of the activity.
When status is transferred to consolidated’, all transport requests will be exported and put in the queue. • No new transport requests can be created for the Normal Correction.
Normal Corrections are imported by using the “import project” method from within the cycle task-list • All exported transport requests are imported using the “import project” method • Transport requests can be imported once into each project system that has the role type
target or production • During Status ‘in Development’ only test transports can be performed • Test transports are not filled, but are transported as transports of copies into the
consolidation buffer • Function groups within the task list must be unlocked by the administrator before they can
be performed Imports with the “Import Project” method into systems that have the role:
![Page 401: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/401.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-401
• type target can only be performed at the beginning of the cycle phase ‘Development w/ release’.
• type production can only be performed during the cycle phase ‘Go-Live’.
![Page 402: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/402.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-402
© SAP AG 2007
Transport buffer Transport buffer
Consistency of Urgent Corrections and Maintenance Activities
DEV QAS PRD
Legend:
Maintenance ActivitiesUrgent CorrectionConsolidated Transport
Urgent Corrections are transported individually, meaning that there is no dependency to other corrections.
They are imported using the transport method import subset and stay in the transport buffer after import.
Urgent Corrections are propagated into other systems at the end of phases in the Maintenance Cycle, together with the Normal Corrections using the transport method import project.
For Normal Corrections, the Import into the follow-on systems takes place in the historical sequence.
![Page 403: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/403.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-403
© SAP AG 2007
Differences Between Urgent and Normal Corrections
Developer and tester must be different persons.
A violation of the separation of functions is only a warning.
Transports can be propagated directly into the follow-on systems, but remain in the transport buffer.
Transports are exported and imported in accordance with the phases of the maintenance cycle.
Transports are generated automatically.
Transports have to be created manually, using the actions of the change transaction.
An individual task list is used.No individual task list. The task list of the maintenance cycle is used.
Urgent CorrectionNormal Correction
![Page 404: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/404.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-404
© SAP AG 2007
System-Demo
System-Demo
![Page 405: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/405.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-405
© SAP AG 2007
Exercise
Exercise
![Page 406: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/406.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-406
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Administration Activities
Maintenance Cycle
Urgent Correction
Normal Correction
Test Message
Maintenance Project
![Page 407: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/407.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-407
© SAP AG 2007
Harmonizing Maintenance Activities
SAP Solution Manager Project (Maintenance Project)
Urgent Corrections(independent of MC)
NormalCorrections
cProject
Test messages(during integration test)
Maintenance CycleDevelopment
w/o or w/ release Test Go-LiveEmergency Correction
Harmonization Harmonization Harmonization
Change requests cannot be exported during the test phase. No exports are possible in maintenance projects. Furthermore, no new Change Requests can be created in implementation projects.
A test message allows a tester to contact a developer, and to create and export a transport request within the test phase of a project cycle.
Phase „Test“ for a Maintenance Cycle: • Test Messages can be created • New normal corrections can be created but not exported any more. • Urgent corrections can still be created and also propagated up to going live.
Test Messages must be released closed before status Emergency Correction is set.
![Page 408: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/408.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-408
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management – Test Message
CycleTransaction
Developer
Tester
ChangeManager
DEV
QAS
PRD
Controlled transports
Controlled transports
Cha
nge
Req
uest
Man
agem
ent
Test Message Cycle
Task-list
Project Phases
A test message is supposed to be created by a tester, but only in the test phase of a certain project: • Log on to development system • Create transport request • Create transport task • Release transport request
Test Messages can be created by using transaction CRMD_ORDER or transaction TEST_CREATE
The test phase represents the integration test phase within a project cycle. Corrections are therefore, not directly linked to a change request but to the complete project cycle.
The Change Manager, Quality Assurance Manager or Project Manager creates the ability to create test messages for a certain project when she/he switches a phase to TEST. Test messages do not require an approval.
The import of corrections into test systems must be performed by the IT Operator by means of periodic running import jobs f.i.
![Page 409: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/409.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-409
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Administration Activities
Maintenance Cycle
Urgent Correction
Normal Correction
Test Message
Maintenance Project
![Page 410: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/410.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-410
© SAP AG 2007
Harmonizing Maintenance Activities
SAP Solution Manager Project (Maintenance Project)
Synchronizing
Maintenance Cycle
Synchronizing Synchronizing
Development(w/o or w/ release) Test Go-LiveEmergency
Correction
cProject
Admin.
Administration messages can be created during all operational phases of a project and allow logon to any project landscape system.
![Page 411: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/411.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-411
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Change Request Management – Administration Message
Change Request
Service Message Requester
ChangeManager
DEV
IT Operator
QAS
PRD
Service Desk
Employee
Serv
ice
Des
kC
hang
e R
eque
st M
anag
emen
t
AdminMessage Cycle
Task-list
Feedback
Project Phases
Administration messages must be approved by a change request, unlike test messages that are open to be performed whenever a project cycle phase is being switched to test..
The administration message is linked to the cycle task-list and custom tasks can be added to the cycle task-list template.
Administration messages allow administration activities in the systems of a project landscape • Logon to target systems • Documentation of administration changes
Additional tasks can be included in the cycle task list and in the activities of the administration message
![Page 412: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/412.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-412
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 1: Change Request Management Overview
Lesson 2: Project and Release Management
Lesson 3: Change Requests
Lesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Lesson 5: Implementation Projects
Lesson 6: Tools
Lesson 7: Best Practices
![Page 413: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/413.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-413
© SAP AG 2007
Harmonizing Project Activities
SAP Solution Manager Project (Imp./Upgrade/Temp.Project)
NormalCorrections
Project CycleDevelopment
(w/o or w/ release) Test Go-LivePreparation for Go-Live
cProject
Test messages(during integration test)
Admin
Harmonization Harmonization Harmonization
For Implementation, Upgrade and Template Projects, Normal Corrections can be only approved during the project phase development w/o release and development w/ release.
![Page 414: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/414.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-414
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 1: Change Request Management Overview
Lesson 2: Project and Release Management
Lesson 3: Change Requests
Lesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Lesson 5: Implementation Projects
Lesson 6: Tools
Lesson 7: Best Practices
![Page 415: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/415.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-415
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 6: Tools
Retrofit
SAP Change Manager
Cross System Object Lock
Critical Object Approval Process
Change Request Management Reporting
![Page 416: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/416.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-416
© SAP AG 2007
Quality
Change Request Managementconfigured
Data Collector job is scheduled
SAP Solution Manager
Development Productive
Poll via RFC
Poll via RFC
Poll via RFC
Change Management Reporting - Requirements
Change Management Reporting in SAP Solution Manager requires that the monitored systems are included in projects for which Change Request Management is activated.
Data from satellite systems is collected every hour (default setting), and after each import that is scheduled by means of the task list
Information on transported objects can be collected on demand. Object Reporting increases the data volume in the SAP Solution Manager if large system landscapes are managed.
![Page 417: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/417.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-417
© SAP AG 2007
Typical Questions to be answered by Change Request Management Reporting
Which change requests are in process/completed...?By status, type, next steps , maintenance window
How long do change requests take to be completed?Per organization, user, type, step
Which transports belong to which change request and vice versa?
What is the current transport status (in which system)?
How many change requests were rejected?Per organization, user, type, by whom and why
How many corrections were withdrawn?Per organization, user, type, by whom and why
![Page 418: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/418.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-418
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Access
Transaction /TMWFLOW/REPORTING (cross-solution reporting)
There are three points of access to Change Request Management Reporting: • Solution specific reporting: transaction DSWP: choose a specific solution Operations
Solution Reporting Change Management execute Change Management Reporting • Cross Solution reporting : transaction SOLAR_EVAL: Analysis Solution Change
Management
![Page 419: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/419.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-419
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Status of Data
Status of Data field displays the date and time when the last data collector run took place. If, for any reason, the data collector could not collect data about a particular system (system downtime, for example), this system is displayed in the Differing Systems field. This field only appears if there are any inconsistencies. By clicking the icon next to the field, you can perform an online update of the system data (may take some time). The Differing Systems field then disappears.
![Page 420: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/420.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-420
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Additional Information
Many more combinations of selection criteria are possible.
You can narrow down a query by returning to the selection screenand entering more information.
If the result list does not provide enough detail, you can always return to the selection screen to select a different view (Result Listgroup box -> Display field)
The Header view displays the least amount of detail; the Header, Project, Task List, and Transports view, for example, displays more details.
![Page 421: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/421.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-421
© SAP AG 2007
Exercise
Exercise
![Page 422: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/422.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-422
© SAP AG 2007
Appendix
PossibilitiesExamples
![Page 423: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/423.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-423
© SAP AG 2007
Selecting List of Events
Results lists can be configured according to the entries in the following fields:
Grid fields:Header, Header, Project, and Task ListHeader, Project, Task List, and Transport RequestsHeader, Project, Task List, Transport Request, and Transport ObjectsSAP Notes and Support PackagesSupport Packages and Systems
(plus any combination these choices)
Layout: Any custom-defined layout
Hits: Maximum number of hits for the result list (Default is 100 hits)
![Page 424: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/424.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-424
© SAP AG 2007
Selecting Transaction Data
Transaction data includes aspects of the cycle transaction, change request, and all change transactions.
Transaction data fields:Document identifier (number, date, transaction type, short text)External reference numberCreate and change dates User status and system status
OrgUnits:Business partner number and functionReference object (such as IBase or product)
Questions:What is the status of normal and urgent corrections of a project cycle that
have to be switched from the Development with Release to the To Be Tested phase?
![Page 425: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/425.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-425
© SAP AG 2007
Selecting Project Header Data
Project header data groups combine project administration data and task list data.
Project header fields of project administration:Project Header (ID, Type, Create, End Date)Logical ComponentTransport TrackIMG and CTS Project
Task list data:All task lists and cycle task listTask list status and dates
Questions:Which change requests and change transactions exist, with which status,
with how many transport requests, and which objects for a selected project?
![Page 426: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/426.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-426
© SAP AG 2007
Selecting System Data and Maintenance Data
Systems with components and maintenance versions can be selected:
System data:Log. System, System Role, Component Type, Component Version
Maintenance data:Support Packages SAP Notes and Note Corrections
Questions:Which component versions are available and in which systems?Which Support Packages or SAP Notes have been implemented, in which systems, and by whom?
![Page 427: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/427.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-427
© SAP AG 2007
Selecting Transport Requests and Objects
Transport Requests with Tasks and Transport Objects Transport Requests and Transport Tasks:
Transport Requests (Name, Type, Category, User, Change Date)Status
Transport Objects:Object NamePackage Name View NameTable Name Table Key
Questions:Which objects exist, in which transport requests, with which status and, which project are they assigned to?Which systems are affected?Does a change request exist and if so, which status does it have?
![Page 428: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/428.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-428
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Selection Example
In Syst. Status group box select In Process
Transaction Type field -> F4 to select relevant types (SDHF, for example)
Display all change transactions (urgent corrections, for example) that are being processed in the current system
![Page 429: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/429.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-429
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Results Example
To navigate to change transaction (here: urgent correction) double-click relevant entry in column Transaction ID
Results of previous queryHeader data about the selected transaction type is displayed
![Page 430: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/430.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-430
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Selection Example
In Result List group box, select Header, Project, Task
List, and Transports
In Document Number field, enter the number
Important: Always choose Reset Selection Fields before starting a new query
Display all transport requests belonging to a change request (orurgent correction, maintenance, and so on)
![Page 431: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/431.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-431
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Results Example
Columns highlighted
in color: You can
navigate to relevant
transaction, project, and
so on by double-clicking relevant
entry
Results of previous query:Header, project, task list, and transport data about the selected transaction are displayed
![Page 432: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/432.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-432
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Selection Example
Display which transactions a transport request belongs to.
![Page 433: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/433.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-433
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Results Example
Results of previous query:Transactions that belong to the selected transport request are displayed.
![Page 434: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/434.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-434
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Selection Example
Use F4 to select partner number of a change manager.
Select transaction type.
Display change requests that were created by a particular change manager.
![Page 435: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/435.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-435
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Results Example
Note: To display additional data on results screen (project or transport data, for example), return to selection screen and select different view in Result List group box
Results of previous query:Change requests created by the selected change manager are displayed.
![Page 436: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/436.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-436
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Selection Example
Use F4 to select Installed Base Component
Display all transactions for a particular production system (IBase component).
![Page 437: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/437.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-437
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Results Example
Note: To display additional data on results screen (project or transport data, for example), return to selection screen and select different view in Result List group box
Results of previous query:Transactions are displayed for the selected IBase component.
![Page 438: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/438.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-438
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Selection Example
Additional selection criteria can be entered (view name, and so on)
Use F4 to select Customizing Objects
Display which transactions have transported a particular Customizing object.
![Page 439: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/439.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-439
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Results Example
Note: To display additional data on results screen (project or transport data, for example), return to selection screen and select different view in Result List group box
Results of previous query:Transactions that have transported the Customizing object T005X are displayed.
![Page 440: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/440.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-440
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Selection Example
Display all transactions whose maintenance project status is completed.
![Page 441: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/441.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-441
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Results Example
Note: To display additional data on results screen (project or transport data, for example), return to selection screen and select different view in Result List group box
Results of previous query:Transactions whose maintenance project status is completedare displayed.
![Page 442: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/442.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-442
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Selection Example for a Specific Solution
Use F4 to select a solution. Alternatively, select a solution in transaction DSWP and execute the Change Request Management report there. The solution is then included automatically in the Solution field of Change Management Reporting.
Display all change requests created for a particular solution (including project data).
![Page 443: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/443.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-443
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 6: Tools
Retrofit
SAP Change Manager
Cross System Object Lock
Critical Object Approval Process
Change Request Management Reporting
![Page 444: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/444.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-444
© SAP AG 2007
Change Manager: Change Tracking I
The Change Tracking function of Change Request Management allows you to track everything relating to changes within the context of a Solution Manager project, or an IMG project. It is possible to track all transport requests from the system where they are created, to the systems into which they are imported. Within the project context, all transport requests that belong to a particular project can be tracked across all the systems in the project landscape.
Project analysis: track all changes for one Solution Manager project or for one IMG project System analysis: compare change requests within systems, differences in the number of
change requests, and differences in the sequence in which requests are exported and imported Request analysis: track change requests, starting with the system where the request was
created, to all systems into which the transport is imported Start analysis: Transaction /TMWFLOW/CMSCONF Choose Tracking
![Page 445: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/445.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-445
© SAP AG 2007
Change Manager: Change Tracking II
Scheduling analysis: analyze one transport track in a maintenance cycle, or analyze one maintenance cycle (including all transport requests)
There are different ways to start the analysis: • Transaction /TMWFLOW/CMSCONF ( Choose Tracking ( Scheduling Analyses tab page
(see slide above) • Transaction /TMWFLOW/MAINTINST ( Scheduling Monitoring tab page
![Page 446: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/446.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-446
The scheduling tool (transaction /TMWFLOW/MAINTINST) performs the following activities: • Processes maintenance cycles for performing your development and maintenance tasks (for
regular maintenance) • Processes implementation projects • Processes template projects • Processes upgrade projects • Displays and changes the status of maintenance cycles, and implementation, template, and
upgrade projects • Distributes software within maintenance cycles • Analyzes maintenance cycles, urgent corrections, and implementation, template and
upgrade projects
© SAP AG 2007
Change Manager: Scheduling Tool
![Page 447: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/447.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-447
Task-lists are based on project landscape role types: • Source System • Target System • Production System • Single System • Post-Processing System
When a project landscape changes, the systems have to be deleted/inserted correctly by an administrator.
Phases can be shifted from within the cycle task-list (as well as the cycle transaction). Cycle task-lists can be activated, locked, and completed. Track structures can be locked against usage from Normal Corrections, test messages, and
administration messages.
© SAP AG 2007
Change Manager: Task-List
![Page 448: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/448.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-448
Scheduling and monitoring batch processing: • Daily imports • Parallel imports into multiple systems (ECC, CRM, BW, …) • Monitor task logs
Additional administrative tasks: • Insert additional tasks • Add notes and documents
© SAP AG 2007
Change Manager: Task List II
![Page 449: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/449.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-449
Monitor tasks with detail log information
© SAP AG 2007
Change Manager: Task List III
![Page 450: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/450.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-450
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 6: Tools
Retrofit
SAP Change Manager
Cross System Object Lock
Critical Object Approval Process
Change Request Management Reporting
![Page 451: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/451.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-451
The locking of objects within an urgent correction, prohibits an urgent correction bypassing another with the same object, but a newer object version.
© SAP AG 2007
Project Buffer Project Buffer
Downgrade Risk with Urgent Corrections
DEV QAS PRD
Legend:
Urgent Corrections
1
2
3
4
31
![Page 452: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/452.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-452
Normal Corrections or project transports that share the same production system, but have different life cycles can include different versions of the same objects.
Depending on the life cycle of parallel projects and on object conflicts, objects might be downgraded.
© SAP AG 2007
Project Buffer Project Buffer
Downgrade Risk with Normal Corrections
DEV QAS PRD
Legend:
Project1Project2Project3
![Page 453: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/453.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-453
© SAP AG 2007
Cross-System Object Lock: Architecture 4.0
Test System Production System
Development System 2Client1
…
SAP Solution Manager Cross-System Object
LockProjects
Development System 1Client1
…
The Cross-System Lock allows locking objects from the change up to the import into production.
The Cross System Lock allows to lock objects that share the same productive system (ending system).
Objects can be locked between projects and urgent corrections within a maintenance project. Locks are performed on LIMU level for Workbench Objects and for Records for
Customizing objects.
![Page 454: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/454.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-454
© SAP AG 2007
Cross-System Lock
Test System Production System
NC(O1) – P2 – SYS1 failedUC(O2) – P1 – SYS1 failed NC(O3) – P2 – SYS1 failed UC(O2) – P2 – SYS2 failed
NC(O3) – P2UC(O2) – P2
SAP Solution Manager Cross-System Object
LockProjects
NC(O1) – P1NC(O1) - P2UC(O2) – P1UC(O2) – P1NC(O3) – P2
The cross-system lock can be activated by the report /TMWFLOW/CONFIG_SERVICES There are four main different locking modes that can be configured (with SP8 for Solution
Manager 4.0 some new scenarios available. For more information see SAP Note 981729): • Cross-project and client-specific
- Urgent corrections cannot interfere – Error - All other changes are recognized – Warning
• Cross-project and cross-client - Urgent corrections cannot interfere, but only regarding cross-client Customizing,
ABAP, and DDIC – Error - All other changes are recognized – Warning
• Project-specific and client-specific - Urgent corrections cannot interfere - only for Customizing but not ABAP and DDIC
data – Error - All other corrections regarding Customizing between projects are recognized, ABAP
and DDIC changes are only recognized within a project – Warning • Project-specific and cross-client
- Urgent corrections cannot interfere regarding cross-client Customizing, ABAP and DDIC within a project context – Error
![Page 455: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/455.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-455
- Other changes are recognized – Warning
![Page 456: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/456.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-456
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 6: Tools
Retrofit
SAP Change Manager
Cross System Object Lock
Critical Object Approval Process
Change Request Management Reporting
![Page 457: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/457.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-457
© SAP AG 2007
Critical Object Approval Process
Critical objects are approved at the time of export.Critical objects are defined as:
ModificationsWorkbench objects in transport piece list formatCustomizing objects in transport piece list format
Critical object check is activated for each logical system:R3TR objectsLIMU objectsLogical objects for Customizing viewsTable entries for Customizing tables
Modification approval is activated once in SAP Solution Manager:Activate for each logical system
For general information about Critical Objects , refer to unit Transport Strategies, Lesson 5 The benefits of this procedure compared to the TMS check for critical transport objects are: • Customizing entries can also be marked as critical. • The check is performed at the time of the export from the development system. This gives
the organization many options on how to deal with that critical object. If a critical object is only detected at the time of the import, it is often difficult to postpone a scheduled Go-Live.
![Page 458: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/458.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-458
© SAP AG 2007
Critical Object Definition
For the definition of critical objects use the transaction /TMWFLOW/CMSCONF select the critical object tab page
The check can be activated on a system-level and a client-specific level.
![Page 459: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/459.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-459
© SAP AG 2007
Critical Object Approval
When a critical object is contained in a transport of the change transaction, no export is possible unless the change manager approves the critical object.
In the Schedule Manager application log, you see the following information: • Transport object checks are activated. • Request <request number> contains critical objects!
![Page 460: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/460.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-460
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request ManagementLesson 6: Tools
Retrofit
SAP Change Manager
Cross System Object Lock
Critical Object Approval Process
Change Request Management Reporting
![Page 461: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/461.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-461
© SAP AG 2007
Review: Phased System Landscape
Maintenance Landscape
QAS
Project Landscape
DEV TST
Ret
rofit
PRDCON
Phased based landscapes presuppose a Retrofit process This process will be supported in the future by Change Request Management (The Retrofit
process will come in 2007)
![Page 462: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/462.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-462
© SAP AG 2007
Outlook: Retrofit Process
A retrofit system must exist in the solution manager maintenance project (role type: post processing system). It should be a development system of an other project, for example, an implementation project.
The Task-List of the maintenance project will have two new tasks: • In the Section General Task Assign post processing system to development system • In the Track Section Post processing systems Retrofit Systems Start Retrofit
After the start of the Retrofit Task transport, requests from the maintenance project, for which a retrofit is to take place can be selected.
For the execution of the Retrofit, a transport request must already exit in the retrofit system. The Retrofit process is based on the following tools: • Correction Workbench (SCWB) for Workbench Objects • Customizing Synchronization (Customizing Scout) for Customizing Objects
![Page 463: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/463.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-463
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 1: Change Request Management Overview
Lesson 2: Project and Release Management
Lesson 3: Change Requests
Lesson 4: Maintenance Activities
Lesson 5: Implementation Projects
Lesson 6: Tools
Lesson 7: Best Practices
![Page 464: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/464.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-464
© SAP AG 2007
Best Practices
Change Request Management workflows are based on best practices of how to manage short term changes, maintenance projects and new implementations.
Urgent Corrections for immediate changeNormal Corrections for midterm and long-term changesMaintenance projects for housekeeping activitiesImplementation projects for new implementations
![Page 465: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/465.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-465
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 7: Best Practices
Review Best Practice for Transport Management
Use Case: System Landscape Approach
Use Case: Implementation Complexity
![Page 466: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/466.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-466
© SAP AG 2007
Best Practices: Usage of Projects
Development Test Production
Implementation Project Market CampaignComplaint Management
…Maintenance Project ERP
… Maintenance Cycles
Implementation Projects
… Urgent Corrections
Rollout Brazil
Advantages: • Comprehensive customizing and development activities are grouped together • Basis for Release Management
![Page 467: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/467.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-467
© SAP AG 2007
Best Practices: Phase Switching
NormalCorrections
Project PhasesDevelopment
(w/o or w/ release) Test Go-LiveEmergency Correction
No export No export No export
…
Urgent Corrections(independent of MC)
SAP Solution Manager Project (Maintenance Project)
cProject
Synchronizing Synchronizing Synchronizing
Advantages: • All projects can choose one of the selected Go-Live dates. • All projects that Go-Live together also go into the test phase together. • Higher Stability in Production • Changes in production only at certain points
![Page 468: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/468.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-468
© SAP AG 2007
Best Practices: Urgent Corrections are Preliminary Transports
Legend:
Maintenance ActivitiesUrgent CorrectionConsolidated Transport
Transport buffer Transport buffer
DEV QAS PRD
Advantage: • Consolidated Transports guarantee consistent project import/deployment.
![Page 469: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/469.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-469
© SAP AG 2007
Project buffer Project buffer
Best Practices: Usage of Test Transports
DEV QAS PRD
Legend:
Normal CorrectionsTest Transports (Transport of Copies)
Advantage: • The Project buffer of the PRD System only contains consolidated changes.
![Page 470: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/470.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-470
© SAP AG 2007
Best Practice: Cross-System Object Lock
Development System 1Client1
…Production System
Development System 2Client1
…
Test System
SAP Solution Manager Cross-System Object
LockProjects
Advantages: • Identify changes on the same objects in different projects • Minimize Risk of downgrades through different go-live dates of changes from different
projects
![Page 471: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/471.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-471
© SAP AG 2007
Best Practices: Critical Object Approval
Advantage: • Identify changes on critical objects (Prerequisite: knowledge of this objects)
![Page 472: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/472.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-472
© SAP AG 2007
Best Practices: Retrofit
Maintenance Landscape
QAS
Project Landscape
DEV TST
Ret
rofit
PRDCON
Advantages: • Tool based • Minimized Risk through integration in the maintenance project • Logging of the changes
![Page 473: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/473.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-473
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 7: Best Practices
Review Best Practice for Transport Management
Use Case: System Landscape Approach
Use Case: Implementation Complexity
![Page 474: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/474.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-474
© SAP AG 2007
DEV QAS PRDPRE
Change Request Management with Pre-Production System (example)
Best Practice:
Cross System Lock Critical Object Approval Process Additional Recommendations: Allocation of systems to phases • Development phase: DEV and QAS (using test transport for unit tests) • Test phase: PRE • Go-Live: PRD
Synchronize Go-Live with set-up of Release Management process: • all projects which are part of the next Go-Live enter the pre-production system together. • All other projects have to stay in the development or unit test environment.
![Page 475: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/475.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-475
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management with Phased System Landscape (example)
Maintenance Landscape
QAS
Project Landscape
DEV TST
Ret
rofit
PRDCON
This slide shows one of the possibilities of using a phased based system landscape with change request management.
Maintenance Project (MAINT): • Contains the systems CON, QAS and PRD
Implementation Project (IMPL): • Contains the systems DEV, TST, CON, QAS and PRD
Recommendations: • Use Retrofit to avoid Downgrade • Use Critical Object Approval Process • Use system object lock
Note: This is only an example and not the only possibilities.
![Page 476: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/476.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-476
© SAP AG 2007
Phased System Landscape: Phase Development
Maintenance Landscape
CON QAS
Project Landscape
DEV TST
Ret
rofit
PRD
The Implementation Project (IMPL) is in the Phase Development • The Systems CON, QAS and PRD are only virtual systems in the transport management
system for this landscape. • Unit test in system TST is based on test transports
All changes from the maintenance project (MAINT) must be taken over with a retrofit process into the project landscape.
![Page 477: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/477.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-477
© SAP AG 2007
Phased System Landscape: Phase Test
Maintenance Landscape
CON
Project Landscape
DEV TST
Ret
rofit
PRD
QAS
In Phase Switch activities, some aspects need to be synchronized: • Switch the maintenance project (MAINT) to Go-Live (no further usage until next phase) • Set up new maintenance project (MAINT_URGENT) with transaction type SDMM (only
urgent corrections are possible, for more information see SAP Note 952803 ) for CON and PRD
• Set up retrofit process for the MAINT_UPG project • Copy PRD to QAS • Replace in the IMPL project the virtual QAS with the real QAS system
Phase Test: • In the IMPL project, all Normal Corrections are consolidated and imported into the QAS
System • Error handling with Test Messages
![Page 478: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/478.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-478
© SAP AG 2007
Phased System Landscape: Phase Go-Live
CON
Project Landscape
DEV TST
Ret
rofit
PRD
QAS
Cut-Over
Maintenance Landscape
Phase Switch activities: • Transport the project buffer into the CON and PRD system. • The IMPL project will be set to Go-Live and then to close.
![Page 479: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/479.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-479
© SAP AG 2007
Phased System Landscape: Next Cycle
Maintenance Landscape
QAS
Project Landscape
DEV TST
Ret
rofit
PRDCON
Phase Switch activities: • Switch the maintenance project (MAINT_URGENT) to Go-Live (no new urgent
corrections are possible). • Copy PRD to QAS. • Set the maintenance project (MAINT) to development with release. New changes are
possible. • Integrate the QAS system in the Maintenance landscape.
![Page 480: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/480.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-480
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Unit Overview Diagram
Change Request Management
Lesson 7: Best Practices
Review Best Practice for Transport Management
Use Case: System Landscape Approach
Use Case: Implementation Complexity
![Page 481: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/481.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-481
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Transport Management Approach
CycleTransaction
DEV
QAS
PRD
Controlled transports
Controlled transportsCha
nge
Req
uest
Man
agem
ent
IT Operator
Project Cycle
Cycle Task-List
This scenario has the lowest complexity: • Usage of the task-list instead of TMS to import transports • Usage of the task-list instead of Workbench Organizer to create transport requests
Advantages: • projects and phase switching make release management possible • Improved tracking of transports with the Change Manager
![Page 482: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/482.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-482
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Extension: Change Document
Developer
Tester
DEV
IT Operator
QAS
PRD
Controlled transports
Controlled transports
Cha
nge
Req
uest
Man
agem
ent
ChangeDocument Task-
List
Project Cycle
This scenario is the entry in the CRM based transaction. In addition to the task-list functionality, you can use change documents to manage: • Only urgent corrections • Urgent and Normal Corrections
Advantages: • Comprehensible documentation of implemented changes and their ramifications • Tracking and audit ability • Consistent handling of urgent corrections
![Page 483: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/483.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-483
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Extension: Approval Process
Change Request
Requester
ChangeManager
DEV
QAS
PRD
Cha
nge
Req
uest
Man
agem
ent
ChangeDocument Task-
List
Project Cycle
Developer
Tester
IT Operator
Controlled transports
Controlled transports
This is the complete Change Request Management Scenario. Advantages: • All best practices available • Comprehensible documentation of planned and implemented changes and their
ramifications • Improved efficiency of change management projects • Minimizes business disruptions • Tracking and audit ability
![Page 484: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/484.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-484
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Solution Manager
Extension: Service Desk
Change Request
Service Message
PRD
Service Desk Employee
Serv
ice
Des
kC
hang
e R
eque
st M
anag
emen
t
ChangeDocument Task-
List
Feedback
Project Cycle
Requester
ChangeManagerDeveloper
Tester
IT Operator
DEV
QAS
Controlled transports
Controlled transports
This Extension bridges the gap between the incident / problem management process and the change / release management process.
![Page 485: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/485.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-485
© SAP AG 2007
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:Understand important steps in the approval of a change requests
Know how change requests can be handled in SAP Solution Manager
Describe SAP’s best practices in transport management which are implemented in the SAP Solution Manager
![Page 486: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/486.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-486
![Page 487: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/487.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-487
Exercises
Unit: Change Request Management Lesson: Change Requests
At the end of this exercise you will be able to: • Create a change request and thereby create a change document in the
SAP Solution Manager • Approve a change request and thereby create a follow up change
document
In this exercise you will go through the process where you act as a requester that creates a change request and as a change manager who approves the change request and generates by this activity a change document.
Prerequisites: A maintenance project has been generated (system demo). 7-1 Create a change request. Describe your requirements.
In this part you are acting as requestor 7-1-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system and go to transaction
CRMD_ORDER. 7-1-2 Setup the buttons to create a Support Message (SLFN), Change Request
(SDCR) and Normal Correction (SDMJ) 7-1-3 Create a change request 7-1-4 Maintain description and partner functions. 7-1-5 Search for the production system that you want to make the change for.
Search in IBase “1” for that. 7-1-6 Maintain a change description 7-1-7 Save the change request and go back 7-1-8 Write down the transaction number after saving:
_______________________________________
![Page 488: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/488.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-488
7-2 Find the change request. Take the change request into process.
In this part you are acting as a change manager 7-2-1 Find the Change Request via selection.
Go to the transaction monitor (transaction CRM_DNO_MONITOR) 7-2-2 Enter selection criteria to get your change request. 7-2-3 On the result list you should find the change request that you just created.
Double-click on the line to navigate into the change request 7-2-4 Go into change mode. 7-2-5 Classify the change request as a normal correction.
Saving should make the red error sign in the upper right corner disappear. After classifying the change request the red light is gone and processing can continue. Saving should make the red error sign in the upper right corner disappear.
7-2-6 Approve the change request and save the document. 7-2-7 Write down the number of the change document. Choose document flow
to access the number. _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Go back to SAP Easy Access menu.
![Page 489: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/489.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-489
Exercises
Unit: Change Request Management Lesson: Maintenance Activities
At the end of this exercise you will be able to: • Process a change document in the SAP Solution Manager. Implement
the necessary corrections.
In this exercise you will go through the development process during an urgent correction. The change nanager has approved the change request and by this activity a change document was generated. The change document then passes through the development phase.
7-3 Find the change document. Take the change document in development. In this part
you are acting as a Developer. 7-3-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system. Find your change document
(normal correction) via selection in the transaction monitor. 7-3-2 Open your change document. 7-3-3 Go into change mode. 7-3-4 Verify that the IBase component equals the IBase component of the
production system and change it manually if necessary. The IBase component is used to calculate the right maintenance system. Therefore, it is crucial that you use the right iBase component here. Write the IBase component down. _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________
7-3-5 Click on button Actions and choose Set to ‘In Development’. Save the document
7-3-6 Click on button Actions and choose Create Transport Request Save the document Check in the pop-up if your user is request owner and assigned to the tasks. Correct if necessary and confirm.
7-3-7 Click on button Actions and choose Logon to System to log on to the development system via a trusted RFC connection.
![Page 490: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/490.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-490
7-3-8 Call transaction SM30 to maintain table T009T. 7-3-9 Search for the entry of your user and change the description 7-3-10 Save your entry. When prompted for a transport request, choose your own
customizing task via the button Own Requests.
![Page 491: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/491.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-491
7-3-11 After saving your entry go to transaction SE09 in the development system. Release your customizing task that refers to your change document number.
7-3-12 To navigate back to the change document, choose ‘Back’ twice, and then ‘Exit’. You are now back in the Change Document.
7-3-13 Click on the button Actions and choose Complete Development. Choose Save.
7-3-14 Leave the document and the monitor list.
![Page 492: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/492.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-492
Exercises
Unit: Change Request Management Lesson: Tools
At the end of this exercise you will be able to: • Run different selections in the area of the Change Request
Management
In this exercise you will go through the reporting part of Change Request Management You will learn how to select on project, transaction, transport order, and object level.
7-4 Select to transport level by using a Service Order.
7-4-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system and find the change management reporting.
7-4-2 In the result list screen area choose D Header, Project, Task List, and Transports via the F4 help button.
7-4-3 Open the transaction data screen area 7-4-4 In the field Document Number fill in the number of your change document
you wrote down in Exercise “Change Requests” 7-4-5 Execute your selection. 7-4-6 Check your results and find the transport request
Please write down the transport request:
7-5 Select to object level by using a transport order. 7-5-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system and find the change
management reporting. 7-5-2 In the result list screen area choose E Header, Project, Task List,
Transports, and Objects via the F4 help button. 7-5-3 Open the transport request screen area. 7-5-4 In the field Request/Task fill in the number of the transport request you
just wrote down in 1-1-6. 7-5-5 Execute your selection. 7-5-6 Check your results and find the object.
Write down the object:
![Page 493: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/493.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-493
7-6 Select to transport level by using an object. 7-6-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system and find the change
management reporting. 7-6-2 In the result list screen area choose E Header, Project, Task List,
Transports, and Objects via the F4 help button. 7-6-3 Open the transport objects screen area. 7-6-4 In the field Table Name enter “T009T” and in the field Table Keys enter
your object from 1-2-6. 7-6-5 Execute your selection. 7-6-6 Check your results.
![Page 494: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/494.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-494
Solutions
Unit: Change Request Management Lesson: Change Requests
7-1 Create a Change Request. Describe your requirements. In this part you are acting as
Requestor 7-1-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system. Enter the transaction code
“crmD_ORder” into the command field and choose Enter. 7-1-2 Press the button Settings (Ctrl+Shift+F8). In the tab Specific enter the
transaction types SLFN, SDCR and SDMJ as pushbuttons. 7-1-3 You are on the order processing screen now. Create a change request
Press Button , or navigate via menu Business Transaction -> Create -> Service Process -> Change Request
7-1-4 Maintain Description and Partner functions. Write a short description for the change and search for your BP in the partner functions Requester and Change Manager. Use Partner function “21” as Sold-to-Party.
7-1-5 Search for the production System that you want to make the change for. Press the F4 Help for the field Component. In the pop-up insert Installed Base “1” and confirm. Select component “94 Production Simulation”
7-1-6 Maintain a change description Go to the text maintenance box and select Text type “Description of change”. Write down your own description.
7-1-7 Save the Change request and go back The red light in the upper right corner indicates that the change request contains errors. Just ignore that, you will be able to save anyway. In this case the red light is triggered by the fact that the change request has not been classified according to the standard scenarios, yet.
![Page 495: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/495.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-495
7-2 Find the change request. Take the change request into process. In this part you are acting as a change manager 7-2-1 Find the Change Request via selection.
Enter the transaction code “crm_DNO_MOnitor” into the command field and choose Enter.
7-2-2 Enter selection criteria to get your change requests. In the list selection check Mine in the business partner section and enter “SDCR” as transaction type in the service process section Choose Execute.
7-2-3 On the following monitor list, you should find the change request that you
just created. Double-click on the line to navigate into the change request.
7-2-4 Go into change mode: 7-2-5 Classify the change request as a normal correction.
Open the F4 help at the field Subject. There you can choose Normal Correction (Maintenance). Save.
7-2-6 Approve the change request. Choose button Actions and then Authorize Change Request.
Save the document. The change document is being generated. In general, operational activities like triggering the creation of a change document are always linked to a certain status of the current document. This ensures consistency between the administrational view and the technical execution.
![Page 496: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/496.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-496
When a pop-up appears that asks you for a task list/maintenance cycle please choose the maintenance cycle of your group from Exercise 1.
![Page 497: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/497.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-497
7-2-7 Write down the change document number. Choose document flow to access the number. _____________________________________________________________
• Leave the Change Request via the ‘Back’ arrow (F3) in the user interface.
• Leave the monitor list via the ‘Back’ arrow (F3) in the user interface.
![Page 498: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/498.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-498
![Page 499: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/499.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-499
Solutions
Unit: Change Request Management Lesson: Maintenance Activities
7-3 Find the Change Document. Take the Change Document in development. In this part you are acting as a Developer. 7-3-1 Logon to the SAP Solution Manager system. Find the change document
(urgent correction) via selection. Type the transaction code “crm_DNO_MOnitor” into the command field and choose Enter. Enter selection criteria to get your change requests. In the List selection check “Mine” in the Business Partner section and enter “SDMJ” as transaction type in the Service Process section Execute
7-3-2 On the following monitor list, you should find the change document that you created in the last exercise. Double-click on the line to navigate into the change document (Fast Entry view).
7-3-3 Go into change mode. 7-3-4 Verify that the Ibase component equals the Ibase component of the
production system and change it manually if necessary. The Ibase component is used to calculate the right maintenance system. Therefore, it is crucial that you use the right Ibase component here. Write the Ibase component down.
7-3-5 Click on button Actions and choose Set to ‘In Development’. Save the document
7-3-6 Click on button Actions and choose Create Transport Request Save the document Check in the pop-up if your user is request owner and assigned to the tasks. Correct if necessary and confirm.
7-3-7 Click on the button Actions and choose Logon to System to logon to the development system via a trusted RFC connection.
7-3-8 Call transaction SM30. In the field Table/View enter “T009T”. Choose
7-3-9 Search for the entry of your user and change the description.
![Page 500: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/500.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-500
7-3-10 Save your entry. When prompted for a transport request, choose your own customizing task via the button Own Requests Your customizing transport contains the number of your change document in its description. Write down the transport request number. _____________________________________________________________
7-3-11 After saving your entry, go to transaction SE09 in the development
system. Choose . Choose your customizing task that refers to your change document number and release it: . You must not release the transport request as this will be done by the SAP Solution Manager in the background. Furthermore, you are not allowed to release the transport request because the CTS status switches do not authorize you to do so.
7-3-12 To navigate back into the change document, choose ‘Back’ (F3) twice, and then ‘Exit’. You are now back in the Change Document.
7-3-13 Click on the button Actions and choose Complete Development. Choose Save.
7-3-14 Leave the document and the monitor list.
![Page 501: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/501.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-501
Solutions
Unit: Change Request Management Lesson: Tools
7-4 Select to transport level by using a service order.
7-4-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system and find the change management reporting: Choose SAP menu Tools SAP Solution Manager SOLAR_EVAL – Project Analysis or type the transaction code “SOLAR_EVAL” into the command field and choose Enter. You are in the solution manager analysis now, here choose Solution Change Management. You can also navigate directly to the change management reporting screen by using the transaction code “/n/tmwflow/reporting” in the command field and choosing Enter.
7-4-2 In the result list screen area please choose D Header, Project, Task List, and Transports via the F4 help button.
7-4-3 Open the transaction data screen area by clicking the button. 7-4-4 In the field Document Number fill in the number of your change document
you wrote down in Exercise “Change Requests” 7-4-5 Execute your selection
Press button or choose F8. 7-4-6 Check your results and find the transport request.
Please write down the transport request:
7-5 Select to object level by using a transport order. 7-5-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system and find the change
management reporting. Choose SAP menu Tools SAP Solution Manager SOLAR_EVAL - Project Analysis or type the transaction code “SOLAR_EVAL” into the command field and choose Enter. You are in the solution manager analysis now, here choose: Solution Change Management You can also navigate directly to the change management reporting screen by using the transaction “code /n/tmwflow/reporting” in the command field and choosing Enter.
![Page 502: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/502.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 7-502
7-5-2 In the result list screen area choose E Header, Project, Task List, Transports, and Objects via the F4 help button.
7-5-3 Open the transport request screen area by clicking the button. 7-5-4 In the field Request/Task fill in the number of the transport request you
just wrote down in 1-1-6. 7-5-5 Execute your selection.
Press button or choose F8. 7-5-6 Check your results and find the object.
Please write down the object: 7-6 Select to transport level by using an object.
7-6-1 Log on to the SAP Solution Manager system and find the change management reporting. Choose SAP menu Tools SAP Solution Manager SOLAR_EVAL – Project Analysis or type the transaction code “SOLAR_EVAL” into the command field and choose Enter. You are in the solution manager analysis now, here choose: Solution Change Management You can also navigate directly to the change management reporting screen by using the transaction code “/n/tmwflow/reporting” in the command field and choosing Enter.
7-6-2 In the Result List screen area choose E Header, Project, Task List, Transports, and Objects via the F4 help button.
7-6-3 Open the transport objects screen area by clicking the button. 7-6-4 In the field Table Name fill in “T009T” and in the field Table Keys fill in
your object from 1-2-6.
7-6-5 Execute your selection. Press button or choose F8.
7-6-6 Check your results.
![Page 503: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/503.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-503
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
Netweaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
Maintenance Management
![Page 504: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/504.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-504
© SAP AG 2007
Contents:
SAP Maintenance Strategy
Types of Corrections
Support Package Stack Strategy
Support Package Content Analysis
Software Life-cycle Management Tools
Maintenance Optimizer
HotNews Inbox
Maintenance Management
![Page 505: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/505.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-505
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management: Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
Know the SAP Maintenance Strategy
Describe all types of patches delivered by SAP
Explain the support package stack strategy
Execute side effect Reporting for a Support Package Queue
Estimate the impact of a support package import into a critical system
Use the software lifecycle management tools to implement patches and find information on current patch levels
Explain the additional benefit of the SAP Solution Manager in the maintenance process
![Page 506: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/506.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-506
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Lesson 7: Maintenance Optimizer
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
Lesson 8: HotNews Inbox
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
![Page 507: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/507.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-507
© SAP AG 2007
2011 2012
Release and Maintenance Strategy mySAP ERP
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010
mySAP ERP2004
SAP R/3 Enterprise
47x200
SAP R/3 4.6C
SAP R/3 3.1I – 4.6B
mySAP ERP2005
Dec Mar
Dec Mar
This strategy is also valid for all industry-specific add-on applications based on the releases above.
Mar
Mar
2013
Dec
Mar
Mainstr.Maint.
Ext. Maint. (+ 2%)*
Ext. Maintenance (+ 4%)*
Customer-SpecificMaintenance
Mainstream Maintenance Ext. Maint. (+ 2%)*
Ext. Maintenance (+ 4%)*
Customer-SpecificMaintenance
* Overall payment is SAP Standard Support / SAP Premium Support fee plus additional fee of 2% or 4% of the maintenance base per year.
SAP R/3 Enterprise
47x110Mainstream Maintenance Ext. Maint.
(+ 2%)*Ext. Maintenance
(+ 4%)*Customer-Specific
Maintenance
Ext. Maint. (+ 2%)*
Ext. Maintenance (+ 4%)*
Customer-SpecificMaintenanceMainstream Maintenance
Ext. Maint.(+ 4%)*
Customer-SpecificMaintenance
Jun
Oct Mar
Mainstream Maintenance Ext. Maint. (+ 2%)*
Ext. Maintenance (+ 4%)*
Ramp-Up
2014 2015 2016
Customer-SpecificMaintenance
Enh. Packages2005.32005.22005.1
The 5-1-2 maintenance strategy was introduced in 2004. It applies to releases based on SAP NetWeaver 2004 and higher.
The maintenance phases have the following durations: • Five (5) years of mainstream maintenance at the SAP Standard Support or SAP Premium
Support fee, depending on which support option the customer chooses • One (1) year of extended maintenance at an additional 2% fee • Two (2) years of extended maintenance at an additional 4% fee • Thereafter, the release enters customer-specific maintenance.
![Page 508: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/508.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-508
© SAP AG 2007
Product Availability Matrix
View in Service Marketplace:All product versions are displayed with general availability date and end of maintenance date.
To continue, choose a product
version
To continue, choose a product
version
http://service.sap.com/pam
The Product Availability Matrix bundles technical and release planning information on SAP components for quick reference. You will find information on the availability of SAP component releases (product versions), maintenance end dates and upgrade paths, as well as technical release information (DB-platforms, JSE-platforms, operating systems, languages, countries etc.). A SAP component release is structured into instances. An instance is a bundle of technically dependent software component versions to be installed on one single logical system. The technical release information is displayed per instance. Example: The SAP component release SAP R/3 4.6C is structured into the instances R/3 Server, Frontend GUIs etc. The R/3 Server itself consists of the software component versions SAP APPL 4.6C, SAP HR 4.6C, SAP ABA 4.6C, SAP BASIS 4.6C and SAP Kernel 4.6C 32-BIT (or a newer downward compatible one).
![Page 509: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/509.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-509
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Lesson 7: Maintenance Optimizer
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
Lesson 8: HotNews Inbox
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
![Page 510: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/510.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-510
© SAP AG 2007
Types of Corrections
Support Package Stack
SAP Kernel Patch
Standard correction process
Java Single Patch (Fix)SAP Note Correction (ABAP)
Java Support Package
Java Support Package Patch
ABAP Support Package
Emergency correction process
JavaABAPCorrection Process
Standard correction process: • Support Package Stack:
− Description: The Support Package Stack is a list of ABAP and Java Support Packages for all software components (SC) included in SAP NetWeaver. It is used to bring each Software Component of SAP NetWeaver to a defined SP level.
• ABAP Support Package: − Description: ABAP Support Packages contain quality improvements for the SAP
system, or make necessary adjustments due to legal changes, for example. The objects affected are replaced in your system.
• Java Support Package: − Description: Java Support Packages are used to ship correction levels of Software
Components. They correspond to the ABAP Support Packages.
Emergency correction process: • SAP Note Correction (ABAP):
− Description: SAP Note Corrections contain single ABAP fixes. • Java Support Package Patch:
![Page 511: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/511.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-511
− Description: A Java Support Package patch contains corrections for the Java Software Components. Java Support Package patches are normally created and released on demand. They correspond to a SAP Note that describes the same correction.
![Page 512: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/512.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-512
• Java Single Patch: − Description: A full version of a single Development Component. Java single patches
correspond to a SAP Note that describes the corresponding prerequisites and dependencies.
![Page 513: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/513.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-513
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
Java Corrections
ABAP Corrections
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
![Page 514: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/514.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-514
© SAP AG 2007
SoftwareComponents
ReleaseP1 P2
S1 S2
Products
SupportPackage (in ABAP, not the complete SC is shipped - only the changed objects)
Component Model and Maintenance
Packages
O1
D4
O3
D7
D8D6
D5
D11
D10D9
NotesO2Objects
The SAP component model for ABAP objects is shown above: • Products are updated by installations and upgrades. • Software components are updated by Support Packages and Add-ons. • Single objects an be updated by SAP Notes.
![Page 515: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/515.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-515
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Note in the Service Marketplace
SAP Notes: • Describe how to remove known errors in the SAP System. They include a description of
the following: − the symptoms of the error − the root cause of the error − the release and Support Package status for which they are valid
• They contain (depending on the type of error): − workarounds − descriptions of how to correct the source code (correction instructions) − links to Support Packages that correct the problem
• Correction instructions change single lines of coding. • SAP Notes with correction instructions are implemented with the Note Assistant in the
development system, and then forwarded by transports to production.
![Page 516: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/516.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-516
© SAP AG 2007
Correction Instruction: Changing a Function Module
FUNCTION test_package_attributes.*"----------------------------------------------------------------------*"*“Local Interface:*" IMPORTING*" VALUE(IV_PATCH) LIKE PAT03-PATCH*" EXPORTING*" VALUE(ES_PAT03) LIKE PAT03 STRUCTURE PAT03*" TABLES*" T_PAT07 STRUCTURE PAT07*" T_PAT08 STRUCTURE PAT08*" EXCEPTIONS*" NOTHING_FOUND*"----------------------------------------------------------------------
SELECT * FROM pat03WHERE patch = iv_patch.
ENDSELECT.
IF sy-subrc <> 0.RAISE nothing_found.
ENDIF.
MOVE-CORRESPONDING pat03 TO es_pat03.
SELECT * FROM pat07 INTO TABLE t_pat07WHERE patch = iv_patch.
SELECT * FROM pat08 INTO TABLE t_pat08WHERE patch = iv_patch.
CALL SCREEN 0100 STARTING AT 14 2.
ENDFUNCTION.
FUNCTION test_package_attributes.*"----------------------------------------------------------------------*"*“Local Interface:*" IMPORTING*" VALUE(IV_PATCH) LIKE PAT03-PATCH*" EXPORTING*" VALUE(ES_PAT03) LIKE PAT03 STRUCTURE PAT03*" TABLES*" T_PAT07 STRUCTURE PAT07*" EXCEPTIONS*" NOTHING_FOUND*"----------------------------------------------------------------------
SELECT * FROM pat03 INTO es_pat03WHERE patch = iv_patch.
ENDSELECT.
IF sy-subrc <> 0.RAISE nothing_found.
ENDIF.
SELECT * FROM pat07 INTO TABLE t_pat07WHERE patch = iv_patch.
ENDFUNCTION.
Old version New version
Objects that can be changed with the Note Assistant: • New Objects can be created • CLAS: Global ABAP Classes (ABAP-OO) • INTF: Interfaces (ABAP-OO) • REPS: ABAP programs and includes • FUNC: Function modules with interface and all attributes • DYNP: Screens with all attributes • TYPD: Type Pools • WAPP: Business Server Pages • SMIM: MIME objects (only with small data volume) • IAMU, IARP, IASP, IATU: Internet transaction server • ENH*: Enhancement objects
Objects which are not supported: • Creating an entire function group • BSP applications • Deleting an object • Changes to tabular content (R3TR TABU)
![Page 517: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/517.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-517
• Language dependent texts • DDIC objects
![Page 518: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/518.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-518
© SAP AG 2007
Note Browser
The Note Browser gives you a list of all SAP notesSelect all notes with implementation status “Completely implemented”Transaction SNOTE GOTO SAP Note Browser
The Note Browser gives you a list of all SAP notes which are imported into an ABAP system Select all notes with implementation status “Completely implemented” Transaction SNOTE GOTO SAP Note Browser
![Page 519: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/519.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-519
© SAP AG 2007
ABAP Support Packages
http://service.sap.com/swdc
ABAP Support Packages: • All note corrections within a certain time period are bundled into a support package. • A support package contains full objects, not just single lines of coding. • Support packages are delivered for each software component. • Support packages are incremental. That means that all support packages of a software
component must be implemented. • Support Packages contain all objects that were changed in a certain time period.
![Page 520: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/520.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-520
© SAP AG 2007
System Status: Version Information of ABAP Systems
The version information of ABAP based systems can be reached via the Menu Bar: • System Status Button „Component information“
![Page 521: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/521.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-521
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
Java Corrections
ABAP Corrections
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
![Page 522: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/522.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-522
© SAP AG 2007
(Fix)
Component Model and Maintenance
SoftwareComponents
ReleaseP1 P2
S1 S2
Products
SupportPackage (in JAVA, the complete SC is Shippe. Packages are cumulative)
Packages
O1
D4
O3
D7
D8D6
D5
D11
D10D9
O2Objects
Software maintenance is organized into three tiers: Products are installed or undergo an upgrade to a new release. A release is a full delivery of
software components that provide new functions (and possibly user interfaces) or improvements. Installation and upgrade are not performed with CMS resources.
A Support Package (SP) is (unlike ABAP) a full delivery of one (or more) software component(s) and contains a number of fixes. The usual file format of an SP is the SCA format. Support Packages are implemented using the Java Support Package Manager Tool (JSPM). JSPM distinguishes between Systems that are under NWDI control and systems that are not under NWDI control.
Fixes are full deliveries of a development component that allow a quick error correction, before the complete SP is available. The usual file format is the SDA format. • Hint: SAP usually does not yet deliver fixes. The smallest unit of delivery of SAP
software is a Support Package.
Development Objects (DOs) • Stored as versioned files in the source repository (DTR) • Example: Web Dynpro view, table definition, Java source file
![Page 523: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/523.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-523
Java-based Support Packages are cumulative. Update from a lower SP Stack to a higher SP Stack only requires the import of the appropriate target SP Stack
![Page 524: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/524.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-524
© SAP AG 2007
Java Fixes
Software Component
Development Component 1
Development Component 2
Development Component 3
Development Component 3
Fix
The smallest unit that can be delivered is the softwaredevelopment component, which is shipped in a softwaredevelopment archive (SDA)A fix corrects a single errorSDA-file fixes are used for preliminary correction in urgent cases or for releases prior to SAP NetWeaver 2004sPublished on demand as attachment in SAP notes or customermessagesOnly apply fixes with guidance from SAP’s support. Apply the next higher support package stack instead
Java Objects are grouped in Development Components. Development Components are grouped in Software Components. The smallest unit that can be delivered is a complete Development Component (Fixes). Fixes should only be applied in emergency situations and with guidance from SAP Support.
![Page 525: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/525.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-525
© SAP AG 2007
Java Support Packages
SCA, SP20
SDA 1SP18
SDA 2SP20
SDA 3SP16
SDA 4SP17
SDA 5SP20
Java Support Packages:Include all corrections and updates in the period since the last support packageSupport packages are delivered for software components. They areshipped as software component archives (SCA) Software component archives contain several software developmentarchivesSupport packages are delivered at regular intervals as part of a supportpackage stack according to a scheduleJava support packages are cumulative. That means each supportpackage contains all of the predecessors
![Page 526: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/526.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-526
© SAP AG 2007
Java Patches
SCA, SP20, Patch 1
SDA 1SP18
SDA 2SP20
SDA 3SP16
SDA 4SP17
SDA 5Fix
Java Patches (as of Netweaver 2004s):Like a regular support package, a patch contains a fullsoftware component and is delivered as software componentarchive (SCA).A patch contains the latest regular support package plus all fixes that were published since the release of the latestsupport package.It is published on demand.
![Page 527: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/527.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-527
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Service Marketplace
Java Patches and Support Packages are published on the SAP Service Marketplace, quick link /swdc
Java Support Packages and Patches are delivered as full Software Component Archives. Support Packages have Patch Level 0. Patches have a higher Patch Level.
Patches are always created for the highest Support Package Level. They are also created for lower Support Package Levels, if required.
If you click on „Info“ of a patch, you see a list of notes which describe the individual corrections, which are solved with the patch. For support packages, there is a summary note which describes all corrections in the support package.
![Page 528: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/528.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-528
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Notes
SAP Notes describe single bugs which are fixed in patches.
This note describes a problem which is solved by support packages or patches. One solution is to apply NW04s, SP11. Patches were also provided for the support package levels 09 and 10.
![Page 529: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/529.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-529
© SAP AG 2007
Component Info: Version Information of Java Systems
Release 7.00 SP Level 10
Patch 1
http://<hostname>:<port>/sap/monitoring/ComponentInfo
The version information of a JAVA based system can be seen in the Component Information. http://<hostname>:<port>/sap/monitoring/ComponentInfo For each software component, the Version string shows Release, Support Package and
Patchlevel.
![Page 530: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/530.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-530
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Lesson 7: Maintenance Optimizer
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
Lesson 8: HotNews Inbox
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
![Page 531: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/531.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-531
© SAP AG 2007
R/3
Support Package Stacks (SP Stacks)
Appl.
ABA
Basis
Kernel
Appl.
ABA
Basis
Kernel
Appl.
ABA
Basis
Kernel
SAP releases sets of Support Packages per product and quarter – the SAP Support Package Stacks (SP Stacks)
Support Packages & patches of SP Stacks must be used in the given combination,other combinations only apply for exceptional cases
Higher quality and ensured compatibility of included Support Packages
Simplified download of included Support Packages from a one page summary
Accelerated application, lower cost of operations and system maintenance
APO
BW
tQ1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Support Package Stacks: • Contain the optimal combination of Support Package and patch statuses for the individual
components at the given time • Reduce the complexity of Support Package application • Increase quality and transparency • SP Stacks are already tested at SAP • SP Stacks are well known at SAP
SAP recommendation: Apply a Support Package Stack as a whole to update an SAP
system
![Page 532: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/532.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-532
© SAP AG 2007
Support Package Stack Download
Service Marketplace quick link /sp-stacks
Selection of an application component implicitly includes underlying technology stack
– Example:XSS EP Java
In the first step, you have to select the source and target stack and the scenarios of SAP ERP 2005 that you are using.
Scenarios which are not used must not be patched.
![Page 533: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/533.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-533
© SAP AG 2007
Selection of Platform
Operation SystemUnicode vs. non-UnicodeDatabase
In the next step you have to enter your technology platform (operating system, database, unicode, 32-Bit or 64-Bit).
![Page 534: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/534.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-534
© SAP AG 2007
Save the Stack Definition XML File
Don’t forget to save the Stack Definition XML file!
Save the stack definition XML file. This file is used by the JSPM in order to define the correct import queue.
![Page 535: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/535.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-535
© SAP AG 2007
SAPGUI and Kernel Version
Check minimum required SAPGUI version .
Check recommended kernel version.
When you import a support package stack, you must also check the minimum required SAPGUI version. It is not required to update the SAPGUI with every Support Package stack import, but the minimum requirements should be fulfilled.
If you are below the recommended SAPGUI version, but above the minimum required SAPGUI version, this might only prevent some features with minor impact from working correctly.
There is shown a minimum required and a recommended kernel version. When you import a support package stack you should also apply the recommended kernel version.
![Page 536: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/536.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-536
© SAP AG 2007
SP Stack Schedule
Note: These dates may change
SAP Service Marketplace, Link /SP-Stacks: http://service.sap.com/sp-stacks
In the Service Marketplace, there is a support package stack calendar which shows the planned availablity of the support package stacks for the different products.
You can use this calendar to schedule your maintenance projects. Products which are new or still in the ramp-up phase have a high support package stack
frequency (e.g. monthly). Older and stable releases only deliver support package stacks twice a year.
![Page 537: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/537.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-537
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Lesson 7: Maintenance Optimizer
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
Lesson 8: HotNews Inbox
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
![Page 538: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/538.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-538
© SAP AG 2007
Side-Effects of Single Notes
In some cases, SAP Notes and Support Packages are dependent on each other. Resolving a particular issue with one SAP Note may cause new issues to arise in other areas or situations. To resolve these new issues, SAP publishes new SAP Notes that are related to the original SAP Note. Before implementing an SAP Note, you should check if it has any side-effects.
On the SAP Service Marketplace, quick link http://service.sap.com/notes, you can view any known side effects on the Side Effects tab of a single SAP Note. The upper table on this tab displays other SAP Notes that can be corrected using this SAP Note, whereas the lower table shows other SAP Notes that correct the side effects of this SAP Note.
![Page 539: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/539.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-539
© SAP AG 2007
Side-Effect Report
776552
743543
...
SPy Note
------------------------
VersionSuppPackage
---------------
Version
-----
NoteSide-effect
--------
--------
SPx Note
7351027643223443
23423465546546456445646633535
22342423223
VersionSuppPackage
0012001000010003000500080001000100020004
Version
00030004
0002
NoteSide-effect
376552
343543
321254, ...
Queue Calculation:Side Effects that are solved within the same SP queue will be filtered automatically Individual calculationSide Effects that are solved within a foreign SP queue are not yet filtered automatically (future extension)Open topics of Side Effect reporting: see SAP Note 684859
Example
Side-Effects Reporting: Calculation for SP Queues
SAP Support Packages are collections of SAP Notes that provide software corrections. Since SAP Notes in subsequent Support Packages solve most of the side effects caused by a
Support Package, these notes must be excluded from the list of side effects. Only side effect notes, which are not contained in the import queue, need to be imported
separately after a support package import.
![Page 540: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/540.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-540
© SAP AG 2007
Side Effects Reporting Tool in the SAP Service Marketplace
To allow easier detection of these interdependencies, a reporting tool is available on the SAP Service Marketplace. When importing a Support Package or SAP Note, you can check for known side effects and find relevant SAP Notes to treat these. Using the tool, you can proactively prevent problems that may occur as a result of applying Support Packages or SAP Notes, not only accelerating and improving the quality of issue resolution, but also reducing maintenance effort and costs.
![Page 541: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/541.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-541
© SAP AG 2007
Number of Known Side-Effects over the Time
InternalTests
Release of SP Stack
DevelopmentClose
CustomerProjects
Side effectNotes
Side effectNotes
Most bugsare fixed
CustomerMessages
InternalMessages
Number of Known
Side Effects
The number of known side effects of a support package rises continuously after the time of the development close. Most side effects are known at the time a support package is released.
However, if you execute the side effect report several times, you might see more known side-effects if you execute the reporting at a later point in time.
![Page 542: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/542.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-542
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Lesson 7: Maintenance Optimizer
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
Lesson 8: HotNews Inbox
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
![Page 543: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/543.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-543
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Custom Development Optimization Package
Analysis of SAP Notes in Support Packages
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
![Page 544: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/544.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-544
© SAP AG 2007
Get List of Notes from SAP Service Marketplace
Click on title to get the list of
notes
http://service.sap.com/swdc
SAP Support Packages are collections of SAP Notes. You can see the available support packages in the Software Download Center of the SAP
Service Marketplace. If you click on the title of a support package, you get a list of SAP Notes which are contained
in it.
![Page 545: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/545.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-545
© SAP AG 2007
List of Notes in a Support Package
Expand the list and download it.
![Page 546: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/546.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-546
© SAP AG 2007
Number of Notes per Software Component
In this example, an R/3 Enterprise system was patched fromSource Stack Level 18 to Target Stack Level 24. The number of notes per Software Component was as follows:
SAP_APPL 15.969SAP_BASIS 4.431SAP_ABA 2.034EA_APPL 1.704EA_IPPE 81Total 24.219
This slide shows the number of notes per component of a specific support package stack.
![Page 547: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/547.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-547
© SAP AG 2007
Number of Notes per Application Component
The application components with most changes are:BC Basis 4286FI Financials 2297CA Cross Application 1711LO Logistics 1674MM Material Management 1667CO Controlling 1509PP Production Planning 1340SD Sales and Distribution 1329XX Others 1315LE Logistics Execution 1128
This slide shows the number of notes per application component.
![Page 548: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/548.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-548
© SAP AG 2007
Number of Notes per Application Sub-Component
IdentifyRelevant
Components
FI-AP-AP Accounts Payable 602FI-GL-GL General Ledger 544XX-CSC-IN Country Spec. India 436AP-MD-BP Business Partner 405MM-PUR-GFPurchasing 377XX-CSC-BR Country Spec. Brazil 319FS-BP Fin.Serv. – Bus.Part. 304LE-SHP-DL Delivery Processing 287CO-PC-ACT Actual Costing 284FI-AA-AA Asset Accounting 280
Now the number of notes is displayed per application sub-component. This view makes it clear in which areas most changes took place. The customer can now select
components which are relevant for him. He can also see if there are components which have no changes at all.
![Page 549: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/549.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-549
© SAP AG 2007
Analyze Shorttext of Notes
Delivery Processing is a critical application for this customer. Therefore, he checked the short texts of all notes in this component. Critical notes will be checked in more detail.
For the relevant components you can now quickly review the short text of the notes and decide if the individual note is relevant.
The relevant notes must then be read in detail.
![Page 550: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/550.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-550
© SAP AG 2007
Notes by Category
K FAQ 12
N Exit added 91
P Performance 388
R Release planning information 7
T Correction of Legal functions 867
U Upgrade information 6
W Workaround for missing funct. 51
X External error 14
Y Help for error analysis 24
Grand Total 24.219
Each Note has a category. Most notes are in the category “Program Error”. Legal changes are most critical.
A Program error 21.621
B Consulting 89
C Customizing 83
D Advance development 240
E Special development 109
F Documentation error 87
G Translation error 215
H Legal change 294
I Installation information 21
Another approach is to select notes by category. About 90% of the notes are in category Program Error. These notes are rather uncritical regarding side effects.
Most critical are notes of type Legal change.
![Page 551: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/551.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-551
© SAP AG 2007
Analyze Short text of Notes
Legal Changes are critical. Therefore, this customer checked all notes of this category. Critical notes will be checked in more detail.
For the legal changes you can now quickly review the short text of the notes and decide if the individual note is relevant.
The relevant notes must then be read in detail.
![Page 552: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/552.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-552
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Custom Development Optimization Package
Analysis of SAP Notes in Support Packages
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
![Page 553: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/553.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-553
© SAP AG 2007
Custom Development Optimization Package
RFCBasis 4.6C / WebAS 6.20 / 6.40 / 7.00
CDOP Control Center
Start-Up
Work-Shop
Clearing Analysis
Enabling base technologyGeneral functionality, „middleware“„Applications“
Customer in advance of upgrade
or reorganization project
Cer
tifie
d us
ers*
) in
CD
OP
proj
ects
Customer in upgrade
or change (support package or
transport import) project
*) certified users by attendance ofe-learnings
Del
iver
able
sR
ecei
vers
Upgrade / ChangeImpact Analysis
The Custom Development Optimization Package is part of the Solution Support Enablement Package (SEP). This is an Add-on to SAP Solution Manager.
With the Upgrade/Change Impact Analysis, you can find out about the technical impact of an SAP Upgrade or Support Package on your custom developments and estimate the amount of work required to adapt them.
![Page 554: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/554.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-554
© SAP AG 2007
Upgrade/Change Impact Analysis
Upgrade/Change Impact Analysis:Identification of relevant customer workbench objectsDetermination of SAP objects used in custom codeQualified determination of changed SAP objects in upgrade or support packageIntersection between these two setsDisplay of workload (“hit objects“) for adaptation with supporting functionality
Control centerNavigation and control of CDOP tasks
When the comparison is finished, you can look at the analysis results and decide how to proceed with the listed objects. You have various options for viewing and filtering the data. You can set the processing status for each object you analyzed. You can even do extended syntax checks for custom objects and get where-used lists for SAP objects on the list. You can calculate total adjustment times for different sets of objects to get a clearer idea of the amount of work that is required in different areas.
![Page 555: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/555.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-555
© SAP AG 2007
Upgrade / Change Impact Analysis - Systems
CDOP ControlCenter
ReferenceSystem
AnalyisSystem
Changed SAP Objects byUpgrade, SP, Transport
SAP ObjectsReferenced by
customer objects
Comparision
The Upgrade / Change Impact Analysis tool compares the SAP objects that were changed by an Upgrade / Support Package or transport with the objects that are referenced by Customer objects.
A reference system is needed in which the change was already applied.
![Page 556: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/556.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-556
© SAP AG 2007
Upgrade / Change Impact Analysis - Steps
Find Used SAP Objects: • In this activity, a list of all the SAP objects that are used in custom developments in the
analysis system is prepared. The list can include either all objects in the customer namespace or only objects from the specified development classes (packages). The SAP objects found in this activity will be used as the basis for the next activity - Find Changed SAP Objects.
Find Changed SAP Objects. • In this activity, you find the intersection of the SAP objects used in the custom objects and
the changed SAP objects. This activity runs in the reference system. • For a support package application (transport request/ task), the program finds the
intersection by comparing the objects from the piece lists for the support package against the SAP objects used by customer-specific objects as specified in the preceding steps.
• For an upgrade, the program compares the objects in the list of changed SAP objects (as provided by SAP) against the SAP objects used by customer-specific objects as specified in the preceding steps.
Perform Remote Comparison: • In this activity, you compare the relevant objects in the reference system against their
counterparts in the analysis system with the aim of estimating the effort required to adjust these objects. Note that this activity, like all the others, is triggered from the control system
![Page 557: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/557.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-557
and obtains the required information from the analysis system and the reference system through the RFC connections.
• A list of the objects with the updated comparison result is provided in step Display Results.
![Page 558: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/558.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-558
Display Results: • In this activity, you get an overview of the analysis results and can decide how to proceed
with regard to the listed objects.
![Page 559: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/559.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-559
© SAP AG 2007
Upgrade/Change Impact Analysis – Results
The following options are available: • Object view: You can display either all found objects or only the objects of one object type
(such as data elements or programs). You can also view all customer-specific objects which do not use any SAP object.
• Severity: Display only the objects of selected severity . • Processing status: Display only the objects of selected processing status. • Compressed view: In the compressed view, you can view all the attributes of custom
objects (such as object type, development class, adjustment time or severity of the impact) • Detail view: In the detail view, you can view all the SAP objects used by a given custom
object with their object types and severity. • Change mode: In the change mode, you can assign a status to each object, assign a
processor to each object, and send a notification to the processors.
![Page 560: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/560.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-560
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Support Enablement Package (SEP)
Packaged Tools:BMC AppSight for Windows/.NetSAP Test Data Migration ServerCA Wily IntroscopeSAP Custom Development
Optimization PackageSAP Reverse Business EngineerSAP Best Practices for
Operations
The Solution Support Enablement Package provides a suite of proven tools that enable your IT support organization to deliver
best-in-class support for your SAP solution.
Find more information at http://service.sap.com/sep
In E2E Change Control, the following Solution Support Enablement Package tools are of special interest: • SAP Custom Development Optimization Package:
− Change Impact Analysis during testing and import of support packages or upgrades • SAP Client Migration Server:
− Customizing and repository compare of two systems (homogeneity of the system landscape)
• SAP Test Data Migration Server: − Set up test systems with current test data
![Page 561: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/561.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-561
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Lesson 7: Maintenance Optimizer
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
Lesson 8: HotNews Inbox
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
![Page 562: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/562.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-562
© SAP AG 2007
Three Steps to the New Support Package Stack
1 2 3
Apply ConfigureDownload
Download support package stacks from the SAP Service Marketplace. Import the support package stack with the Software Lifecycle Management tools. Perform the post-implementation configurations that are described in the Support Package
Stack Guide.
![Page 563: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/563.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-563
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Applying ABAP Support Packages
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
Applying Java Support Packages
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
![Page 564: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/564.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-564
© SAP AG 2007
Importing ABAP Support Packages – Steps during Uptime
Download and install the newest transport tools, tp and R3trans.
This can clearly be done during uptime
Import the latest SPAM update.This can be done during uptime
Upgrade the Add-Ons ST-PI and ST-A/PI with SAINT.These Add-ons deliver Early-watch functionality and can be imported during normal productive work.
Define one complete queue in SPAM and process until the end of the import module 'Import 1‘.
Use the downtime-minimized import modeOne Add-on Delta Upgrade in SAINT can also be included in the queue
![Page 565: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/565.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-565
© SAP AG 2007
Importing ABAP Support Packages – Steps during Downtime
Process the SP queue import until the end of the import module ‘Import 2’.
Now, all SAP objects are imported
Do the following tasks in parallel:Continue with the 'Postprocessing' in SPAM till the endImport the customer transports Set GENERATION = FALSE
Exchange the kernel and restart the system.
Do the following tasks in parallel:Run SGEN (could also be done when the system is released for productive use) Perform functional tests
If everything is ok, release the system for productive use.
![Page 566: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/566.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-566
© SAP AG 2007
Additional Recommendations
Start with a test import in order to generate the SPDD and SPAU list.
No more customer transports in phases Import 1 and Import 2Un-schedule automatic imports !
SPDD adjustment must be done in each system separately.
SPAU adjustment can be done by transport request.
Backups of database and Import-Buffer should be taken before the Downtime starts.
![Page 567: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/567.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-567
© SAP AG 2007
Known Problems with Support Packages
For each release, there is a central note which contains known problems with Support Package imports.
Proactively read this note and follow the instructions. Often, split points are recommended. That means certain support packages should not be
applied together in one import queue. Proactively check the related notes mentioned in the central note, aslo.
![Page 568: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/568.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-568
© SAP AG 2007
Downtime Minimized Method
Standard Process
Preparatory andTest steps
Import steps during productive
operation
Cleanup steps
Downtime-minimized Process
Preparatory andtest steps
Import stepsduring productive
operation
Import steps duringnon-productive
operation
Cleanup steps
Import steps duringnon-productive
operation
Standard process: Internal processing of the individual steps was reorganized and divided into four modules: Prepare and test module; Import 1 during productive operation; Import 2 during non-productive operation; Cleanup. You are now able to stop the import process after each module, allowing you to control the start time of the subsequent modules precisely. This enables you to limit non-productive operation to the import steps that are really relevant, which leads to a reduction in the duration of the non-productive phase. This import process can be used from Basis Release 4.0B onwards.
Downtime-minimized import: A new type of import developed specifically for importing Support Packages now enables import activities that normally take place during non-productive time, to occur during productive operation. It allows these import activities to be performed in the Import 1 module or in the Cleanup module, thereby further reducing the duration of the non-productive phase. However, the length of the entire import process is increased as a result of the overhead of the new import procedure. The import process that involves the new import procedure can be used from Basis Release 4.6B onwards.
The downtime minimized method is not applicable if the queue cannot be imported at once, or if transports have to be applied before or after the support package import.
![Page 569: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/569.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-569
The usage of the Downtime Minimized Method should be tested in a sandbox system first before starting in the development system.
![Page 570: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/570.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-570
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Applying ABAP Support Packages
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
Applying Java Support Packages
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
![Page 571: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/571.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-571
© SAP AG 2007
Apply the Support Package Stack with JSPM
In SAP NetWeaver 2004s, the Java Support Package Manager (JSPM) has been introduced, in order to simplify the Support Package management process for Java applications at customer site. The JSPM must be called at the operating system level. In the directory \usr\sap\<SID>\<Instance>\j2ee\JSPM\ call the script go.bat. The JSPM works similarly to transaction SPAM and has similar features.
Useful Links: • Starting point: http://service.sap.com/jspm • SAP Note 891983 - JSPM: Central note • JSPM Media Library
− JSPM User Guide
![Page 572: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/572.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-572
© SAP AG 2007
Support Package Handling
JSPM
SDM Server
J2EE Server
Deploy Service
Kernel Patch
SDM Patch
SDM Client API
SDMKIT.JAR
*.SCAInbox
SAPEXE.SAR – DB-independent
SAPEXEDB.SAR – DB-dependant
JSPM can update the kernel and other operating system level binaries (like Internet Graphics Server (IGS)) of the AS Java and distribute these parts in cluster environments. If required, JSPM can also update both itself and the deployment service (currently the Software Deployment Manager (SDM)), prior to a system update. As a result, JSPM takes over manual tasks, such as the kernel and binary patch, as well as tasks that were formerly performed by SAPinst, such as the SDM patch, and meets the prerequisites for updating the AS Java as a whole.
Java Software Component Archives (*.SCA) are sent via the SDM client API to the SDM Server. The SDM Server deploys the archives to the J2EE Server.
![Page 573: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/573.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-573
© SAP AG 2007
Java Support Package Manager (JSPM) -Features
Support Package Management:Validation of dependencies between Software Components and theirSupport Packages
Dependency validation on Support Package/Patch level
Deployment and Installation:Installation of new Software Components
Deployment of up-to-date Support Packages of existing Software Components
Self-Update
Update of SAP kernel
Usability:Unified GUI framework with all other Software Logistics tools
Modification Support for Java Software Components:Co-operation with NWDI
Besides deploying new software components and applying single Support Packages of installed software components, JSPM also provides the following advanced features and functionalities: • Prior to deployment, JSPM performs a prerequisite and dependence check to ensure that
only appropriate Support Packages can be applied into the system. • Updating system kernel and other native parts of the AS Java • Once the prerequisites are met, JSPM is able to apply an entire Support Package stack
(including appropriate kernel patch level) according to the installed Usage Types in the system to be updated in a single step. It also excludes Support Packages that do not belong to any of the installed Usage Types.
• In the case of modified systems, JSPM supplies the standard SAP Support Packages whose software components are modified in the system to the corresponding NWDI track for modification adjustment. Instead of deploying the standard Support Packages of the modified software components, JSPM uses the adjusted Software Component Archives (SCA) from the NWDI for the system update.
![Page 574: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/574.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-574
© SAP AG 2007
Application of Support Package Stack (Java)
Prior to the application: Check and update the JDK version and JVM settings (SAP Note 723909)EPS inbox: Support Packages along with the Support Package Definition fileBusiness downtime from the start of deployment
Package validation takes place during normal operationInform your users before starting deploymentRestart of JSPM is required after the JSPM self-update
Always as very first package in the deployment queueValidation result and import queue are retainedRestart the deployment of remaining packages in the queueNo further human interactions required
![Page 575: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/575.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-575
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Lesson 7: Maintenance Optimizer
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
Lesson 8: HotNews Inbox
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
![Page 576: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/576.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-576
© SAP AG 2007
SAP NetWeaver 2004s
Java Components
ABAPComponents
ABAP Add-On’s(for NetWeaver AS ABAP)
SAP ECC
BI Content
Example: SAP ERP 2005 – Component View
XI Content
EP Content
Java Web Applications
Additional Components
SAP ECC 6.0(Details see next slide)
E-Recruiting 6.0FINBASIS 6.0
SEM 6.0LSO (FE) 6.0
inclusive:
WFM_Core 2.0
cProject Suite 4.0
SAP Catalog 2.0
E-Recruiting 6.0
FINBASIS 6.0
SEM 6.0
LSO (FE) 6.0
SAP SRM(Available as ECC-Add-Onand stand alone server)
BI Content 7.0x
XECO 5.0
Biller Direct 6.0
LSO (CP) 6.0
SAP XSS 6.0
ELSTER 2.0
XI Content for Applications
Business Packages
SAP SRM 5.5
Front End
SAP Solution Manager
SEM FrontendComponents
LSO (OP) 6.0
SAPGUI 6.20/ 6.40
SAP Easy Document Management 6.0
OpenPSfor MS Projects
cProjectsECL Viewer
LSO (AE) 6.0
In the last years SAP Solutions became more and more complex. System Landscapes are growing and the number of software components inside a product is growing.
Therefore, it is getting more and more difficult to keep track of maintenance activities and software versions in the whole system landscape.
![Page 577: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/577.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-577
© SAP AG 2007
Better Handling of Customer Maintenance Processes
Display current level and recommended level
Approve and download
Import
Test
Release to production
Planning of maintenanceSupport Packages and StacksHotNews
Administration
Provide transparency
The SAP Solution Manager is a central entry point for all maintenance activities. It provides transparency of the software versions for the whole solution.
![Page 578: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/578.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-578
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Optimizer – Technical ProcessDescription
Solution-
ManagerNWBI
SAPERP
NWBI
Service
Market
Place
DownloadBasket (part of SMP)
DownloadManager
1
2
4
3
5
6
Check Versions
Select Files
Confirm Files
Download FilesImplementSupport
Packages
Maintain Status
This picture provides an overview of the Maintenance Optimizer procedure. The administrator checks the support package levels in the SAP Solution Manager and starts a
new maintenance process from there. After selecting a system, the SAP Solution Manager provides a link to the SAP Service
Marketplace where the latest support packages can be selected and added to the download basket.
In the next step, there is another link from the SAP Solution Manager into the SAP Service Marketplace. Now, the administrator has to confirm the patch files in the download basket.
The confirmed patch files can now be downloaded to the administartor‘s local PC. From there, they can be uploaded and implemented in the managed systems.
Finally, the status of the maintenance activity is maintained in the SAP Solution Manager. All activities except for the download and implementation of the support packages can be
done in the SAP Solution Manager. There is no need to search for patches in the SAP Service Marketplace.
![Page 579: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/579.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-579
© SAP AG 2007
System-Demo
System-Demo
![Page 580: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/580.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-580
© SAP AG 2007
Create a New Maintenance Transaction (3/3)
1. Start transaction SOLUTION_MANAGERSOLUTION_MANAGER
2. Go to Change Management -> Support Package Stacks
3. Choose Maintenance Optimizer
The Maintenance Optimizer is started from transaction SOLUTION_MANAGER. Select your solution and go to Change Management Support Package Stacks. Select a system and check the support package level. Press the button Maintenance Optimizer to start a new maintenance process.
![Page 581: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/581.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-581
© SAP AG 2007
Step 1: Plan Maintenance
3. Choose Continue
2. You can add business partners and documents
1. Choose Product Version
Start Maintenance Planning: • Specify the necessary information for product maintenance. Mandatory fields are indicated
with a red asterisk. − Short Text: Enter a descriptive text. By default, the text “New Maintenance Optimizer
procedure” appears. − Product version: You can choose one of the product versions from the current solution.
The Maintenance Optimizer determines the selection of product versions based on the systems assigned to your solution.
− System: Once you choose a product version, the Maintenance Optimizer displays the systems assigned to that product version. Select the system(s) for which you want to perform product maintenance.
• Choose Continue.
![Page 582: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/582.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-582
© SAP AG 2007
Step 2: Select Files
3. Choose Continue
1. Go to area of chosen product version in SAP Support Portal
2. Add files to Download Basket
This step will be enhanced with an automatic calculation of the necessary files.
2. Select Files • Select the product maintenance files for your system. To do this, use the link to navigate to
the SAP Software Distribution Center of the SAP Service Marketplace. • The Maintenance Optimizer opens the SAP Service Marketplace in a new browser
window. • The Maintenance Optimizer navigates directly to the appropriate download area based on
the product version which you selected in the previous step. • For further information and for help in placing items into your Download Basket, see the
documentation in the SAP Service Marketplace. • Once you have selected the files you wish to download in the Maintenance Optimizer,
choose Continue.
![Page 583: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/583.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-583
© SAP AG 2007
3. Continue
Step 3: Download Files
1. Go to Download Basket
2. Confirm files inDownload Basket
3. Download Files • Before you can download the files, you must first confirm your selection in the
Maintenance Optimizer. To do this, choose Confirm Selection in the Maintenance Optimizer.
• In the following screen, select the files and choose Copy/Authorize. • By confirming your selection, the files are assigned to the maintenance procedure and
released for download. • Now, you can download the files using the SAP Download Manager. For more information
about using the SAP Download Manager, see the documentation in the SAP Service Marketplace.
• In the following screen, select the files and choose Confirm Download. • By confirming your selection, the files are assigned to the maintenance procedure and
released for download. • Now, you can download the files using the SAP Download Manager. For more information
about using the SAP Download Manager, see the documentation in the SAP Service Marketplace.
![Page 584: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/584.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-584
© SAP AG 2007
Step 4: Perform Implementation
1. Set status of implementation to In Progress
4. Continue
3. Set status of implementation to Completed
2. Look for details and request side
effect notes
4. Perform Implementation • After downloading the files, perform the required maintenance in your systems. • If you assigned systems at the beginning of the procedure, the Maintenance Optimizer lists
these systems for you. You can enter the start date and end date for the implementation and indicate the status of the procedure.
• The Maintenance Optimizer displays an overview of the files which you selected in the previous step. For each Support Package, you can view the documentation of the corrections and their side-effects by clicking the corresponding link.
• Once you have performed the required maintenance in all selected systems, you can complete the maintenance procedure. To complete the procedure, you must first set the implementation status for each system assigned to the procedure to Complete.
• Choose Continue.
![Page 585: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/585.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-585
© SAP AG 2007
Step 4: Perform Implementation
The SAP Download Manager is a PC tool which is installed on the administartor‘s PC. The Patches are downloaded to the PC where the SAP Download Manager was called and can
then be implemented in the system, e.g. with transaction JSPM.
![Page 586: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/586.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-586
© SAP AG 2007
Step 5: End Maintenance
Complete maintenance transaction
5. End Maintenance • Once you have successfully finished the maintenance of your systems, complete the
procedure for product maintenance. Once you set the status to Complete, the procedure can no longer be changed.
![Page 587: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/587.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-587
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Optimizer – Monitoring
1. Start transaction /n/tmwflow/maintenance
2.Choose parameters
3.Choose Execute
4.Results
Transaction /TMWFLOW/MAINTENANCE Product maintenance reporting helps give you an overview of all product maintenance
procedures in your SAP Solution Manager system. You can simultaneously view procedures which belong to several different solutions and you can also view closed or withdrawn procedures.
You can use the reporting function to: • Create an overview of product maintenance procedures which match specific criteria such
as status or priority • Navigate to the corresponding step of an open product maintenance procedure in the
Maintenance Optimizer • Create an overview of product maintenance procedures and save the overview to a local
file for further processing
![Page 588: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/588.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-588
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Support Portal: Contact Person Assignment
Your S-User is the user-ID assigned to you by SAP which you use to log on to the SAP Support Portal.
Your system administrator must have performed the following SAP Implementation Guide (IMG) activities:
Maintain User for Communication with SAP Service and SupportAssign S-user for SAP Support Portalfunctionality or with the transaction AISUSER
Your S-User must be assigned to the same customer or corporate number as the S-User which your administrator entered in the SAP-OSS RFC destination. If this is not the case, the Maintenance Optimizer will not be able to read your download basket
Always log on to the SAP Support Portal with the same S-User which is assigned to your Solution Manager user. If you do not do this, the Maintenance Optimizer will not be able to confirm and approve any files you place in that S-User’s Download Basket.
![Page 589: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/589.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-589
© SAP AG 2007
Configure SAP Download Manager
The SAP Download Manager must be configured. In the upper section, enter the address of the SAP Service Marketplace, your S-User and the
password. In the lower section, enter the proxy settings to connect to the Internet.
![Page 590: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/590.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-590
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Optimizer - Outlook
The Maintenance Optimizer will be continuously enriched. Planned Improvements are:
Possibility to use tools other than the Download Manager for download Automatic calculation of Delta between latest available stack and current software at customer installationIntegration with Change Request Management (planning, reporting, monitoring) as a guided procedureIntegration with Enhanced Change and Transport System (CTS+) and Software Lifecycle Management ToolsFurther information is provided in the SAP Service Marketplace under the link http://service.sap.com/solman-mopz
![Page 591: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/591.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-591
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management Unit Overview Diagram
Maintenance Management
Lesson 3: Support Package Stack Strategy
Lesson 7: Maintenance Optimizer
Lesson 5: Support Package Content Analysis
Lesson 6: Applying Support Packages
Lesson 1: SAP Maintenance Strategy
Lesson 8: HotNews Inbox
Lesson 4: Side-Effect Reporting
Lesson 2: Types of Corrections
![Page 592: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/592.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-592
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Launched Three New Note Service Offerings
1. SAP HotNewsContain solutions for customer problems with very high priority, such as systems standstills or data lossAllow customers to filter and display SAP HotNews for their chosen components
2. SAP TopNotesInform you about potential hot spots in your projectsPublished on a monthly basis Represent the ten most important SAP Notes for each componentReviewed monthly by experts in the relevant departments and updated based on the current SAP Note customer usage rate
3. SAP FAQNotesPresent the most frequently asked questions for particular topics with brief and 'to-the-point' answersIdeal place to start looking for a quick and easy answer before embarking on a full-blown search
SAP HotNews are priority 1 (very high priority) SAP customer notes. These notes tell you how to resolve or avoid problems that can cause the SAP system to shut down or lose data. If you are affected by these problems, you must ensure that you are aware of these notes.
SAP TopNotes are the most important notes of a component or a subcomponent reported on successfully closed customer support messages. The selection of the 10 most successful notes is done regularly, on a monthly basis, in a semi-automatic process. The process is described in note 557703
![Page 593: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/593.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-593
© SAP AG 2007
Proactive and Reactive Channels
ProblemProblem
Management
IncidentService Desk/Incident
Management
Request and Commitment for Change• Emergency
• Maintenance – reactive / proactive Notes Implementation
Application Management
ProblemProblem
Management
IncidentMonitoring Incident
Reactive Channel
Support Desk System Monitoring
Top Notes
Hot News
Proactive Channel
SAP Service MP
e.g.
Program Errors (ABAP)
Update Errors
Test and Implementation of Change• Note Assistant
Technology Team
![Page 594: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/594.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-594
© SAP AG 2007
SAP HotNews Inbox in SAP Solution Manager
Hot
New
sP
lann
ing
SAP HotNews Inbox (DSWP)
Retrieve relevantHotNews from SMP*
Postpone HotNews for later administration
Set HotNews to not relevant (not applicable, read only)
Filter HotNewsview
Transaction Processing (CRMD_ORDER)Create change request
Process change request – start standard “urgent correction process”
Log activities
Hot
New
sP
roce
ssin
g
Check change request data
Approve change request for HotNews
Based on infrastructure (see prerequisites)
* SAP Service Marketplace
![Page 595: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/595.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-595
© SAP AG 2007
Best Practice for HotNews and TopNotes
Set up regular procedures to check for new HotNews:HotNews Weekly cycleTopNotes Monthly cycle
Solution Manager: Define a responsible person to check for new HotNews and create Change Requests (e.g. Change Control Engineer)Change Requests are forwarded to the module responsiblesChoose components where a customer opened OSS calls in last 3 – 6 months Get SAP Service Marketplace Newsletter weekly
![Page 596: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/596.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-596
© SAP AG 2007
Appendix
System Demo
![Page 597: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/597.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-597
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
Retrieve SAP HotNews from SAP Service Marketplace(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab, HotNewsInbox, New tab)
Retrieve relevant SAP HotNews using Refresh button
SAP HotNews is retrieved for: • matching application components (as assigned to logical component) in combination with • matching product version of the logical component and software component version of the
source system (here TW2) Displayed SAP HotNews Component is always the primary component
![Page 598: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/598.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-598
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
12
3
Filter settings in SAP HotNews Inbox(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab, HotNewsInbox, New/Postponed/Not relevant tab)
Filter displayed data according to your areas of responsibility
Hide the filter to save space. Check filter settings first, if you miss Entries. The active filter indicated by “Filter is Active”
at the top of the News tab (not shown).
![Page 599: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/599.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-599
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
1
2
Create change request for SAP HotNews (1/3)(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab, HotNewsInbox, New tab)
Create change request for selected SAP HotNews in order to apply for SAP HotNews installation for the respective system (here, TW2).
![Page 600: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/600.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-600
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
Fast Entry– SAP HotNews
Transcation Data/Context tab– Solution-specific informationIncluding SAP Hot News (see Notes)
3
4
Create change request for SAP HotNews (2/3)(Transaction: CRMD_ORDER)
Change request pre-filled with SAP HotNews and solution-specific information including notes requested for installation
![Page 601: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/601.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-601
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
Create change request for SAP HotNews (3/3)(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab, HotNewsInbox, New tab)
Change requests and their status can be viewed at any time
Change request display is possible: • per system • per logical component (as shown) • for status values except confirmed/rejected • Activity status change traced and visible on the Log tab
![Page 602: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/602.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-602
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
1
2
Postpone SAP HotNews (1/2)(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab, HotNewsInbox, New tab)
Postpone SAP HotNews for administration at a later point of time
![Page 603: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/603.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-603
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
Postpone SAP HotNews (2/2)(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab, HotNewsInbox, Postpone tab)
Comment on the reasons/background for postponing SAP HotNews to increase transparency
Comments are listed in chronological order. Log allows status change tracking for respective SAP HotNews
![Page 604: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/604.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-604
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
1
2
3
Set postponed SAP HotNews back to New(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab,HotNews Inbox, Postpone tab)
Comment handling after status change Comment history is saved per status (New, Postponed, Not Relevant) History records proposed as default description for new comment
![Page 605: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/605.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-605
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
1
2
SAP HotNews Set to Not Relevant(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab, HotNewsInbox, Not Relevant tab)
Set SAP HotNews to not relevant if – after thorough investigation –they are not applicable for the system in your solution or are of type information only.Comment on the reasons/background setting SAP HotNews to not relevant to increase transparency.
SAP HotNews that are not relavant can be set back to status New
![Page 606: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/606.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-606
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management – SAP HotNews
SAP HotNews activity logging(Transaction: DSWP, Operations area, Change Management tab,HotNews Inbox, Log tab)
Every activity resulting in a status change (such as New -> Postponed) is recorded.Creation of change requests is also recorded.
Click on comment icon to see complete comment
![Page 607: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/607.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-607
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management: Unit Objectives
You should now be able to:
Know the SAP Maintenance Strategy
Describe all types of patches delivered by SAP
Explain the support package stack strategy
Execute side effect Reporting for a Support Package Queue
Estimate the impact of a support package import into a critical system
Use the software lifecycle management tools to implement patches and find information on current patch levels
Explain the additional benefit of the SAP Solution Manager in the maintenance process
![Page 608: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/608.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-608
Exercises
Unit: Maintenance Management
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Find version information for a customer solution • Find information on support packages in the SAP Service Marketplace • Use the Maintenance Optimizer and HotNews Inbox in SAP Solution
Manager to plan and execute maintenance tasks
For this exercise you need your own S-user to access the SAP Service Marketplace!
8-1 Detection of version information
8-1-1 Logon to the Solution Manager system TT4 and check the support package level for the ECC and CRM systems in your solution. Where can you find this information? Answer: __________________________________________________ What is the release and support package level for the component SAP_APPL of the ECC Server? Answer: __________________________________________________ What is the release and support package level for the component BBPCRM in the CRM Server? Answer: __________________________________________________
8-1-2 Check the applied SAP Notes for the ECC Server TT5. What is the transaction name? Answer: ______________________________________________ Go to the Notes Browser and display all SAP Notes with status Completely Implemented. How many notes are applied? Answer: ______________________________________________
8-1-3 Check the version information for the JAVA stack of system TT5 on the Component Info site. What is the URL? Answer: ______________________________________________
![Page 609: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/609.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-609
Which support package and patch level is applied for the software component SAP_ESS? Answer: ______________________________________________
8-2 Find information in the SAP Service Marketplace 8-2-1 Logon to the SAP Service Marketplace with your S-User. Where can you
find information on the available Support Package Stacks? Answer: ________________________________________________
8-2-2 Check the latest Support Package Stack for mySAP ERP 2005. What the name of this stack? Answer: ________________________________________________ What is the latest support package for SAP_APPL in this stack? Answer: ________________________________________________ Which SAP_APPL support packages are missing in the current solution of TT5? Answer: ________________________________________________
8-2-3 Request the list of side-effects for the missing SAP_APPL support packages. If all SAP_APPL support packages are imported in TT4, check the side-effects for the latest one. What is the URL? Answer: ________________________________________________
8-3 SAP Maintenance Optimizer 8-3-1 Create a new maintenance activity with the SAP Maintenance Optimizer.
Select your solution and go to Change Management Support Package Stacks. Create a new maintenance activity by clicking on the button Maintenance Optimizer. Enter the following data: Short text: CRM Maintenance ## (## is your user number) Product version: SAP CRM 5.0 Select the logical component Z_E2ECC_CRM Save your input and exit
8-3-2 Check all completed maintenance activities for the solution E2ECC Demo Solution in the reporting transaction of the Maintenance Optimizer. What is the transaction name? Answer: __________________________________________________ Which support packages were downloaded in these maintenance activities? Answer: __________________________________________________
8-4 HotNews Inbox 8-4-1 In your solution select Change Management HotNews. Look at the list
of SAP HotNews for the SAP ECC system TT5.. a) When was the list downloaded from the SAP Service Marketplace? Answer: __________________________________________________ b) Select one note and set it to Postponed. Enter a comment.
![Page 610: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/610.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-610
c) Select another note and set it to Not Relevant. Enter a comment. d) Check if your activities were logged in the folder Log.
8-4-2 Create a Change Request to implement a note a) Check if there are already HotNews in Change Requests. b) Select a note and create a Change Request to implement it. c) In the change request enter the following data:
- Sold-to party: Your User - Requestor: Your User - Change Manager: Your User - Ibase / Component: Production Simulation - Priority: High - Subject: Urgent Correction (Maintenance) - Description of Change: Enter a description - Save the data
d) Go to Transaction Data Customer fields and expand the tree structure. Right mouse click on the note number and follow the link to the note in the SAP Service Marketplace.
![Page 611: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/611.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-611
Solutions
Unit: Maintenance Management
8-1 Detection of version information
8-1-1 Logon to the Solution Manager system TT4 and check the support package level for the ECC and CRM systems in your solution. Where can you find this information? Goto transaction SOLUTION_MANAGER Change Management Support Package Stacks. Expand the systems in your solution in order to see the support package level. What is the release and support package level for the component SAP_APPL of the ECC Server? The release of SAP_APPL is 600. The support package level can be seen in the list. What is the release and support package level for the component BBPCRM in the CRM Server? The release of BBPCRM is 500. The support package level can be seen in the list.
8-1-2 Check the applied SAP Notes for the ECC Server TT5. What is the transaction name? Logon to client 800 in the SAP ECC system TT5. The transaction name is SNOTE (SAP Note Assistant). Go to the Notes Browser and display all SAP Notes with status Completely Implemented. How many notes are applied?
Click on the button for the Notes Browser ( ). In the next screen select Implementation Status = Completely implemented and execute. The result contains roughly 20 notes.
8-1-3 Check the version information for the JAVA stack of system TT5 on the Component Info site. What is the URL? The URL is http://<hostname>:55000/sap/monitoring/ComponentInfo. The trainer will give you a user to logon. Which support package and patch level is applied for the software component SAP_ESS? Search for the text SAP_ESS in the component info. The patch level is part of the version string. 600.0 is the component release. The next number is the support package level. The next number is the patch level.
![Page 612: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/612.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-612
8-2 Find information in the SAP Service Marketplace 8-2-1 Logon to the SAP Service Marketplace with your S-User. Where can you
find information on the available Support Package Stacks? The URL is http://service.sap.com/sp-stacks. Logon with your own S-User.
8-2-2 Check the latest Support Package Stack for mySAP ERP 2005. What the name of this stack? In the lower part of initial page you find a link for mySAP ERP 2005. Follow that link. In the next window the latest target stack is pre-selected in the field Target Stack (see screenshot below). Write down the name.
What is the latest support package for SAP_APPL in this stack? Click on the button Show Stack Information. In the next screen search for the component SAP_APPL. Write down the support package level. Which SAP_APPL support packages are missing in the current solution of TT5? Calculate the difference between the latest support package level for SAP_APPL which is available in the SAP Service Marketplace and the support package which is applied in the system TT5 (see exercise above).
8-2-3 Request the list of side-effects for the missing SAP_APPL support packages. If all SAP_APPL support packages are imported in TT4, check the side-effects for the latest one. What is the URL? Go to the URL http://service.sap.com/side-effects. Enter the product and product version. On the next screen enter the support packages which you want to import. Submit your request. You will be notified by email when the result is available.
![Page 613: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/613.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-613
8-3 SAP Maintenance Optimizer 8-3-1 Create a new maintenance activity with the SAP Maintenance Optimizer.
Select your solution and go to Change Management Support Package Stacks. Create a new maintenance activity by clicking on the button Maintenance Optimizer. Enter the following data: Short text: CRM Maintenance ## (## is your user number) Product version: SAP CRM 5.0 Select the logical component Z_E2ECC_CRM Save your input and exit
8-3-2 Check all completed maintenance activities for the solution E2ECC Demo
Solution in the reporting transaction of the Maintenance Optimizer. What is the transaction name? In TT4 go to the transaction /TMWFLOW/MAINTENANCE. Select the button Completed and choose the solution E2ECC Demo Solution. Press Execute Which support packages were downloaded in these maintenance activities? In the list of the completed maintenance activities double click on one activity. On the next screen click on the button Continue in the lower part of the screen. Click Continue until you are in step number 4 of the maintenance activity Perform Implementation. The downloaded support packages are in the block Copied and confirmed download files.
![Page 614: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/614.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-614
8-4 HotNews Inbox 8-4-1 In your solution select Change Management HotNews. Look at the list
of SAP HotNews for the SAP ECC system TT5. a) When was the list downloaded from the SAP Service Marketplace?
Under the folder New you see the number of available HotNews for each system of the solution and when the list was downloaded from the SAP Service Marketplace.
b) Select one note and set it to Postponed. Enter a comment. Select a note and click on Postpone. Then goto the folder Postponed and add a comment for this note.
c) Select another note and set it to Not Relevant. Enter a comment. Select a note and click on Not Relevant. Then goto the folder Not Relevant and add a comment for this note.
d) Check if your activities were logged in the folder Log. Go to the folder Log and check the information which was recorded.
8-4-2 Create a Change Request to implement a note a) Check if there are already HotNews in Change Requests.
Under the folder New you see this information in the column HotNews in Change Requests.
b) Select a note and create a Change Request to implement it. Select a note and click on the button Create Change Request. A maintenance project must be assigned to the solution for which Change Request Management is activated.
c) In the change request enter the following data: - Sold-to party: Your User - Requestor: Your User - Change Manager: Your User - Ibase / Component: Production Simulation - Priority: High - Subject: Urgent Correction (Maintenance) - Description of Change: Enter a description - Save the data
d) Go to Transaction Data Customer fields and expand the tree structure. Right mouse click on the note number and follow the link to the note in the SAP Service Marketplace.
![Page 615: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/615.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 8-615
![Page 616: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/616.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-616
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
Netweaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
Test Management
![Page 617: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/617.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-617
© SAP AG 2007
Contents:
Theory of Software Testing
SAP Test Workbench
Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Test Automation with eCATT
SAP Code Inspector
Volume Test
System Copy Procedures
Test Data Migration Server
Test Case Selection
Test Management
![Page 618: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/618.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-618
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
Explain different types of tests and test strategies
Describe the features of the Test Workbench and eCATT
Understand the benefits of SAP Solution Manager and how SAP Solution Manager is integrated with HP Quality Center
Use the SAP Code Inspector to perform automated syntax checks
Describe how to prepare test systems by performing system copies or by using the SAP Test Data Migration Server
Guideline how to select test cases
![Page 619: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/619.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-619
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 620: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/620.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-620
© SAP AG 2007
Change is a Fundamental Principle – Testing a necessity
There are many changes in the solution life cycle - and every change requires testing
Business inspired changes:Mergers and AcquisitionsContinuous ImprovementsFunctional Upgrades…
IT inspired changes:Technical UpgradesSupport PackagesNotes...
Test effort
Business inspired changes
IT inspired changes
SAP Implementation: • Executive & LOB sponsorship • Committed vendor/SI support • Project budget
SAP in Production: • Silo teams, each with their own focus • Frequent Changes, Updates & Upgrades, SOX • Limited Vendor, SI or other resources Usually 80% reduction in team size
![Page 621: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/621.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-621
© SAP AG 2007
Integration TestIntegration Test
Testing in Projects – The V-Model
Detailed (Technical) Design
Development
Unit Test
Integration Test
User Acceptance Test
Functional Design Business Blueprint
Requirements Doc
Functional Requirement, Business Case
Functional Test
Config Owner Test,can be automated
OKFunctional
sign offValidation
Verification
ValidationVerification
Validation
Regression Testing (automated)Existing Business Processes
Validation
Over the course of a project, the requirements are refined and documented in a business process blueprint, consisting of a functional and technical design. These documents are the basis for development. The test phases are validations of these development goals.
The project testing is managed by the project test coordinator (referenced to as test coordinator).
Testing Phases • Project testing consists of the testing phases:
A Unit Test is: • a validation of the technical design • a test of an individual program unit • Executed by the developer during development
An Integration Test is: • a validation of the functional design (business blueprint) • a test of the entire system and the integration of all units • executed by the service line with optional involvement of the LoB
A Final User Acceptance Test is: • a validation of the requirements and usability
![Page 622: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/622.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-622
• executed and organized by the project test coordinator Customer sign-off is the final approval.
![Page 623: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/623.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-623
© SAP AG 2007
Testing in Projects
Implementation ProjectProject
PreparationRealization
Development, TestBusinessBlueprint
Final Preparation and Go Live
Test Concept
Unit Test (Debugging)
ReviewReview
Regression Test
Use
r Acc
epta
nce
Test
OK
OK Functionalsign off
Systemsign off
Test planning
Inte
grat
ion
Test
BusinessBlueprint Doc
Test Case Development
Bug
Fix
ing
Bug
Fix
ing
Testing & Bug Fixing is ~30% of total project effort
On average, testing and bug fixing consumes 30% of the project resources and duration. Testing should be planned accordingly.
The high level testing phases are scheduled during project planning and preparation. The test coordinator plans the test phases in detail and supports the project manager in planning.
During the business blueprint phase, the test coordinator develops the test concept with support from the technical implementation team and the business analyst. The test coordinator ensures that while the business blueprint structure is built, test cases are described and developed according to the business processes. Testers for the first test phase are nominated and invited.
Before each test phase, an update of the test concept is required. The test coordinator verifies the test cases and ensures the creation and update of them. The test coordinator creates phase a test plan and tester assignment for each test.
![Page 624: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/624.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-624
© SAP AG 2007
Regression Testing
Project A
Project B2
Project C
Approval Release Delivery
Patches, NotesProject B1
Repairs
Regression TestTest Automation
(eCatt + 3rd party tool)
Blueprint Dev Test
Blueprint Dev Test
Blueprint Dev Test
Blueprint Dev Test
Dev Test
Service Packs,
OK Systemsign off
Project Changes
Business Scenario
Process A44
Process A42
Process A43
Test
Test
Business Scenario
Test Process B34
Process B32
Process B33
Test
Test
Test
…. Business Scenario ….
OKFunctional
sign off
Core Business Processes
Regression Testing: • Regression testing ensures that existing business processes are not affected or changed
unintentionally by maintenance changes or projects going live. Regression tests are, typically, automated test cases (eCatt test script, or 3rd party test script tool). A manual test case description is the basis for an automated test script.
• The Test Coordinator manages the regression tests.
![Page 625: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/625.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-625
© SAP AG 2007
Technical System Tests
Technical function tests check the functionality of the technical ingredients in the production environment. (focus: basis components)
System failure test (e.g. Network or Hardware Problems)
Disaster and Recovery test
Backup and Restore test
System Administration test
Print and fax test
GoingLive Check
In technical system tests, the complete infrastructure consisting of database, application server, frontends, network, printer, etc. is checked.
![Page 626: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/626.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-626
© SAP AG 2007
Performance Tests
Performance Tests:Response time of important transactionsRuntime of critical background jobs
Load and Stress Tests:During a Load Test, the performance of a system, depending on the amount of users working simultaneously in it, is tested and monitored. Therefore, Virtual Users are deployed.
A Stress Test analyses the performance of a system under extreme conditions, e.g. by creating mass data.
Period-end closing test
Goal of both Load and Stress Testing is the identification of so-called „bottlenecks“, that slow down the system.
In performance tests, the throughput and response times of the system are measured. Performance tests are an important extension of pure functional tests. It is a prerequisite for the execution of performance tests that the functional correctness of the application is tested.
![Page 627: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/627.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-627
© SAP AG 2007
Test Planning (1)
How will testing be performed?Manual testsAutomated test scripts
What tools can be used?Test Organization:
SAP Test WorkbenchSolution Manager – Business Process Repository3rd party tools like HP Quality Center
Test Automation:CATT - Computer Aided Test TooleCATT 3rd party tools like Compuware, Mercury Quick Test Pro, Mercury Load Runner
For Textual Cases:Process descriptionsTemplates for test casesTest case review is useful (correctness, completeness, grade of details)
![Page 628: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/628.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-628
© SAP AG 2007
Test Planning (2)
Who will test?Customer’s employees
Project team member / IT-member
Department / User
Internal revision
Customers basis team
External consultants
Who is testing when?
Use of the 4-eyes-principal?
What skills do the testers have?
Management commitment for testing available?
![Page 629: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/629.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-629
© SAP AG 2007
Requirements for a test case description
Contents:Test case: <Z_naming convention> Title: <Test case title>Description
PreparationExecutionChecking / expected result
Extra notes
![Page 630: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/630.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-630
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 631: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/631.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-631
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Test Workbench – Overview
Test Organizer
eCATT
CATT
Test Workbench
Migration
Status information
Management
Status information
Management
3rd-party test tools
Open Interface
Test Management & Execution
Test Automation, Recording
Test Workbench was first realized for the organization of release tests in SAP Product development.
Integrated in SAP Solution Manager, mySAP Business Suite / SAP Netweaver → No extra costs
SAP-Tool to organize and perform tests: • during an SAP Implementation project • within Application Change Management process
Parts of Test Workbench: • Test Organizer • Computer Aided Test Tool (CATT) • eCATT (since WebAS 6.20)
![Page 632: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/632.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-632
© SAP AG 2007
Testing – Process in Detail
TestExecution
Assignment of test packages
to testersoperation queue of
a single tester
Collection of test cases
Project/business relatede.g. Implementation CRM 4.0
Interaction center
Selection of test cases Aim and time relatede.g. for applying a
specific Support Package
Test analysis
TestersTest packageTest packageTest packageTest packageTest packageTest package
Test plan
Project structure
with assigned test cases
Test catalog, Project or Solution Directory structure: • Hypertext-Structure • Collection of Test cases
Test plans: • View on one Test catalog • Contains all Test cases for one Test
Test package: • Person- and time oriented view on a Test plan • Contains all Test cases one Tester has to work with
Test case: • Business process step / Process chain • manual Test case / CATT-Module / CATT-Script / eCATT-Script
![Page 633: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/633.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-633
© SAP AG 2007
A test catalog is a directory structure to store test cases.In the Configuration phase, create a test catalog and assign test cases.
Testing – Create and Assign Test Cases
There are different test case types to assign: • CATT (automated / regression testing) • eCATT Test Configuration (automated / regression testing) • External Application (e.g. attached files) • Function Module Test (normally not used outside SAP development) • Manual test case (test description in SAPscript) • Test Document (e.g. upload of a Microsoft Office document)
![Page 634: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/634.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-634
© SAP AG 2007
Systematic storage of test cases for testing business processesAdministration of manual and automated testsGeneration of project-specific test plans and test packagesAssignment of testers, who will find the assigned test packages in their work lists
Testing – Generate Test Plans and Test Packages
Test plans represent a single test event, for example, an integration test cycle in a project. All test cases which are relevant for this test event are assigned to a test plan.
Test packages are assigned to certain testers. Go via EASY ACCESS Menu TEST Β TEST WORKBENCH Β TEST ORGANIZER Β
TEST PLAN MANAGEMENT (Transaktion STWB_2). Choose the Test plan you want to create Test packages for.
![Page 635: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/635.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-635
© SAP AG 2007
Access to user specific worklistTest execution in accordance with test case descriptionLog of test results and statusCreation of a Support Message, if necessary
Test Execution
Transaction STWB_WORK provides a user specific worklist to the testers. Here, they can find the test case descriptions, execute the tests and log the test success or failure. Furthermore, they can make notes or create Service Desk messages.
![Page 636: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/636.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-636
© SAP AG 2007
Detailed views of test progress and test resultsGraphics and reports for all test plans in a projectExport of test results into office applications
Test Monitoring and Reporting
The test coordinator can track the status of the test progress in different transactions: … on the level of: • Projects, Business Scenarios and Processes
− SOLAR_EVAL • Test plans and test packages
− SOLAR_EVAL, STWB_2, STWB_INFO
![Page 637: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/637.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-637
© SAP AG 2007
Administration of Problems during a testDetailed Analysis and Prioritization of ProblemsAssignment of processors via Test Coordinator
Problem Ticket Handling
Testers can create Service Desk messages to track failed test cases.
![Page 638: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/638.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-638
© SAP AG 2007
Test Report
Microsoft Word Document
Examples for usage of a test report:
Formal acceptance of a test phaseDocumentation obligation in validated areas (FDA Compliance)
(Transaction: STWB_2, menu Go to -> Test Report)Generation of a Test Report for one Test PlanMS Word Document containing all Test Plan informationEnhanced traceability of test resultsVarious selection and assembly options for Test Report
After a test phase, a test report can be created. This is often required in validated areas (FDA compliance).
![Page 639: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/639.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-639
© SAP AG 2007
Benefits of the SAP Test Workbench
The SAP Test Workbench provides the following benefits:Guarantees reusability for manual and automated test casesEasy test case description and test result documentationLogging of who has tested what, when and with which result Test results are reproducibleSupport for systematic testingWell-designed monitoring possibilities for Test Manager (Status analysis)Simple handling
![Page 640: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/640.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-640
© SAP AG 2007
System-Demo
System-Demo
![Page 641: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/641.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-641
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 642: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/642.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-642
© SAP AG 2007
Additional Benefits of the SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager:Provides the business process structure as central repository for test casesIs a central system administration platform and provides RFC Connections to the satellite systemsProvides integration with Service Desk, Change Request Management, Implementation
![Page 643: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/643.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-643
© SAP AG 2007
Testing in SAP Solution Manager
Central definition and preparation of test plans and packages.Assign test packages to Testers.
Testers find test packages in theirpersonal Work-list and execute thetest, for example, using eCATTs.
Check the status of your tests in the Status Info System.
Business Blueprint & Configuration
Test Plan
BC Register in Web Shop
Select Product
Update Shopping Basket
Business-to-Consumer
Create Order
Process Order
Order Processing
Selected Business Scenarios
Internet Sales: B2C
Business Processes
Register in Web Shop
Select Product
Update Shopping Basket
Business-to-Consumer
Create Order
Process Order
Order Processing
Business Processes
Internet Sales: B2C
Selected Business Scenarios
You organize tests after you have created a Business Blueprint and made initial configurations in the Realization phase.
The first step of more detailed test organization is creating a test plan. During the Business Blueprint phase, you have created a project structure, consisting of business scenarios, processes and process steps. You have then assigned transactions and test cases to process steps. When you create a test plan, the system will offer you this project structure as a basis for your test plans. In addition, the system will also provide all those manual and automated test cases you have already assigned to processes or process steps, and you can select them for your test plan.
![Page 644: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/644.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-644
© SAP AG 2007
Assign test casesIn the Configuration phase (SOLAR02), assign test cases to each scenario, process (e.g., for integration testing) or even process step (e.g. for unit testing).
Leverage Business Process Definition
![Page 645: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/645.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-645
© SAP AG 2007
Define Project System Landscape:In Solution Manager Project Administration (SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN):
allocate physical systems for all system roles relevant for testing (e.g. Quality Assurance System) define if central system for storage of test cases is obligatorydefine templates for test case description and test notes
Define project structure:In Business Blueprint phase (SOLAR01), create a project structure, consisting of business scenarios, processes and process steps. The system will offer you this project structure as a basis for your test plans.
Project System Landscape
![Page 646: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/646.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-646
© SAP AG 2007
Central Test Co-ordination
Example: Sales Order Processing
Create Sales Order
Availability Check
Credit Check
Receive Order
Order Confirmation
Maintain Status
SAP CRM SAP APO SAP R/3T
est
Exe
cuti
onT
est
Mgm
t.
SAP Solution Manager
Configure Products
Determine Conditions
Replicate Order
Business processes are often distributed across different systems. Therefore, it makes sense to store all the test cases in a central administration system.
![Page 647: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/647.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-647
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Manager
Integration with other Tools in SAP Solution Manager
Test Organizer
eCATT
Test Workbench
Status information
Management
Status information
Management
Test Management & Execution
Test Automation, Recording
Implementation ContentProject Structure
Change Request Management
Service DeskIssue
ManagementMigration
CATT
The Test Organizer is integrated with other tools in SAP Solution Manager: Implementation Content Project Structure
• Service Desk Issue Management • Change Request Management
![Page 648: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/648.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-648
© SAP AG 2007
Interface to HP Quality Center
SAP Solution Manager HP Quality CenterSe
rvic
e De
sk
Report D
efectBusiness Blueprint (Draft)
1Build initial Test Cases Structure
2
Business Blueprint (Final) 3
Finalize Test Case Structure4
Customizing
Development
UI Design
5
Implement Test Cases6
Test Execution7
Document Results8
Test Data Analysis10
Display Analysis 12
Design Handover:• System Type• Business Blueprint• Transaction• General Doc• Project Doc• Status• Keywords• Graphics• Blueprint Lock• Requirements
Build Handover:• Logical Component• Status• Requirements• Config Lock (tbd)• Lock Requirement Tab
Execute Handover:• Link to Requirement• Execution Results to
SAP Solution Manager
Test Status9
11
13
Status
Status
Status
Close Implementation Project15
Create Implementation Project0
Close Project Cycle/ Release14
Create Testing Project 0
Link
Status
Queries
The documentation in HQC is based on the information provided by SAP Solution Manager. For each business structure node, a folder is created in HQC. Additional information on each business structure node is handled as a folder attribute in
HQC. Those attributes are stored in the same way as in SAP Solution Manager (e.g. Tabs). Content of SAP Solution Manager tabs are displayed via a link in HQC. Test requirements on business level will be assigned on the new tab “Requirements” in SAP
Solution Manager. SAP Solution Manager test requirements are replicated 1:1 in HP Quality Center (push and
pull updates). Manual test cases from SSM content are treated like a requirement and transferred to HP
Quality Center as a requirement. HQC requirements are available via a link from SAP Solution Manager requirement. Definitions: • Test requirement in SAP Solution Manager = description of test content on business level • Test case in HP Quality Center = description of test content on technical level
HP Quality Center is Master System for calculation of test execution result status.
![Page 649: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/649.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-649
Preconfigured Dashboard UI and API for basic data are provided by HQC and displayed in SAP Solution Manager.
Ad-hoc analysis and reporting of test status and test status values are possible, by request through SAP Solution Manager (based on transferred time stamp and requirement/ or business structure from SAP Solution Manager to HQC)
For detailed analysis, its possible to access the test data via a link in HQC. It is possible to maintain BI reporting based on HQC standard values in SAP Solution
Manager.
![Page 650: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/650.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-650
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 651: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/651.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-651
© SAP AG 2007
Testing Approach
Manual Testing:After the creation of test case descriptions, testers perform the actual testing manually.The result of each test case is recorded manually.No test automation tools are being used.Test management tools can be deployed for test administration and test organization.
Automated Testing:After the creation of test case descriptions, the actual testing is performed by automated test tools.After the test, the result of each test case is recorded automatically by the test tool.
Clear and detailed test run recordsTest cases can be reused for later purposes.(e.g., Support Packages) Regression TestingMethodical approach to reduce costs and safeguardthe software lifecycle process.
![Page 652: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/652.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-652
© SAP AG 2007
What can be tested with eCATT
DatabaseTable operations
DataTable
Cust.Table
SAP GUI for Windows and Java
SAP GUI for HTML / external apps.
?
Web
AS
Web Dynpro viaPresentation Server
eCATTServerBusiness Logic
ClientGUI
eCATT can only test WebDynpro via the Presentation Server and SAP GUI for Windows and Java.
If SAP GUI for HTML or external applications must be tested, 3rd party test tools must be used. An interface exists: 3rd party tools can be encapsulated into an eCATT. That means eCATT calls the 3rd party tool and receives the results after the test run.
eCATT can read tables from the database and it can simulate new customizing settings
![Page 653: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/653.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-653
© SAP AG 2007
Integration of External Tools into eCATT
eCATT is not intended to be able to test any application running on any platform
Instead, it aims to be the best tool available for testing in proprietary SAP environments such as
SAPGUI for Windows and SAPGUI for JavaThe SAP application serverThe SAP database server
To enable testing of external applications from within the eCATT environment, a certifiable interface allows third-party tools to integrate their solutions with eCATT
The following products are currently certified against the BC-ECATT interface: • Compuware TestPartner (5.1 or higher) • Mercury QuickTest Professional (6.5 or higher with SAP Add-on) • Segue Software SilkPerformer (7.2 or higher)
![Page 654: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/654.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-654
© SAP AG 2007
Requirements for eCATT
Support Package LevelEach system where you want to test must have at least the following support package level:
4.6C: Support Package 324.6D: Support Package 216.10: Support Package 176.20: Support Package 03
Client SettingsFor each client in which you want to test, you must ensure that the CATT/eCATT flag is set to allow tests to run.
GUI ScriptingIn order to use the new GUI Scripting functions, the following settings have to be made:
Profile parameter sapgui/user_scripting must be set to TRUESAP GUI must be Version 6.20 with patch level =>18 and GUI Scripting installed
Before you can start testing, you must prepare your various systems. Each of your target systems must have the appropriate support package level as shown above.
For each client in which you want to test, you must ensure that eCATT is allowed. To do this, start transaction SCC4, pick the relevant client and ensure that the Restrictions when starting CATT and eCATT option is set to CATT and eCATT allowed.
To use the SAPGUI command (see unit 6), you must ensure that GUI Scripting is active in the central test system and in any target systems that you may require. To do this, start transaction RZ11 in the relevant system, enter profile parameter sapgui/user_scripting and choose Display. If the current value is FALSE, change it to TRUE. You must log off and back on again for the change to take effect.
![Page 655: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/655.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-655
© SAP AG 2007
An automated test script with eCATT
Testinstructions Log Archive
Test configuration
Nr 400
Nr 500
Nr 620
System data
Test data
A finished test case: the test case that a user will see in his work-list in the SAP Test Workbench consists of: • A set of instructions that describe the test case • One or more sets of data with which the test case will be executed • A description of the system landscape in which the test is to be performed
The result of each test run is a log. The log contains detailed information about the test environment (system – including technical platform information and release, user, time and date) and the commands that were executed during the test. You can also see the data that was fed into the test case and the results that it returned. Logs can be either archived or deleted using periodic background jobs.
![Page 656: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/656.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-656
© SAP AG 2007
Script Language Elements
Inline-ABAP Customizing
Applications
Conditions
ChecksLo
ops
Calculations
Reading TableValues
The main purpose of eCATT is to record applications. However it allows you to record and replay applications, perform checks, and use various
common programming control structures. You can read table values, include ABAP coding and simulate customizing settings.
![Page 657: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/657.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-657
© SAP AG 2007
Commands for Recording Applications
Applications
FUNCalls a Function
Module
TCDAllows you to record
and replay SAP Transactions
SAPGUIAllows you
to record sequencesof screens containing
controls
An interface allows youto integrate test tools
from third-party vendors
with SAP eCATT
WebDynproAllows you
to record webdynpro-based transactions
There are five different ways of testing applications. Each of them is appropriate for a particular kind of application that you might want to test.
It is important to remember that no single way is suitable for testing everything. For this reason, you should always take care to pick the correct driver before you start to record your script.
![Page 658: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/658.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-658
© SAP AG 2007
Pattern Function
The Pattern function is similar to the statement pattern in the ABAP Editor. It allows you to build individual eCATT commands.
The pattern function allows you to create eCATT commands quickly and easily. A command consists of: • The command keyword • Argument (the target object, for example, the function module you want to call or the
transaction you want to record) • Interface (parameters that need to be passed will be generated automatically) • Target system
You can use any system that is defined in the current system data container. If there is no system data container attached to the script, you can only execute the command locally.
![Page 659: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/659.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-659
© SAP AG 2007
Test 3Test 2Test 1
Test Automation – Effort Calculation
25
2,5
14 1414
Automated tests
Manual tests
Initial effort for development
of eCATT scripts
Test effort(people days)
2,5
Break-Even
Regular Software Maintenance / Transports(Support Packages, Customer Coding)
Cumulated effort
Adjustments and execution of eCATT scripts
In this example the test effort after regular software mainenance was 14 FTEs for manual testing of the core business processes.
With eCATT the regular test effort was only 2,5 FTEs for the adjustment and execution of the eCATTs. The break-even was reached at the second test cycle.
The diagram shows that the creation of scripts has a high initial effort but with continued usage a break-even point is reached.
![Page 660: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/660.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-660
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Optimization – Project Timeline
Research
Q4/2004 Q1/2005 Q2/2005 Q3/2005 Q4/2005 2006
Phase 2Automated Regression Test
Core Business Processes (class 1)
Test FrameWork
Pilot
TMO
Test Framework(manual test cases)
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 1 Core Business Processes (class 1, 2)
Manual Regression Test
Test AutomationFramework, eCatt
eCatt Pilot
Test Automation
In this example, a customer started a test management optimization project in 2004. In phase 1, all test case descriptions for class 1 and 2 projects were reviewed, updated into a
predefined template and loaded into the Test Organizer of SAP Solution Manager. This project phase lasted about six months.
In phase 2, the manual test cases for class 1 projects were partly automated by eCATT. This project phase ran for about 9 months.
![Page 661: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/661.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-661
© SAP AG 2007
System-Demo
System-Demo
![Page 662: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/662.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-662
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 663: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/663.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-663
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Code Inspector
This is a tool for checking static ABAP coding and DDIC objects (generally: TADIR objects).
Aspects of checks are:Performance, Security, Reliability, and Statistical Information
Checks are performed on single objects or Object Sets(programs, function modules, classes, interfaces, DDIC-objects).
A Check Variant can be made up of one or several single checks.
A Check Variant and one object/Object Set can be combined into an Inspection.
The Code Inspector tests single objects or object sets (programs, function groups, classes, interfaces, Dictionary objects) for performance, security, serviceability, error proneness, and statistical information.
You can call the Code Inspector for the relevant single objects directly from the ABAP Editor (SE38), the Function Builder (SE37), or the Class Builder (SE24) (Object->Check->Code Inspector). The system then checks using a default check variant.
![Page 664: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/664.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-664
© SAP AG 2007
Run Inspection before and after project import
Object sets, check variants, and inspections are created using transaction SCI. Object Sets and Check Variants (that is, combinations of single checks to which you can assign parameters) are managed independently of one another. An Inspection connects each check variant with an object set.
![Page 665: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/665.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-665
© SAP AG 2007
Select Syntax Check Generation
Individual checks are assigned to different check categories. The following list shows examples of check categories and individual checks. • General checks contain formatting elements, such as listing table names from SELECT
statements. • Performance checks contain checks for performance and for resource use, such as: • Analysis of the WHERE condition for SELECT / UPDATE and DELETE • SELECT statements that read past the table buffer • Low-performing accesses to internal tables • Security checks contain checks for critical statements, cross-client queries, inadequate
authority checks. • Syntax check / generation contains ABAP syntax check, an enhanced program check, and
generation: • Programming conventions contain checks for name conventions. • Search functions contain searches in ABAP coding for tokens (words) and statements.
![Page 666: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/666.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-666
© SAP AG 2007
Create Object set – save object set with your search key
Using sets of objects, you can group several single objects together for an inspection. Sets of objects include, for example, programs, function groups, classes, or DDIC objects. In general, any Repository objects can be included in a set of objects.
In this example all objects with original system DEV were selected.
![Page 667: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/667.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-667
© SAP AG 2007
Run Inspection
During an inspection, individual objects or sets of objects are checked to see if certain programming guidelines have been adhered to. The result of an inspection run is a list of the individual checks made with errors, warnings, or information messages.
![Page 668: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/668.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-668
© SAP AG 2007
Results of Inspection
HTML Document
An inspection returns a Check Result, from which you can derive another object set.
![Page 669: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/669.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-669
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 670: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/670.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-670
© SAP AG 2007
Goals of a Volume Test
Ideally, ALL possible situations where critical data volumes might come up the system performance should be tested:
Large data volume (background jobs) as defined by business time-windowsHeavy dialog activity Many concurrent users (possibly same/similar transactions)
Which business processes?Load start pageLogonSearch for …View ResultsLogoff
How many executions per time interval?Extraordinary Situations:
Recovery scenarios What happens in case of (possibly enormous) data back-logs after system(s) have not been availableChristmas / seasonal business activities in addition to “average”business.
Large data volume (background jobs) as defined by business time-windows Heavy dialog activity many concurrent users (possibly same/similar transactions),
expensive jobs started in dialog task which must be finished in a given time-frame and/or are impacting the performance
Recovery scenarios What happens in case of (possibly enormous) data back-logs after one (or several) systems have not been available for a certain while (HW failure, standard maintenance, software issues that require a system re-start, LiveCache breaks down recovery, data upload heavily requires system resources)
Additional business requirements what happens in case of, e.g., Christmas / seasonal business activities which challenge the available resources stronger than “average” business?
These business peaks may lead to a backlog which has to be processed later and does require additional time-windows.
![Page 671: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/671.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-671
© SAP AG 2007
What should be Monitored?
SAP System Checks:Single Statistical RecordsR/3 work process overviewResponse times, CPU times, database times and number of executions of the programs and transactions that implement the business process steps involved in a test scenario Utilization of SAP shared buffers and SAP memoryNumber of active usersError messages and warnings
Single Statistical Records STAD R/3 work process overview SM66 Response times, CPU times, database times and number of executions of the programs and
transactions that implement the business process steps involved in a test scenario ST03 Utilization of SAP shared buffers and SAP memory ST02 Number of active users SM04 Error messages and warnings ST22, SM21
![Page 672: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/672.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-672
© SAP AG 2007
Performance Analysis Tool /SDF/MON
Performance Analysis Tool /SDF/MON has been developed for expert analysis of system performance in SAP R/3 systems.
This tool collects information, from different sources, about CPU Utilization, Memory Management, Database, Work Process, Workload, STAD, RFC, etc and stores this information in database for further usage. This information is collected for a predefined period of time with a predefined resolution (e.g. each x seconds).
In comparison with standard performance analysis transactions like ST06, ST02, ST05, STAD etc., the main benefit of /SDF/MON tool is that all collected information for performance analysis is linked automatically to the time stamps, and is available from one single screen (it is not necessary to switch between different screens and compare time stamps manually).
The tool is available with ST-PI 2005.1, SP3.
![Page 673: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/673.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-673
© SAP AG 2007
What Should be Monitored?
Operating System Checks:CPU utilizationMemory utilizationDisk statisticsNetwork Adapters
Database Checks:Buffer QualityLock wait situationsShared SQL AreaLatches
These checks have to be performed on the different platforms. Each operating system and database provides different tools and procedures to monitor the
load.
![Page 674: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/674.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-674
© SAP AG 2007
How to Generate the Load?
The load can be produced manually by the users.Users have to perform dialog steps during the load test
Alternatively, you can use load injection tools, like SAP Loadrunner by Mercury. In the SAP environment the following types of virtual users are important:
ERP/CRM: It connects via the SAPGUI Scripting language to a SAP GUIE-Business: It connects via the http / https protocol to a SAP application (e.g. Enterprise Portal)
The V-user of type ERP/CRM instances a SAPGUI on the frontend where it is started. Due to the resources on the frontend, the number of V-users per frontend is limited to about 30.
The V-user of type E-Business connects directly to a proxy server. With this V-user type, more than 500 connections per frontend are possible.
![Page 675: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/675.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-675
© SAP AG 2007
Load Generation by External Tools
Load generator
Backend(e.g. ERP)
Server (e.g. EP)
Database
Controller
• Controls the test
• Collects monitoringdata
Operating System
Monitoring J2EE
Monitoring CCMS
Monitoring DB
Monitoring OS
The first step in the execution of automated load tests is to record scripts. Then, the scripts can run in parallel.
The number of parallel executions is controlled by a controller. The controller also collects monitoring data from the different systems and platforms which
are involved in the test. During the GoingLive Check Optimization session for Enterprise Portal a load generator
needs to be installed at the customer side. The controller is installed at SAP and operated by the watcher. The preparational steps are explained in SAP note 807951.
![Page 676: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/676.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-676
© SAP AG 2007
SAP Loadrunner by Mercury
This is a screenshot of SAP Loadrunner by Mercury. In the box Scenario Groups, you see two different test scripts which run in parallel. In this example, the script “test1” is executed 30 times in parallel. The script empty did not start yet. You can start and stop scripts or add virtual users with the buttons next to the Scenario Groups.
In the lower part of the screenshot, certain monitoring data is collected. The graphs show the number of virtual users (V-users), the hits per second, the transaction response time and the Windows resources.
After the test run, the monitoring data is available for further analysis.
![Page 677: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/677.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-677
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 678: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/678.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-678
© SAP AG 2007
Setting up a Test Landscape
Create a relevant test landscape by:Client CopySystem CopyManual Creation of Test DataSAP Test Data Migration Server
BAKBB-Copy of B
/MYSAP/
SAP
SDTUDelivery
PRDProduction B
TQAQuality Asst.
ZTDV
TDVDevelopment
ZTDV
![Page 679: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/679.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-679
© SAP AG 2007
System Copy Procedure
Advantages:Identical copy of the whole system, including repository objects, client independent and client dependent dataNo downtime of production system is needed, as a backup can be usedSplit Mirror Technology supports fast system copies
Disadvantages:If the production system is very large, the test systems also get very largeSensitive data is copied into the test systemSettings need to be readjusted after the system copyTransports need to be re-imported into the test systemSame client structure must be used in test system as in production systemVersion history is overwritten (in development systems)
![Page 680: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/680.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-680
© SAP AG 2007
System Copy Procedure with a Backup
PRD QAS
1) Backup
2) Re-Import missing
transports
1) Set up QAS with a current backup of PRD.
2) Re-Import all transports which are in transition (have already been imported into QAS but not yet in PRD) into QAS.
All transports which were already imported in QAS, but are not yet in the current backup of PRD must be re-imported after the system copy.
Sometimes customers use a special master backup for the setup of test systems. One reason for using a master backup can be that it contains an appropriate amount of test data. Often, the production system is so big that it cannot be copied any more.
The master backup is a baseline for the software configuration. All changes since the time of the backup must be re-imported into the new test system.
![Page 681: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/681.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-681
© SAP AG 2007
Determine the Delta: Compare the Import History
Use the Import History to determine the transports which were imported into QAS, but not in PRD. These transports must be re-imported after the system copy.
STMS Overview Imports Select a system Go to Import History
Extract the import history in QAS before the system copy and after the system copy. The missing transports must be re-imported.
![Page 682: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/682.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-682
© SAP AG 2007
Change Tracking in SAP Solution Manager
SAP Solution Manager provides a tracking function, which automatically determines the delta transports.
![Page 683: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/683.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-683
© SAP AG 2007
Usage of Virtual Systems
DEV QAS PRD
Virtual System VRP
Virtual systems can be used as collectors for transport requests.
When a transport is imported into QAS, it is automatically added to the VRP Buffer.
Recommendation: Keep one buffer for each project / release / Go-Live
When a transport is imported into QAS, it is automatically added to the VRP Buffer. Therefore, the import buffer of the virtual system VRP contains the complete import history of QAS.
The buffer of VRP can be attached to QAS after a system refresh. Then, the missing transports can be re-imported.
The usage of the virtual buffer avoids the work of adding many transport requests to the QAS buffer by using the “tp addtobuffer” command.
We recommend to save one buffer for each project / release / Go-Live (project buffer). Starting from a baseline, you can then re-build the software configuration after each Go-Live in your test systems.
![Page 684: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/684.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-684
© SAP AG 2007
Usage of Virtual Systems as Project Piece List
DEV QAS PRD
Virtual System VRP
CIC_3.01_15_03_2007
Maintcycle_30_03_2007
CIC_3.02_15_04_2007
Software Library
Recommendation: Copy the buffer foreach project / release / GoLive
Virtual systems can also be used as a piecelist for all transports that belong to a certain project. For that purpose the virtual system is added behind the production system and collects all
transports that are imported into production. If a test system needs to be rebuilt you can import the individual project buffers in the right
sequence.
![Page 685: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/685.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-685
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 686: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/686.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-686
© SAP AG 2007
TDMS
Productive system
Non-productive systemsTDMS:
Provide representative application data (extract) from a productive system to non-productive systems
Focus: Refresh of an existing system
Selection of data from production system by different scenarios like:
Master dataCompany code“time slice”
SAP Test Data Migration Server
With SAP TDMS you can: • Reduce data volume in test systems • Simulate production environment by using real business data • Preserve consistent business processes within the target system • Reduce post-processing work by keeping administrative data (objects) in the target system
unchanged (interfaces, users, authorizations, etc.) • Perform selective refresh of individual clients in target system (esp. in multi-client
systems) • Scramble sensitive data according to your needs
![Page 687: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/687.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-687
© SAP AG 2007
Available Scenarios
Choose the set of data to be extracted from your production environment:
MD/C-Scenario (Master and config. data)Only master and configuration data No transaction data
TIM-Scenario (Time-based)All master and configuration data A reduced set of transaction data (based on selected FROM DATE)
TDMS also copy Customizing data. This means all transports thathave already been imported into the target system, but are missingin the source system must be re-imported.
TDMS also copy Customizing data. This means all transports that have already been imported into the target system but are missing in the source system must be re-imported.
![Page 688: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/688.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-688
© SAP AG 2007
Application of Different Reduction Scenarios
Development System:Additional test client in development system – no interference with actual development clientMaster Data & Configuration(Creation of transaction data by testers)Time-Based reduction
Alternative 1: with e.g. two monthsAlternative 2: with only very few transaction data, e.g. 1 week
Test Environment:Depending on test purposes, the amount of test data in the system can be varied.
Q/A system with 60% of production dataTest system with 30% of production dataTraining system with 10% of production data
The amount of test data that is copied can be selected flexibly.
![Page 689: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/689.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-689
© SAP AG 2007
SAP TDMS – Reduction of Data Volume
Assumption:
80 - 90% of the production data is stored in 10 - 20% of client-dependent tables
Data volume reduction:
In order to reduce the overall volume, only some tables need to be reduced
All other tables (master and configuration data) are migrated entirely
Customer-individual tables are transferred entirely or can be reduced via e.g. time criteria
Some tables are excluded from transfer by default:
E.g. change documents, user tables, etc. (customizable)* Estimate based on project experience
7% Config. Data *
3 % Admin- Data*
80% Transaction Data *
10% Master Data *
Client DB
![Page 690: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/690.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-690
© SAP AG 2007
Technology - Architecture
Sender System SAP TDMS Receiver System
Fast, optimized data transfer:Proven, high-speed data extraction technology (Migration Workbench)Table-wise data migration via RFC (Remote Function Call) connections
The Test Data Migration Server is built on top of the Migration Workbench which is a proven and stable tool.
![Page 691: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/691.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-691
© SAP AG 2007
Facts and Figures
System Recommendation:SAP WebAS 6.20, 6.40 or 7.00Shipped as Extension of SAP Solution Manager 4.0Minimum 4 CPU, 4 GB RAM, 20 GB HD
Supported Releases:SAP R/3 4.6C SAP R/3 4.7mySAP ERP 2004 (ECC 5.0)mySAP ERP 2005 (ECC 6.0)
Pricing:Price is dependent on size of production DBLicense covers one production system and n non-production systems
Knowledge Transfer/Training:TZTDM3 (offered by SAP Education)
![Page 692: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/692.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-692
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Support Enablement Package (SEP) at a Glance
Packaged Tools:BMC AppSight for Windows/.NetSAP Test Data Migration ServerCA Wily IntroscopeSAP Custom Development
Optimization PackageSAP Reverse Business EngineerSAP Best Practices for
Operations
The Solution Support Enablement Package provides a suite of proven tools that enable your IT support organization to deliver
best-in-class support for your SAP solution.
Find more information at http://service.sap.com/sep
In E2E Change Control, the following Solution Support Enablement Package tools are of special interest:
SAP Custom Development Optimization Package: • Change Impact Analysis during testing and import of support packages or upgrades
SAP Client Migration Server: • Customizing and repository compare of two systems (homogeneity of the system
landscape) SAP Test Data Migration Server: • Set up test systems with current test data
![Page 693: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/693.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-693
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management Unit Overview Diagram
Test ManagementLesson 1: Theory of Software Testing
Lesson 2: SAP Test Workbench
Lesson 3: Test Management with SAP Solution Manager
Lesson 4: Test Automation with eCATT
Lesson 5: SAP Code Inspector
Lesson 6: Volume Test
Lesson 7: System Copy Procedures
Lesson 8: Test Data Migration Server
Lesson 9: Test Case Selection
![Page 694: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/694.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-694
© SAP AG 2007
Guideline for Test Case Selection
What should be tested?Minimum: Core Business Processes that are critical for the business. These test cases must be selected by the business process owners through ABC analysisTest cases that showed problems in previous test runsAreas which are affected by the new changesMost frequent transactions according to ST03 transaction profile
![Page 695: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/695.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-695
© SAP AG 2007
Categorization and Evaluation of Business Processes
20% of efforts
80% of coverage
20% of coverage
80% of efforts
Selection of Business Processes for automation should be done taking several different aspects in mind
20% of efforts
80% of coverage
Example of possible Business Processes prioritization in terms of complexity and impact for business
Low High VeryHigh
Impact
Standard
Complex
VeryComplex
Complexity
11
2
23
3
3
Prio 2
Prio 1
Prio 31
2
The Business Processes chosen to be involved into the test concept must be divided into several company-wide categories (preferably three or four) in accordance with their priority and availability requirements. To each category a description should be provided which explains clearly what range of Business Process priority and availability requirements is covered by this certain category.
You should define criteria which determine whether a test of a Business Process will be automated or not. Generally speaking, the business processes which are first candidates to have automated test cases are the processes which: • are most critical for the company – you will have a possibility to test them even in times
of very limited time and resources availability. • runs over several systems and includes several interfaces – you will have more guarantee
that no step in a process will be overseen or ignored and that all interfaces, which are often considered as a “socket in the wall”, are tested and running properly
• are being tested most often – a lot of resources will be saved, ROI is guaranteed. Please also note that automatic testing is no magic formula for a balanced test management
situation. It would be a wrong decision to try to automate all the tests performed in the company as some of them can only be automated and maintained with a significant effort and which exceeds the efforts of performing them as manual tests
![Page 696: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/696.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-696
© SAP AG 2007
ST03 Transaction Profile
You can go to the transaction profile in ST03. Select the total workload for the last month. In the analysis view, select the transaction profile.
Sort the list by number of dialog steps. This gives you the most frequently used transactions and reports.
You can also sort the list by total response times. The result will be the transactions and reports that cause most load in the system.
![Page 697: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/697.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-697
© SAP AG 2007
Key Aspects of Successful Test Strategy
Centralized test coordinationDefinition of the test environmentManagement commitment and commitment for the test resourcesCategorization of the business processes in accordance with their priority and availability requirementsPlanning of organizational and methodological actions to ensure the completeness of test casesEvaluation of the business processes and selection those of themyou want to create automated test cases for (manual <> automated)Usage of dedicated tools for test administration, execution and monitoring
![Page 698: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/698.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-698
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management: Unit Summary
You should now be able to:Explain different types of tests and test strategies
Describe the features of the Test Workbench and eCATT
Understand the benefits of SAP Solution Manager and how SAP Solution Manager is integrated with the HP Quality Center
Use the SAP Code Inspector to perform automated syntax checks
Describe how to prepare test systems by performing system copies or by using the SAP Test Data Migration Server
Set guideline for how to select test cases
![Page 699: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/699.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-699
Exercises
Unit: Test Management
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Organize a test project with the SAP Solution Manager • Execute the test cases and protocol the results
TT4 is the Solution Manger system which contains all information about the system landscape. TT5 is a satellite system which is managed by TT4.
9-1 Create a new test plan.
9-1-1 Create a new test plan with the name E2ECC_## Integration Test Cylce 1 and assign it to your solution E2ECC_##.
9-1-2 Assign all test cases which are available in your solution to the test plan and generate the test plan. How many test cases do exist?
9-2 Create a new test package. 9-2-1 Create a new test package with the name E2ECC_## Test Package 9-2-2 Select all available testcases and generate the test package. 9-2-3 Assign the test package to your own user-ID and to your neighbor.
9-3 Now you are acting as a tester. 9-3-1 What is the transaction for executing the tests?
Answer: _________________________________________________________ Call that transaction. Which test packages are in your worklist? Navigate into the test package E2ECC_## Test Package.
9-3-2 Test the business process step Create Sales Order in ECC. a) Read the manual test case description. b) Logon to the system TT5:600 and execute the test case according to the description. Does the test deliver the expected result?
9-3-3 Test the business process step Create Sales Order in CRM. This is an
eCATT configuration. What is the total runtime for the test case?
![Page 700: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/700.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-700
Answer: _________________________________________________________
![Page 701: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/701.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-701
What was the runtime for the different transaction steps? Answer: _________________________________________________________ How is the result of the test run rated? Answer: _________________________________________________________
9-4 Now you are the test manager. Perform a status analysis of your test plan. 9-4-1 Go the transaction STWB_INFO and select your project and your test
plan. Do also mark the checkbox Update Test Plans automatically. 9-4-2 How many test cases have the following status?
Errors: ____________ % No Result: _________ % OK: ______________ %
9-4-3 Check in detail which test cases have errors.
![Page 702: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/702.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-702
Solutions
Unit: Test Management
9-1 Create a new test plan. 9-1-1 Create a new test plan with the name E2ECC_## Integration Test Cylce 1
and assign it to your solution E2ECC_##. Goto transaction STWB_2 and press the button to create a new test plan
( ). In the next screen select your project, enter the title E2ECC_## Integration Test Cycle 1.
9-1-2 Assign all test cases which are available in your solution to the test plan
and generate the test plan. How many test cases do exist? In the screen Test Plan Create for Solution E2ECC_## click on the button
Expand All to expand the Test Plan Structure. Now you see all test cases and transactions that are available. Select all test cases and transactions and click on the button Generate Test Plan . Save as local object.
9-2 Create a new test package. 9-2-1 Create a new test package with the name E2ECC_## Test Package
In the screen Test Organizer: Test Plan Management select your test plan and click on the button Test Package Management . screen Test Organizer: Test Package Management click on the button Create Test Package .
9-2-2 Select all available testcases and generate the test package.
![Page 703: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/703.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-703
In the Create Test Package screen expand the complete structure and select all test cases. Then click on the button Generate. Enter the name of the test package. Save as local object.
9-2-3 Assign the test package to your own user-ID and to your neighbor.
In the screen Test Package Management select your test package and click on the button Assign Testers . Enter your own user-ID and the user-ID of your neighbor.
9-3 Now you are acting as a tester. 9-3-1 What is the transaction for executing the tests? Call that transaction.
Which test packages are in your worklist? Navigate into the test package E2ECC_## Test Package. Goto transaction STWB_WORK. There should be at least two test packages assigned to your worklist: Your own test package and the one of your neighbour. Navigate into your own test package with a double click. Select the business process Sales Order Management and expand it.
9-3-2 Test the business process step Create Sales Order in ECC. a) Read the manual test case description. Click on the test case description for the business process step Create Sales Order in ECC.
b) Logon to the system TT5:600 and execute the test case according to the description. Does the test deliver the expected result?
![Page 704: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/704.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-704
The report ZZ_CHANGE_CONTROL_TEST in TT5 gives an error message when you press “No”. Record the test result by clicking on the traffic light for the status. Enter the status Errors/Retest required and save your input.
9-3-3 Test the business process step Create Sales Order in CRM. This is an
eCATT configuration. What is the total runtime for the test case? What was the runtime for the different transaction steps? How is the result of the test run rated? Click on the button to run the automated test case ( ). Observe the different screens that are executed.
The total runtime and the runtime for the different transaction steps can be seen in the eCATT Log Display.
The result of the test run is rated automatically.
9-4 Now you are the test manager. Perform a status analysis of your test plan. 9-4-1 Go the transaction STWB_INFO and select your project and your test
plan. Do also mark the checkbox Update Test Plans automatically.
![Page 705: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/705.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-705
![Page 706: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/706.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 9-706
9-4-2 How many test cases have the following status? Errors: _________% No Result: _________ % OK: __________ % This information is available on the screen Status Info System.
9-4-3 Check in detail which test cases have errors.
Click on the button Status overview to get a detailed list of all test cases with their status.
![Page 707: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/707.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-707
© SAP AG 2007
E2E Change DiagnosticsSolution Landscape Documentation
NetWeaver Development EnvironmentsEnhanced Change and Transport SystemTransport StrategiesChange Request Management
Introduction to E2E Change Control Management
Test ManagementMaintenance Management
IT Reporting for Change Control
IT Reporting for Change Control
![Page 708: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/708.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-708
© SAP AG 2007
Content:
Change Diagnostics
Change Deployment
Change Request Management
Maintenance Management
Test Management
Solution Quality Reporting
IT Reporting for Change Control : Unit Content
![Page 709: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/709.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-709
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control: Unit Objectives
At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
Describe KPIs which are relevant for IT Reporting for Change Control
Know data sources to build up IT Reporting for Change Control
![Page 710: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/710.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-710
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
Test Management
MaintenanceChange Request
Management
Deployment
Change Diagnostics
Solution Quality
Change Diagnostics supports customers in identifying, controlling, maintaining and verifying the versions of configurations of the system landscape components to provide a heterogeneous system landscape.
Change Deployment aims to give a holistic view of an application change in a solution and should ensure that all involved components of an application change are tested and released together.
Change Request Management is the efficient and punctual implementation of SAP software changes, with minimal risks, using standardized methods and procedures.
Maintenance supports the customer in planning and downloading the available SAP software patches and updates for his complete solution landscape.
Test Management supports the customer in planning, preparing, executing and evaluating test cycles. Testing is used to identify the characteristics of a software solution and point out the difference between the actual and required states.
![Page 711: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/711.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-711
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 712: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/712.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-712
© SAP AG 2007
Change Diagnostics KPIs for IT Reporting
Goal:
Change Diagnostics supports customers in identifying, controlling, maintaining and verifying the versions of configurations of the system landscape components, to provide a heterogeneous system landscape.
KPIs:Number of changes in the parameter configuration per time unitInconsistencies in the parameter configuration within the transport landscape and within the productive environmentCompleteness of landscape description in SAP Solution Manager
![Page 713: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/713.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-713
© SAP AG 2007
Compare Multiple Instances
Missingvalue
Additionalvalue
Unchanged value
Different value
Additional value
Missing value
The function “Compare Multiple Instances” reduces the effort spent on comparing multiple J2EE Nodes and complex J2EE landscapes in the background.
You can compare different nodes on the same host, or nodes on different instances and different hosts.
A history of changes is provided for each configuration parameter (based on daily snapshots). In addition, it is possible to display the configuration for a given point in time.
It enables the organization to standardize the solution configuration.
The use case “Compare Multiple Instances” is very useful to: • compare different instances among different hosts (clustered environment) • compare different instances from different landscapes (eg: PROD vs, QAS, DEV, TEST)
Procedure: • Navigate to Compare Multiple Instances ->Trigger compare tab • Check two or more instances to compare • Select one instance as the main instance. This will be used as reference. All other instances
are compared with the main instance. • Trigger the compare (takes a few second until the icon changes to green).
![Page 714: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/714.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-714
• Click the Display button and the “Compare Results” are displayed in the navigation window.
• The parameter changes (different value, missing value, unchanged value and additional value ) are marked with different icons.
![Page 715: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/715.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-715
© SAP AG 2007
Number of Parameter Changes
The E2E Change Analysis Tool shows the number of parameter changes in a certain time interval.
You can see the total number of changes and the number of changes per day. It is important to see if the configuration parameters were only changed at certain maintenance
windows, or, if they were changed continuously.
![Page 716: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/716.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-716
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 717: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/717.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-717
© SAP AG 2007
Change Deployment KPIs for IT Reporting
Goal:
Change Deployment aims to give a holistic view of an applicationchange in a solution and should ensure that all involved components of an application change are tested and released together.
KPIs:Number of transports in the system per time unitNumber of errors during the transports per time unitModification level of the systemsConsistency of the transport landscape
![Page 718: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/718.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-718
© SAP AG 2007
Transports into Production - Overview
PRD
QAS
DEV
In this example, the customer delivers production in release cycles. Major Go-Lives have been performed on the following dates: 18/11/2005, 10/12/2005, 07/02/2006 and 18/03/2006.
According to the customers strategy, there is one release delivery to production per quarter. However, in this example there have been an additional deliveries.
The relevant data for this graphic can be derived from the Import History.
![Page 719: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/719.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-719
© SAP AG 2007
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Tota
l DB
Tim
e [la
st m
onth
]
0
100
200
300
400
500
00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Tran
spor
ts [l
ast s
ix m
onth
]Workload per day, compared with number of transport requests.
Quality Risk
Technical Analysis of the Transport Statistics show the risks to the current Change Schedule, due to many transport during high workload.
Transport into Production During the Day
This diagram shows the time distribution of the imports into production. Some transports take place between 09:00 and 12:00 o‘clock at the time of the highest workload in the system.
![Page 720: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/720.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-720
© SAP AG 2007
Source Systems of Transport Requests in Production
27.02.0601.01.05161DE1
27.04.0601.11.0542QAS
28.04.0601.11.0558PRD
23.03.0601.12.0510DE2
11.04.0610.11.051.453DEV
Date of last import
Date of first import
Number of transports
Source Systems
Many transport requests are cross transports from the system DE1, which is outside the system landscape. Some transport requests were created in the Quality Assurance system, or even in the production system.
![Page 721: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/721.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-721
© SAP AG 2007
2.558Modified Objects
16.025Customer Objects
14.737Customizing Requests since System Installation
17.125Workbench Requests since System Installation
ValueIndicator
System Modification Level
The number of customer objects and modified objects in this example is very high. A high number of modified objects and/or customer objects causes a lot of effort for
adjustment during upgrade and support package projects. Therefore, it increases the Total Costs of Operations.
The number of Workbench and Customizing requests is in balance. If the number of workbench requests is much higher that the number of customizing requests, it shows that no standard functionality is used but most functionality is developed customer specific.
The number of transport requests can be derived from the import history. The modified objects can be seen in the Modification Browser (SE95). The customer objects can be seen in the Transport Organizer Tools (SE03) Objects in Customer namespace.
![Page 722: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/722.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-722
© SAP AG 2007
Modified Objects by Application Component
522Sum
23Technical Application SupportCA-GTF-TS
24SAP Business WorkflowBC-BMT-WFM
29Material MaintenanceSD-MD-MM
42Basic FunctionsSD-FT-PRO
48LocalizationFI-LOC
52SalesSD-SLS
73Financial AccountingFI
80Data CollectionLO-LIS-DC
151ConditionsSD-MD-CM
No. of objectsDescriptionComponent
This table shows an overview of modified objects, grouped by application component. Most modifications are in the areas SD -Conditions and LO – Data Collection. These areas need special attendance during support package imports or upgrades.
![Page 723: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/723.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-723
© SAP AG 2007
Customer Objects by Development Class
Other Dev Classes
Business Warehouse developments
Temporary Objects (never transported!)
Basis Regional
dummyDevelopment FI
Development MMBasis Global
Development SDEDI
Description
8262Sum1327Other
139Z_BW
162YRS1320$TMP
358ZBC
385YPP459YFI
854YMM1336YBC
1377YSD1545YEDI
SumDevelopment Class
This table gives an overview of customer objects, grouped by development class. If customer objects are using SAP standard objects, they are also affected by support package imports and upgrades.
![Page 724: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/724.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-724
© SAP AG 2007
Most Frequently Changed Objects
64Z_BWLIMU REPS MYFDCF08
66YRS1LIMU REPS MYFDCF07
66$TMPLIMU SHI3 YSSA-MENU
68ZBCLIMU SHI6 YSSA-MENU
68YPPLIMU REPS MYFDCTOP
82YFILIMU REPS SAPMYFDC
90YMMLIMU REPS MYFDCF03
98YBCLIMU REPS MYFDCF04
104YSDLIMU REPS MYFDCF01
106YEDILIMU REPS MYFDCF02
No. of ChangesDevelopment ClassObject
These objects were changed very often. In these cases, the design might have been inadequate.
![Page 725: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/725.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-725
© SAP AG 2007
Errors During Import into Production - Last Six Months
00016
30012
920008
No of ErrorsReturn Code
There were 92 transport errors with return code 0008 and 3 with return code 0012, during imports in production in the last six months. This is a high number. It should be close to zero!
The import process should be monitored in the quality assurance system. If there are transport errors, they should be corrected before the import into production. The correction transport should be imported together with the original transport that caused the error. The relevant data for this graphic can be derived from the Import History.
![Page 726: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/726.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-726
© SAP AG 2007
Object Compare Between Development and Production
2.481Different Versions in DEV and PRD
143Objects only in PRD
2.923Objects only in DEV
Number of inconsistenciesCategory
There is a high number of inconsistent objects between DEV and PRD. If there is a high number of inconsistent objects between DEV and PRD, the systems might
behave differently. Outdated objects, which are not valid in PRD might be changed in DEV and transported to PRD again. Therefore, it is a risk for productive operation.
Reasons for inconsistencies can be: Transport sequence violations, canceled transports, changes directly in production, wrong initial setup of the systems, …
![Page 727: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/727.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-727
© SAP AG 2007
Repository Comparison with Transaction SREPO
Mass comparison of the repositories of two SAP systems You can compare the following sets of objects: • All customer objects and modified SAP objects • All customer objects • All modified SAP objects • All objects in a package • All objects in a transport request
Object list with information from the compared versions: • Green - Identical • Red - Not identical • Yellow - Objects cannot be compared directly
![Page 728: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/728.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-728
© SAP AG 2007
Customizing Comparison with Transaction SCU0
This tool compares customizing objects in two clients, either on the same or different SAP systems.
To compare objects, start the Customizing Cross-System Viewer in the logon client. Logon to the comparison client.
The Customizing Cross-System Viewer generates comparisons for selected customizing objects, which are saved as a work-list in the database.
You can make any number of comparisons with each work-list, in dialog or background. A comparison shows the differences for each object. You can also make an individual comparison for each object.
![Page 729: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/729.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-729
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 730: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/730.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-730
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management KPIs for IT Reporting
Goal:
Change Request Management is the efficient and punctual implementation of SAP software changes, with minimal risks usingstandardized methods and procedures.
KPIs:Number of change requests per time unit and status Approval/realization time of change requests per priority and categoryNumber of urgent corrections compared with normal correctionsNumber of rejected and approved change requests
![Page 731: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/731.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-731
© SAP AG 2007
Change Request Management Reporting: Urgent Corrections
To navigate to change transaction (here: urgent correction) double-click relevant entry in column
Transaction ID
The result is a list of all urgent corrections in the last six months.
![Page 732: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/732.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-732
© SAP AG 2007
Number and Average Runtime of Change Requests
18,675NormalMedium
2,410Urgent
12,450NormalHigh1,815Urgent
8,23NormalVery High
Total
Low
Priority
2,226Urgent
16,1133Normal
00Urgent
19,35Normal
4,91Urgent
Average Runtime (Days)
NumberCategory
This analysis shows the average runtime of change requests per priority and category. The average runtime of normal corrections is 16 days. The average runtime of urgent
corrections is 2 days. The overall number of changes in the selection period is 159. The amount of urgent
corrections is 16%. This is a high value.
![Page 733: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/733.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-733
© SAP AG 2007
Number and Rejected and Approved Change Requests
76ApprovedMedium
5Rejected
60ApprovedHigh2Rejected
18ApprovedVery High
Total
Low
Priority
22Rejected
133Approved
5Rejected
5Approved
10Rejected
NumberCategory
This analysis shows the number of rejected and approved change requests. 14% of all requests were rejected.
![Page 734: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/734.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-734
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 735: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/735.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-735
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Management KPIs for IT Reporting
Goal:
Maintenance supports the customer in planning and downloading the available SAP software patches and updates for the complete solution landscape.
KPIs:Comparison of the customer releases and support package level with SAP guidelinesSame maintenance level in the transport landscape through the technology stackFrequency of planned maintenance
![Page 736: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/736.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-736
© SAP AG 2007
Overview of Productive Systems
40B01.11.1998ProductiveR/3R/3 Italy120019896
45B01.10.1998ProductiveR/3R/3 France120019786
45B01.06.1998ProductiveR/3R/3 GB120014123
31H21.01.1998ProductiveR/3R/3 USA120014122
40B01.03.1998ProductiveR/3R/3 Turkey120010708
45B20.08.1997ProductiveR/3R/3 Spain120014830
45B01.01.1998ProductiveR/3R/3 Germany120011917
40B01.09.2003ProductiveSRMEBP Call-Off20141452
31I01.08.2003ProductiveAPOAPO20131230
DemoWEB ASWebAS20101300
31I01.05.2001ProductiveBWBW call off20081864
Rel.First Go-LiveUsageProductInst. DescriptionInst. No.
This table shows an overview of the installed systems in a productive solution. You can check the usage, the first Go-Live and the release. With this inventory list, you can get a good overview of the whole system landscape. All of these systems are already out of maintenance!
![Page 737: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/737.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-737
© SAP AG 2007
System History for a Transport Landscape
14.07.2006ERP 2004System Copy PRD -> QAS
June 20064.6B -> ERP 2004Upgrade PRDApril 20064.6B -> ERP 2004Upgrade DEVAugust 20003.1I -> 4.6BUpgrade PRD20003.1I -> 4.6BUpgrade DEVJanuary 19993.0F -> 3.1IUpgrade PRD19983.0F -> 3.1IUpgrade DEVJune 19973.0FInstallation PRD19963.0F Installation DEV
DateTarget-ReleaseStep
This table shows the system history of a transport landscape.
![Page 738: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/738.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-738
© SAP AG 2007
Maintenance Level in a Transport Landscape
0004
0000
0009
0013
0013
0009
0013
0009
0008
0005
0005
0004
0005
0005
0005
0005
0005
Level in QAS
000400042005_1_640ST-PI
0000000001H_ECC500ST-A/PI
00090009500SAP_HR
00130013350SAP_BW
00130013640SAP_BASIS
00090009500SAP_APPL
00130013640SAP_ABA
001000092004_1_640PI_BASIS
000900082004_1_500PI
00050005500EA-RETAIL
00050005500EA-PS
00040004300EA-IPPE
00050005500EA-HR
00050005500EA-GLTRADE
00050005500EA-FINSERV
00050005500EA-DFPS
00050005500EA-APPL
Level in PRDLevel in DEVReleaseComponent
This table shows the different maintenance levels along the transport landscape. There should be no inconsistencies.
![Page 739: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/739.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-739
© SAP AG 2007
Age of Implemented Support Packages
0600_620 WP-PI
05.08.20042003C_620 ST-PI
27.08.2004001E_R3_470ST-A/PI
21.12.200550470SAP_HR 07.12.200557620SAP_BASIS
27.10.200525470SAP_APPL
07.12.200557620SAP_ABA
01.07.2005102004_1_620PI_BASIS
01.08.200592004_1_470PI 27.10.200510200EA-RETAIL 27.10.200510200EA-PS 11.10.200520200EA-IPPE 21.12.200531200EA-HR 27.10.200510200EA-GLTRADE 27.10.200510200EA-FINSERV 27.10.200510200EA-DFPS 27.10.200510200EA-APPL
27.10.200515100ABA_PLUS
Date of Support PackageLevelReleaseComponent
This table shows when the installed support package was delivered. If the support package level is older than one year, a support package implementation project should be scheduled.
![Page 740: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/740.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-740
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 741: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/741.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-741
© SAP AG 2007
Test Management KPIs for IT Reporting
Goal:
Test Management supports the customer in planning, preparing, executing and evaluating test cycles. Testing is used to identify the characteristics of a software solution and to point out the difference between actual and required states.
KPIs:Number of available test casesNumber of failed and succeeded test cases in a test cycleRetention time of transport requests in the test systemNumber of incidents after the Go-Live of a change
![Page 742: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/742.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-742
© SAP AG 2007
Status Analysis – Test Plan Results
Overview:Test status of the whole test
plan
Overview : Test status on the scenario level
Test status on the test case
level
Overview :Test status on the process
level
You can also narrow your selection in a certain test plan. As a result, you see the number of test cases in status Error, No Result or OK on the different
levels of the test plan.
![Page 743: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/743.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-743
© SAP AG 2007
Testing Time in QAS - Test
23%540No Testing: Less than 5 minutes
14%324Insufficient Testing: Less than ½ hour
16%360Short Testing: More than ½hour but less than 1 day
47%1.091Intensive Testing: More than 1 day
Transport requests in %
Number of transportsTime spent in Quality Assurance System
This analysis shows how long the transport requests have spent in the test system. In this example, 37% of all transport requests spent less than half an hour in the quality assurance system, before they were forwarded into production.
This means that these transport requests were not properly tested.
![Page 744: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/744.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-744
© SAP AG 2007
Service Desk Messages after a Go-Live
An important key figure for the quality of testing is the number of incidents in the week after the Go-Live. Is the number of incidents significantly higher than in other weeks?
![Page 745: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/745.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-745
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 746: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/746.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-746
© SAP AG 2007
Solution Quality Reporting KPIs
Goal:
Solution Quality Reporting measures the overall quality, performance and availability of a solution.
KPIs:Number of ABAP dumps and Update errorsAverage response time in dialogAvailability – planned and unplanned downtime
![Page 747: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/747.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-747
© SAP AG 2007
SAP EarlyWatch Alert – Content
System Configuration
Performance Overview
Workload Distribution
SAP System Operations
Hardware Capacity
Database Performance
Database Administration
Trend Analysis
What is the Early Watch Alert? Important system data is transmitted from the SAP customer system to SAP at regular
intervals, via the remote connection. The data transferred includes only technical data with non sensitive content, which is
transparent and manageable in transaction SDCCN. SAP analyzes this data and provides a clear overview of the results in a report, which can be
downloaded from SAP Solution Manager.
![Page 748: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/748.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-748
© SAP AG 2007
Key Performance Indicators from EWA
down66.34- GBLast Month DB Growth
steady176.28 GBDB SizeDatabase Space Management
up350 msAvg. DB Request Time in Update Task
up271 msAvg. DB Request Time in Dialog TaskDatabase Performance
steady100 %Avg. Availability per Week
up556 msAvg. Response Time at Peak Dialog Hour
steady35114Max. Dialog Steps per Hour
up580 msAvg. Response Time in Dialog Task
up462Active UsersSystem Performance
TrendValueIndicatorsArea
This table shows important key performance indicators in various system areas.
![Page 749: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/749.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-749
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
System Errors
Performance
Availability
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 750: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/750.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-750
© SAP AG 2007
System Errors per Week (EWA)
7733110014.05.2006
5034610007.05.2006
8643110030.04.2006
934719523.04.2006
1601949716.04.2006
7424710002.04.2006
713129926.03.2006
Update ErrorsProgram Errors (ABAP)Availability (%)Date
This table shows the system errors per week. The number of ABAP dumps is an important KPI for the quality of the solution. It should be
monitored regularly. Depending on the system size, the value should be lower than 100 per day. If the value is very high, then activities must be started to reduce the number of ABAP dumps. The number of ABAP dumps can be retrieved from the Early Watch Alert report or in
transaction ST22.
![Page 751: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/751.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-751
© SAP AG 2007
History of ABAP dumps and Update Errors
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
15.0
6.20
05
15.0
7.20
05
15.0
8.20
05
15.0
9.20
05
15.1
0.20
05
15.1
1.20
05
15.1
2.20
05
15.0
1.20
06
15.0
2.20
06
15.0
3.20
06
15.0
4.20
06
15.0
5.20
06
15.0
6.20
06
15.0
7.20
06
15.0
8.20
06
15.0
9.20
06
[weeks]
[num
ber]
Program Errors (ABAP) Update Errors
This diagram shows the number of ABAP dumps and Update errors in the last months. Some days had an extremely high number of system errors.
![Page 752: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/752.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-752
© SAP AG 2007
Transport9LOAD_PROGRAM_LOSTAppl573MESSAGE_TYPE_X
Appl689DYNPRO_SEND_IN_BACKGROUNDIT1284DBIF_RSQL_SQL_ERRORAppl2177SYNTAX_ERRORUser3490TIME_OUTCategoryNo.Top 5 ABAP Dumps in the last six months
Quality Risk
Technical Analysis of the ABAP Statistics shows many dumps related to category application. These dumps could be avoided by improving the testing in quality assurance.
Category of ABAP Dumps
The different categories of ABAP dumps are: • Appl – runtime errors that should be found (caught) in QA during testing, thus indicating
insufficient testing • IT – technical system problems (e.g. with DB, OS); in most cases such errors cannot be
detected in QA • User behavior – dumps caused by a wrong end-user handling of an application • Transport – reason for the runtime errors is importing during time of high system activity
The different categories of dumps indicate weaknesses in the application management. If most
dumps are of category “Application”, then the development and test process could be improved. If most dumps are of category “IT”, then the technical system administration could be improved.
![Page 753: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/753.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-753
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
System Errors
Performance
Availability
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 754: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/754.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-754
© SAP AG 2007
History of Response Times
This graphic shows the average response times of a customer system over a period of 4 months. There is a significant increase in the avg. dialog response time from 900 ms in the beginning, to close to 1400 ms in the end.
A more detailed analysis showed that this is due to increased transaction volume after several roll-out waves.
![Page 755: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/755.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-755
© SAP AG 2007
Workload Analysis
The data for the average response time can be taken from the workload overview (transaction ST03). The average response time in dialog should be less than 1 second.
![Page 756: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/756.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-756
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control
System Errors
Performance
Availability
IT Reporting for Change Control
Lesson 2: Change Deployment
Lesson 3: Change Request Management
Lesson 4: Maintenance Management
Lesson 5: Test Management
Lesson 1: Change Diagnostics
Lesson 6: Solution Quality Reporting
![Page 757: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/757.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-757
© SAP AG 2007
System Availability Reporting – How to Get There
Navigation to System Availability Reporting
![Page 758: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/758.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-758
© SAP AG 2007
System Availability Reporting – System Selection
Selection of systems to be reported of
To selection details
Manual maintenance of system availability (status of system availability often has to be clarified personally with customers)
![Page 759: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/759.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-759
© SAP AG 2007
System Availability – Manual Maintenance
Standard options (can be modified)
Standard reasons (can be modified)
![Page 760: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/760.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-760
© SAP AG 2007
System Availability Reporting - Results
Availability Reporting result screen
![Page 761: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/761.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-761
© SAP AG 2007
Two Methods for Availability Reporting
ST03 Based Availability Reporting:Is the habitual method working in each EWA Is based on the evaluation of the ST03* performance collector log
Advantages: EWA standard procedure; no customizing required Easy to set up in the SLR
Disadvantages:Only supports monitoring of the availability object "SAP system".The measured value for "SAP system" availability is influenced by a multitude of external factors.Measurement resolution and accuracy only satisfies low-end requirements. Planned downtimes are not supported.
Availability Types • "System availability"
Measurement Resolution and Accuracy • The availability information is derived from the ST03 collector run. The measurement
resolution is one sample per hour, since the ST03 collector only runs once per hour. • In total there are 24 availability probes per day. This results in an accuracy of approx. ±4%
for each day. Availability Formats • "24h-Availability" • "Critical Uptime Availability" (called "Availability for critical periods")
Technical Prerequisites • Periodical execution of ST03 collector batch job
SAP_COLLECTOR_FOR_PERFMONITOR
![Page 762: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/762.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-762
© SAP AG 2007
Two Methods for Availability Reporting
CCMS Ping-based Availability Reporting:Is the enhanced reporting method for high accuracy demands
Advantages: Supports monitoring of different availability objects like "SAP system", "SAP instances", "SAP logon-groups" Provides high resolution measurement Provides exact timestamps for each single downtime incidence Supports maintenance of planned downtimes Provides a dynamic calendar for planned downtimes and critical uptimes for up to one year
Disadvantages: Effort for setup and customizing of CCMS Ping agents, CCMS and CPH requiredCurrently only available inside Service Level Reporting
Availability Types • "System availability - ABAP stack" • "System availability - JAVA stack" • "Instance availability" • "Instance logon availability" • "Logon-group availability"
Measurement Resolution and Accuracy • The availability information is derived from a CCMS ping agent. The highest measurement
resolution is one sample per minute for system- and instance availabilities and one sample every five minutes for instance logon- and logon-group logon availabilities.
• In total there are 1440 or 288 availability probes per day. This results in an accuracy of approx. ±0,07% or ± 0,35% for each day.
Availability Formats • "24h-Availability" • "24h-Availability, planned downtimes-adjusted" • "Critical Uptime Availability" • "Critical Uptime Availability, planned downtimes-adjusted"
![Page 763: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/763.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-763
• additional output: Detected downtimes, unplanned downtimes, planned downtimes
![Page 764: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/764.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-764
Technical Prerequisites • CCMS ping agent running on any host • CCMS Central Performance History configured to collect MTE-classes of context
"Availability"
![Page 765: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/765.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-765
© SAP AG 2007
Planned Outages by Category
In this example, the customer has reported the times of planned outages per category. Most planned outages are caused by the hardware, followed by the database and the Storage Area Network (SAN). This customer is in a roll-out process and upgrades the hardware frequently.
![Page 766: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/766.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-766
© SAP AG 2007
Unplanned Outages by Category
With regard to the unplanned incidents, the SAP system causes most outages, followed by the Storage Area Network (SAN) and database.
![Page 767: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/767.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-767
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control – Summary I
Change Diagnostics:Number of changes in the parameter configuration per time unitInconsistencies in the parameter configuration within the transport landscape and within the productive environmentCompleteness of landscape description in SAP Solution Manager
Change Deployment:Number of transports in the system per time unitNumber of errors during the transports per time unitModification level of the systemsConsistency of the transport landscape
Change Request Management:Number of change requests per time unit and statusApproval/realization time of change requests per priority and categoryNumber of urgent corrections compared with normal correctionsNumber of rejected and approved change requests
![Page 768: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/768.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-768
© SAP AG 2007
IT Reporting for Change Control – Summary II
Maintenance Management:Comparison of the customer releases and support package level with SAP guidelinesSame maintenance level in the transport landscape through the technology stackFrequency of planned maintenance
Test Management:Number of available test casesNumber of failed and succeeded test cases in a test cycleRetention time of transport requests in the test systemNumber of incidents after the Go-Live of a change
Solution Quality Reporting: Number of ABAP dumps and Update errorsAverage response time in dialogAvailability – planned and unplanned downtime
![Page 769: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/769.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-769
© SAP AG 2007
Unit Summary
Now you are able to:
Describe KPIs which are relevant for IT Reporting for Change Control
Know data sources to build up IT Reporting for Change Control
![Page 770: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/770.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-770
Exercises
Unit: IT Reporting for Change Control
In this exercise, you can check your knowledge on IT Reporting for Change Control
This exercise consists of questions and answers.
10-1 Which areas are relevant for IT Reporting for Change Control?
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
Root Cause Analysis
Test Management
Interface Management
Maintenance Management
10-2 Where can you determine the number of transport requests that were imported in the
last six months? Please choose the correct answer.
Import Buffer
Import History
![Page 771: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/771.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-771
Job Overview
10-3 Which KPIs are defined for Change Deployment
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
Number of transports in the system per time unit
Number of test cases
Average response time in dialog
Consistency of the transport landscape
![Page 772: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/772.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-772
Solutions
Unit: Enhanced Change and Transport System
10-1 Which areas are relevant for IT Reporting for Change Control?
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
O X Root Cause Analysis
X O Test Management
O X Interface Management
X O Maintenance Management
10-2 Where can you determine the number of transport requests that were imported in the last
six months?
Please choose the correct answer.
O Import Buffer
X Import History
O Job Overview
![Page 773: E2E200 en 40 Change Control Management 2007](https://reader030.vdocuments.net/reader030/viewer/2022012305/54f895984a7959fe478b498b/html5/thumbnails/773.jpg)
© SAP AG E2E200 10-773
10-3 Which KPIs are defined for Change Deployment
More than one answer is correct. Decide whether each answer is true or false.
True False
X O Number of transports in the system per time unit
O X Number of test cases
O X Average response time in dialog
X O Consistency of the transport landscape